Product Information and Planning Guide R1.0

Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PHOTONIC SERVICE SWITCH 32 (PSS-32) | Release 1.x.x
PRODUCT INFORMATION AND PLANNING GUIDE
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
ISSUE 3
APRIL 2009
Legal notice
Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their
respective owners.
The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.
Copyright 2009 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Contains proprietary/trade secret information which is the property of Alcatel-Lucent and must not be made available to, or copied or used by
anyone outside Alcatel-Lucent without its written authorization.
Not to be used or disclosed except in accordance with applicable agreements.
Conformance statements
Interference Information: Part 15 of FCC Rules

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If the equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the
guidelines in this document, the equipment may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at the expense of the
user.
Security statement
In rare instances, unauthorized individuals make connections to the telecommunications network through the use of remote access features. In
such an event, applicable tariffs require that the customer pay all network charges for traffic. Alcatel-Lucent cannot be responsible for such
charges and will not make any allowance or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized access.
Limited warranty
For terms and conditions of sale, contact your Alcatel-Lucent Account Team.
Ordering Information
For more ordering information, refer to How to order (p. xix) in the section titled About this document .
Contents
About this document
Purpose
Intended audience
Safety information
...................................................................................................................................................
xvii
...................................................................................................................................................................
xvii
Related information
...............................................................................................................................................................
xviii
Document support
..................................................................................................................................................................
xviii
Technical support
...................................................................................................................................................................
xviii
How to order
xix
...............................................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................
xix
.........................................................................................................................
xix
Packaging collection and recovery requirements

Recycling/take-back/disposal of product
How to comment
........................................................................................................................................................................
xx
Introduction
Overview
......................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview of Alcatel-Lucent product portfolio
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32
1-1
.............................................................................................................
1-2
.......................................................................................................................
1-2
................................................................................................................................................
1-5
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS product family
.........................................................................................................
1-6
..............................................................................................................................
1-6
Release 1.0 feature list
...........................................................................................................................................................
1-9
Feature release history
.........................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE Edge Device

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 benefits
xvii
....................................................................................................................................................................
How to use this document
xvii
.........................................................................................................................................................................................
1-10
Features
Overview
......................................................................................................................................................................................
2-1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
iii
Issue 3 April 2009
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch PSS-32 (1830 PSS-32)

Overview
......................................................................................................................................................................................
DWDM filter architectures
...................................................................................................................................................
Optical amplification and dispersion compensation
2-2
2-9
Optical transponders
..............................................................................................................................................................
2-11
Wavelength Tracker
...............................................................................................................................................................
2-15
Alien wavelengths
..................................................................................................................................................................
2-18
Optical protection
...................................................................................................................................................................
2-19
DWDM engineering rules

CWDM
...................................................................................................................................................
2-25
.......................................................................................................................................................................................
2-28
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Hardware
........................................................................................................................
Operation, administration, and maintenance

Metro DWDM topologies
3
...................................................................................................
2-2
2-29
...............................................................................................................
2-39
...................................................................................................................................................
2-43
Topologies and configurations

Overview
......................................................................................................................................................................................
Networking overview
Network elements
3-1
..............................................................................................................................................................
3-2
.....................................................................................................................................................................
3-5
TOADM configurations
.........................................................................................................................................................
FOADM configurations
.......................................................................................................................................................
3-10
.........................................................................................................................................................
3-13
TOADM networks
.................................................................................................................................................................
3-14
FOADM networks
.................................................................................................................................................................
3-19
In-line amplifier (ILA)
...........................................................................................................
3-22
................................................................................................................
3-23
Mixed TOADM/FOADM network topologies

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE networks
..............................
3-25
................................................................................................................................................
3-27
Mixed Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE networks
Dangling OT configuration
3-8
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
iv
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Product description
Overview
......................................................................................................................................................................................
4-1
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 NE

Overview
......................................................................................................................................................................................
4-2
Universal shelf
Overview
......................................................................................................................................................................................
Mandatory modules
.................................................................................................................................................................
4-3
4-8
.....................................................................................................................................................
4-15
....................................................................................................................................................................................
4-45
Non-mandatory modules
DCM shelf
Overview
OMD shelf
Overview
5
....................................................................................................................................................................................
4-47
Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning

Overview
......................................................................................................................................................................................
5-1
OAMP
Fault detection and alarm management
Performance monitoring
...........................................................................................................................
5-2
.........................................................................................................................................................
5-5
Automatic power adjustments
...........................................................................................................................................
Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability
..................................................................................................................
NE software installation, upgrades, and backouts

6
....................................................................................................
5-20
5-24
5-26
System planning and engineering

Overview
......................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Engineering and Planning Tool

Power and grounding
...........................................................................................................
6-1
..............................................................................................................................................................
6-2
Operating environment
Cooling
6-1
...........................................................................................................................................................
6-6
..........................................................................................................................................................................................
6-7
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
v
Issue 3 April 2009
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Product support
Overview
......................................................................................................................................................................................
Technical assistance
.................................................................................................................................................................
Accessing and navigating the on-line customer support (OLCS) web site
Other technical support services
8
......................................................................................................................................
7-1
7-6
7-11
Quality and reliability

Overview
......................................................................................................................................................................................
Reliability program
..................................................................................................................................................................
Design and development
........................................................................................................................................................
Failure rates
8-1
8-2
8-2
.................................................................................................................................................................................
8-2
...............................................................................................
8-14
.................................................................................................................................................................................
8-19
Sparing Tables for Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs)

References
8-1
................................................................................................................................
Manufacturing and field deployment
......................................................
7-1
Technical specifications
Overview
......................................................................................................................................................................................
9-1
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelf

Overview
......................................................................................................................................................................................
9-2
Technical specification tables

..........................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-4
Ordering
Overview
.....................................................................................................................................................................................
A-1
Software
Network element software
1354RM-PhM
.................................................................................................................................................
A-3
............................................................................................................................................................................
A-4
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Engineering and Planning Tool
...................................................................................
A-6
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
vi
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................
A-7
........................................................................................................................................................
A-8
.................................................................................................................................................................
A-8
1830 PSS-32 common equipment

1830 PSS-32 amplifiers
1830 PSS-32 filters
1830 PSS-32 protection
........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................
A-10
..................................................................................................................................
A-11
.........................................................................................................................................
A-11
..............................................................................................................................................................
A-12
1830 PSS-32 dispersion compensation modules

1832 PSS-32 optical transponders
1832 PSS-32 equipment racks
1832 PSS-32 cables
A-9
...........................................................................................................
A-15
.......................................................................................................................
A-15
1832 PSS-32 kit: customer-replaceable items

1832 PSS-32 miscellaneous equipment
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 and 1830 PSS-1 GBE pluggable optics

SFP
..............................................................................................................................................................................................
A-18
XFP
.............................................................................................................................................................................................
A-24
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE

Edge device
.............................................................................................................................................................................
A-27
Glossary
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
vii
Issue 3 April 2009
List of tables
2-1
100-GHz DWDM wavelength scheme
............................................................................................................
2-2
2-2
SFD5 channel coverage
.........................................................................................................................................
2-4
2-3
OSC SFP span loss support
2-4
Amplifier configurations
2-5
CWDM filter scheme
2-6
.................................................................................................................................
2-9
.....................................................................................................................................
2-10
...........................................................................................................................................
2-28
Card list
......................................................................................................................................................................
2-35
2-7
SFP list
.......................................................................................................................................................................
2-36
2-8
XFP list
......................................................................................................................................................................
2-37
2-9
OTN performance monitoring
3-1
DWDM wavelength transmission
......................................................................................................................
3-6
3-2
CWDM wavelength transmission
......................................................................................................................
3-7
4-1
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 card list and limits
4-2
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 DCMs
5-1
SONET Section PM parameters
5-2
SDH Regenerator Section PM parameters
5-3
OTUk and ODUk PM parameters (DW group)
5-4
PCS PM parameter definitions
5-5
Ethernet Statistics definitions (ETH group)
5-6
Interface PM Statistics definitions (INF group)
6-1
Power dissipation for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32
6-2
Ambient temperature and humidity limits
8-1
Failure rates and MTBFs for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32
9-1
Management specifications
..........................................................................................................................
2-41
........................................................................................
4-7
..............................................................................................................
4-45
......................................................................................................................
5-10
..................................................................................................
5-10
........................................................................................
5-10
.........................................................................................................................
5-12
................................................................................................
........................................................................................
5-13
5-17
...................................................................................
6-4
.....................................................................................................
6-6
....................................................................
8-3
...................................................................................................................................
9-4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
ix
Issue 3 April 2009
List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-2
Dimensions
9-3
LD specifications
9-4
OSC specifications
9-5
Channel plan (DWDM)
.........................................................................................................................................
9-8
9-6
Channel plan (CWDM)
..........................................................................................................................................
9-9
9-7
Filter specifications (Part 1 of 2)
....................................................................................................................
9-10
9-8
....................................................................................................................
9-12
9-9
Passband center wavelength
..............................................................................................................................
9-14
9-10
Wavelengths for SFC2 and SFC4
9-11
..................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
9-4
9-6
9-7
..................................................................................................................
9-15
SFD5 Optical Insertion Loss
.............................................................................................................................
9-15
9-12
SFC4 Optical Insertion Loss
.............................................................................................................................
9-16
9-13
CWR8 specifications
............................................................................................................................................
9-17
9-14
Tunable OT line-side specifications
9-15
SFP-XFP specifications
9-16
Alien wavelength client specifications
A-1
1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-1 GBE NE CD-ROMs and License Point Fees
A-2
1354RM-PhM CD-ROM and License Point Fees
A-3
EPT CD-ROM
A-4
1830 PSS-32 Common equipment
A-5
A-6
1830 PSS-32 Filters
A-7
1830 PSS-32 Protection
A-8
1830 PSS-32 DCMs
A-9
A-10
A-11
1830 PSS-32 cables
A-12
...............................................................................................................
9-18
.......................................................................................................................................
9-19
9-34
..........................................................................................................
........................................
A-3
.....................................................................................
A-4
..........................................................................................................................................................
A-6
...................................................................................................................
A-7
........................................................................................................................................
A-8
................................................................................................................................................
A-8
........................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
A-9
A-10
.................................................................................................................
A-11
.........................................................................................................................
A-11
.............................................................................................................................................
A-12
...........................................................................................
A-15
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-13
.......................................................................................................
A-15
A-14
1830 PSS-32/PSS-1 GBE SFPs
......................................................................................................................
A-18
A-15
1830 PSS-32/PSS-1 GBE XFPs
.....................................................................................................................
A-24
A-16
1830 PSS-1 GBE common equipment
A-17
1830 PSS-1 GBE kit: customer-replaceable items
A-18
1830 PSS-1 GBE miscellaneous equipment
.........................................................................................................
A-27
..................................................................................
A-28
..............................................................................................
A-28
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
xi
Issue 3 April 2009
List of figures
1-1
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS solution
2-1
FOADM 44-channel static filter architecture (2-degree)
2-2
FOADM 5-channel static-filter architecture (2-degree)
2-3
....................................................................................................................
1-4
.........................................................................
2-4
...........................................................................
2-5
ROADM filter architecture (2-degree)
............................................................................................................
2-6
2-4
TOADM filter architecture (2-degree)
.............................................................................................................
2-7
2-5
TOADM filter architecture w/growth beyond 8 add-drop channels
2-6
Node optical architecture
2-7
11STAR1 transmission architecture
2-8
11STMM10 transmission architecture
2-9
11STGE12 transmission architecture
2-10
Wavelength Tracker coding and encoding points
2-11
...................................................
....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................
2-8
2-10
2-13
...........................................................................................................
2-14
.............................................................................................................
2-15
.....................................................................................
2-16
Wavelength Tracker fault isolation
.................................................................................................................
2-17
2-12
Per-channel optical line protection
.................................................................................................................
2-19
2-13
OT OPS protection - TOADM auto-auto paths
2-14
SVAC OPS protection - FOADM manual-manual paths
2-15
OT OPS protection - FOADM auto-auto and FOADM manual-manual paths
2-16
OT OPS protection - FOADM auto-auto paths
2-17
OT OPS protection - FOADM auto-auto and TOADM auto-auto paths
2-18
Optical sub-network connection protection (O-SCNP)
2-19
Protection of alien wavelengths
2-20
ERules - TOADM w/ingress amplification only
2-21
ERules - TOADM w/ingress and egress amplification
2-22
Central office shelf - physical design
........................................................................................
......................................................................
2-21
2-21
............................
2-22
........................................................................................
2-22
........................................
2-22
..........................................................................
2-23
.......................................................................................................................
2-24
......................................................................................
2-26
..........................................................................
2-27
............................................................................................................
2-30
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
xiii
Issue 3 April 2009
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-23
CO shelf slot numbering
2-24
Sample multi-shelf NE connectivity
2-25
Example TOADM shelf configuration
2-26
Example: DWDM networks for FOADM, ROADM, and TOADM
2-27
.....................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................
2-31
2-33
2-38
................................................
2-44
Spurs and dual-homed nodes
............................................................................................................................
2-45
3-1
Linear network configuration
..............................................................................................................................
3-2
3-2
Ring network configuration
.................................................................................................................................
3-3
3-3
Interconnected ring network configuration
3-4
Mesh network configuration
3-5
Degree-2 TOADM block diagram
.....................................................................................................................
3-8
3-6
Degree-3 TOADM block diagram
.....................................................................................................................
3-9
3-7
TOADM terminal node block diagram
3-8
FOADM line terminal block diagram
3-9
FOADM Hub block diagram
3-10
Degree-2 FOADM block diagram
..................................................................................................................
3-12
3-11
Degree-3 FOADM block diagram
..................................................................................................................
3-13
3-12
ILA block diagram
...............................................................................................................................................
3-14
3-13
TOADM ring network topology
3-14
Interconnected TOADM rings
3-15
NE with connected TOADM CWR8 cards
3-16
Two-degree TOADM NE linear network
3-17
FOADM HUB ring
3-18
FOADM spur connection
3-19
Degree-3 FOADM
3-20
TOADM ring with static network spurs
3-21
Linear network topology
3-22
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE ring network
....................................................................................................
3-4
................................................................................................................................
3-5
.........................................................................................................
3-10
...........................................................................................................
3-10
............................................................................................................................
3-11
......................................................................................................................
3-16
..........................................................................................................................
3-17
.................................................................................................
3-18
....................................................................................................
3-19
...............................................................................................................................................
3-20
...................................................................................................................................
3-21
.................................................................................................................................................
3-22
.......................................................................................................
3-23
.....................................................................................................................................
3-24
........................................................................................
3-25
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
xiv
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-23
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 interconnected with Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE
...............
3-26
3-24
Examples of Mixed 1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-1 GBE topologies
........................................................
3-27
3-25
1830 Dangling OT
.................................................................................................................................................
3-28
4-1
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Universal Shelf
4-2
Universal Shelf slot layout
4-3
EC faceplate
4-4
Power filter faceplate
4-5
Fan tray faceplate
4-6
USRPNL faceplate view
4-7
Line driver
4-8
Functional diagram of CWR8 module within an optical line
4-9
CWR8
4-10
SFD5 functional diagram
4-11
SFD44 module
4-12
SFD44 faceplate view
4-13
SFC2/4/8 module
4-14
Generic OT functional model
4-15
11STAR1 faceplate
4-16
11STAR1 block diagram
4-17
11STMM10 faceplate
4-18
11STMM10 OT block diagram
4-19
11STGE12 faceplate
4-20
11STGE12 block diagram
4-21
1+1 Protection using Y-cable
4-22
OPS functional diagram
4-23
OPS module faceplate
5-1
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 PM points
..............................................................................................
4-4
...................................................................................................................................
4-6
................................................................................................................................................................
4-9
............................................................................................................................................
4-11
...................................................................................................................................................
4-13
.....................................................................................................................................
4-14
................................................................................................................................................................
4-16
.............................................................
4-17
.........................................................................................................................................................................
4-18
....................................................................................................................................
4-19
........................................................................................................................................................
4-20
..........................................................................................................................................
4-20
...................................................................................................................................................
4-21
...........................................................................................................................
4-23
................................................................................................................................................
4-26
.....................................................................................................................................
4-27
...........................................................................................................................................
4-31
........................................................................................................................
4-32
.............................................................................................................................................
4-36
..................................................................................................................................
4-37
............................................................................................................................
4-41
......................................................................................................................................
4-43
..........................................................................................................................................
4-44
.........................................................................................................
5-6
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
xv
Issue 3 April 2009
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-2
Analog parameter TCAs
5-3
EPT parameters for a TOADM node
5-4
Per-channel power control points within a TOADM node
5-5
Path power trace
5-6
Optical power levels at a Wavelength Tracker detection point
6-1
Shelf rear view showing power and ground connectors
6-2
Airflow through shelf
6-3
Air filter
8-1
Recommended Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 circuit pack and unit sparing levels: 30-day lead
time ........................................................................................................................................................................... 8-15
8-2
time ........................................................................................................................................................................... 8-17
8-3
time ........................................................................................................................................................................... 8-18
9-1
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Shelf Dimensions
........................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................
5-9
5-21
...................................................................
5-22
.....................................................................................................................................................
5-25
..........................................................
5-26
..........................................................................
6-3
.............................................................................................................................................
6-8
.......................................................................................................................................................................
6-9
..........................................................................................
9-3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
xvi
About this document

About this document
Purpose
This document describes the features, applications, configurations, and technical

specifications for the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Services Switch-32 (PSS-32).
Alcatel-Lucent Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 hardware components, network elements,
and networks are described in detail.
A high-level overview of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE Edge Device is also
included. However, the focus of this document is on the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32.
For complete information about the PSS-1 Edge Device, refer to the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-1 GBE Edge Device User Guide.
Intended audience
Network planners, analysts, managers, and engineers comprise the primary audience for
the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Product Information and Planning Guide. However,
the Alcatel-Lucent Account Team as well as anyone who needs information about the
features, applications, operation, and technical specifications of Alcatel-Lucent
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 could find this document useful.
How to use this document
This document is divided into nine chapters. Refer to the Contents section to locate
specific information by chapter.
Safety information
Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Safety Guide for safety information.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
xvii
Issue 3 April 2009
About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Related information
In addition to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Product Information and Planning

Guide, the following documents are included in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic
Service Switch (PSS) 32 document set.
Part number
Document title
8DG59474 HAAA
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Safety Guide
8DG59474 CAAA
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Release TL1

Command Guide
8DG59474 DAAA
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 CLI

Command Guide
8DG59474 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM Release 6.0

Photonic Manager Provisioning Guide
8DG59474 GAAA
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Engineering

and Planning Tool User Guide
8DG59474 BAAA
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 User

Provisioning Guide
8DG59474 EAAA
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Maintenance

and Trouble-Clearing Guide
8DG59474 KAAA
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Installation and

System Turn-Up Guide
8DG59474 FAAA
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS 32 SNMP MIB

Reference Guide
8DG59474 MAAA
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE Edge

Device User Guide
8DG59475 AAAA
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Documentation

CD-ROM
Document support
Alcatel-Lucent provides a referral telephone number for document support. Use this
number to report errors or to ask questions about the document. This is a non-technical
number. The referral number is 1 (888) 727 3615 (continental United States) or +1
(630) 713 5000 (for all countries).
Technical support
For technical support, contact your local customer support team. Reach them via the
web at http://alcatel-lucent.com/support at or the telephone number listed under the
Technical Assistance Center menu at http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/contact.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
xviii
About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How to order
To order Alcatel-Lucent documents and courses, contact your local sales representative
or use Online Customer Support (OLCS) (https://support.lucent.com).
Packaging collection and recovery requirements
Countries, states, localities, or other jurisdictions may require that systems be

established for the return and/or collection of packaging waste from the consumer, or
other end user, or from the waste stream. Additionally, reuse, recovery, and/or recycling
targets for the return and/or collection of the packaging waste may be established.
For more information regarding collection and recovery of packaging and packaging
waste within specific jurisdictions, please contact the Alcatel-Lucent Field
Services/Installation - Environmental Health and Safety organization.
Recycling/take-back/disposal of product
Electronic products bearing or referencing the symbol shown below, when put on the
market within the European Union, shall be collected and treated at the end of their
useful life in compliance with applicable European Union and local legislation. They
shall not be disposed of as part of unsorted municipal waste. Due to materials that may
be contained in the product, such as heavy metals or batteries, the environment and
human health may be negatively impacted as a result of inappropriate disposal.
Note: In the European Union, a solid bar under the crossed-out wheeled bin
indicates that the product was put on the market after 13 August 2005.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
xix
Issue 3 April 2009
About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Moreover, in compliance with legal requirements and contractual agreements, where

applicable, Alcatel-Lucent will offer to provide for the collection and treatment of
Alcatel-Lucent products at the end of their useful life. Alcatel-Lucent will also offer to
provide for the collection and treatment of existing products displaced by
Alcatel-Lucent equipment.
For information regarding take-back of equipment by Alcatel-Lucent, or for more
information regarding the requirements for recycling/disposal of product, please contact
your Alcatel-Lucent Account Manager or Alcatel-Lucent Take-Back Support at
takeback@alcatel-lucent.com (takeback@alcatel-lucent.com).
How to comment
To comment on this document, go to the Online Comment Form (http://www.

lucent-info.com/comments/enus/) or e-mail your comments to the Comments Hotline
(comments@alcatel-lucent.com).
To comment on this information product, go to the Online Comment Form
(http://www.lucent-info.com/comments) or email your comments to the Comments
Hotline (comments@alcatel-lucent.com).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
xx
Introduction
1
Overview
Purpose
This chapter introduces the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Switch (PSS) family, with
focus on the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 and a high-level overview of the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE Edge Device . For a detailed discussion of
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32, refer to Chapter 2, Features and Chapter 4, Product
description. For a detailed discussion of the 1830 PSS-1 Edge Device, refer to the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE Edge Device User Guide.
Contents
1-2
1-2
1-5
1-6
1-6
1-9
1-10
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
1-1
Issue 3 April 2009
Introduction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction
Metropolitan networks are the communications networks that link homes and
businesses to larger, long-distance core networks. These complex networks are filled
with both legacy and new networking equipment and must carry all types of service
traffic, including voice, data, and video Complete product information about the newly
merged and broad Alcatel-Lucent product portfolio can be obtained from local
customer teams.

Introduction
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) product family provides
increased networking flexibility and operational automation through zero-touch
transparent photonic networking. Photonic networks provide advanced flexibility,
performance, automation, and integration to transform wavelength division
multiplexing (WDM) into true transport networking for simplified and accelerated
operations.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS includes the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelf and the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE Edge Device .
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS product family key differentiators
The following are key differentiators that distinguish the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
family.
Modular metro WDM platform
Achieve best capital expense/operational expense (CAPEX/OPEX) mix
Unrivaled density
Fixed OADM, R/T OADM options
Universal optical transponder cards
Options for full C-band tunable optics and plug-in optics

Photonic layer management
Flexibility through automation
Wavelength Tracker
Automatic network-wide power monitoring
Network design tools
Transponderless node auto-commissioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
1-2
Introduction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Streamlined operations and reduces cost

Comprehensive element management layer/network management layer
(EML/NML) reduces the operations expense (OPEX) for service provisioning
Enhanced web-based workflows reduce the OPEX involved for managing
services
Service assurance capabilities rapidly identify customers and services impact
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS solution
Figure 1-1, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS solution (p. 1-4) shows the three key features
that distinguish Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS: the Alcatel-Lucent Engineering and Planning
Tool (EPT), the Network Management System (NMS), and the Network Element (NE)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
1-3
Issue 3 April 2009
Introduction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-1 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS solution
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
1-4
Introduction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch PSS-32 (1830 PSS-32) is the next
generation zero-touch transparent photonic network solution. A service-optimized,
flexible platform delivers advanced OADM/CWDM/DWDM transport capabilities in a
highly scalable and versatile package that supports interoffice facility/converged core
transport and wavelength services such as SDH/SONET, GigE/10 GigE and storage.
This innovative offering enables service providers to enhance their revenue
opportunities by offering a cost-effective, flexible and intelligent optical layer on which
to deliver voice, data and video services while minimizing operational and capital
costs.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 metro-networking solution
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 solution is a scalable optical transport platform for
regional and metro-area network transport and services delivery.
WDM platform family
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 provides the following wavelength division multiplexing

(WDM) platform features.
Cost-optimized footprints
CWDM/DWDM platform
2- to 4-degree wavelength-selectable switch (WSS)-based R/TOADM
w/colored/colorless add/drop
Fixed OADM/Reconfigurable/Tunable OADM (FOADM, ROADM, TOADM)
configurations
Point-to-point linear, ring, and mesh-capable networks
2.5G/10G/40G transport-ready
Advanced Engineering Rules

Wavelength Tracker
Alien wavelength support
Advanced Engineering and Planning Tool (EPT)
Blade-based OTN/GbE/TDM service cards
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 provides the following blade-based OTN/GbE/TDM

service cards.
Full C-band OTN tunable transponders or pluggable CWDM/DWDM XFPs

Universal client interface cards
Transparent/groomed services
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
1-5
Issue 3 April 2009
Introduction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Optimized service interfaces

Optical drop and continue for video
Multiservice cards
Alien wavelength cards

Introduction
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE Edge Device provides an optimized WDM access
platform that includes the following features.
1 Rack Unit (RU), 19-inch height

DC power
Standard or temperature-hardened versions
Black & White (B&W), CWDM, or DWDM optics

In-band management via GCC
Stackable as a single NE
Feature alignment with Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS service cards and operations
Interworking with Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS or Alcatel-Lucent 1696MS

Introduction
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 platform is designed to drive down the costs of
metro/regional network deployments while increasing network manageability and
responsiveness. One of the main benefits of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 is its
scalability and application support, from simple CWDM networks, through aggregation
of CWDM/DWDM ring/mesh networks, to regional DWDM networks.
Lower costs
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 platform supports the delivery of wavelength and
SDH/SONET services, while at the same time lowering the cost per bit carried,
accommodating changing metro traffic patterns and enabling fast service provisioning
times.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
1-6
Introduction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The open photonic layer enables service providers to lower transport network costs by
eliminating unnecessary OEO conversions. The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 platform
can reduce network capital and operating costs by more than 50 percent each, improve
service velocity, and improve optical network manageability.
Manages capital expense (CAPEX)
Capital expense is reduced at central office, data center, and customer premise
configurations. Reduced sparing requirements and ADM-on-a-blade transponder
configurations further cost savings. Additionally, CAPEX is managed through the
following Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS 32 features.
Zero-touch (touchless) transparent photonic networking/pure photonic traffic

processing
Integrated any-type client interfaces

Support of 40G/100G wavelengths for increasing service demands
Multi-degree nodes for meshed topologies
Provides exceptional operations environment
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 control plane facilitates and enhances the operations
environment by providing automated support, including autodiscovery of new circuit
packs, turn-up, and continuous SLA monitoring. Industry-leading density and a
GUI-based Engineering and Planning Tool (EPT) add to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-32 exceptional operations environment.
Operations expense (OPEX) is reduced through he following 1830 PSS 32 features.
End-to-end wavelength provisioning by network operations center (NOC)

No manual intervention at the network element (NE)
Fast network reconfiguration from the NOC
Extended photonic operations, administration, and maintenance (OAM) and

restoration capabilities
Delivers service assurance
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 platform delivers service assurance via integrated
Wavelength Tracker optical layer management. Wavelength Tracker optical layer
management delivers wavelength path tracing and monitoring capabilities and provides
proactive service assurance at low operational costs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
1-7
Issue 3 April 2009
Introduction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Wavelength Tracker optical performance monitoring
Wavelength Tracker enables NG-optical networks through protected wavelengths and

extension to higher-degree nodes. Wavelength Tracker also provides the following
features.
Service-aware wavelength management
Easy-to-use graphical display allows for quick troubleshooting and fault isolation
Saves on specialized training and costly optical test equipment
Wavelength Tracker optical layer management enables the delivery of true optical
SLAs, reduces network operations costs and makes optical network simple to manage.
Delivers forecast-free optical networking
Tunable, reconfigurable, fixed OADM (TOADM)
Fixed OADM (FOADM)
Add/drop any wavelength at any node to reduce stranded bandwidth

Add/drop any service at any port
Up to 4-degree nodes for maximum connectivity
CWDM/DWDM wavelengths
Improve efficiency, scalability and flexibility
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 solution brings new levels of efficiency, scalability,
and flexibility to regional and metro networks by offering reconfigurable optical
add-drop multiplexing, pay-as-you-grow DWDM, flexible network and element
management choices, and advanced network planning in a single package. This
architecture allows for arbitrary optical mesh networks with a combination of both
ROADM and static NEs within the networks that allows the lowest first in cost with
the added flexibility of ROADM. The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 enables service
providers to offer existing and new services while achieving life cycle cost savings
over existing offers.
Interworking with existing networks
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 supports a variety of SDH/SONET, data, and

wavelength services for complementary interworking with the 1830 PSS-1 GBE and
existing networks such as Alcatel-Lucent 1696 MS. Additionally, Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-32 photonic interoperability with other ITU-grid equipment reduces
optical-to-electrical-to-optical (OEO) conversions.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
1-8
Introduction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following is a product feature list for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Release 1.0,
introduced in October 2008.
14 RU (rack unit) 32-slot chassis (19-inch rack support)
ANSI rack
ETSI rack
2D Tunable OADM (8 colorless ports)
44-channel T/ROADM (8 colorless ports)

4D T/ROADM (6 colorless ports)
Fixed OADM
5-/44-channel DWDM
2-/4-/8-channel CWDM
In-line amplifier (ILA) node, terminal node
Point-to-point networks: ring and mesh

Tunable universal optical transponder (OT) units:
11STAR1 (11G Single-Port Tunable AnyRate) (1 client)
11STGE12 (11G Single-Port Tunable GbE Mux) (12 clients) (12xGbE Tunable
OT)
11STMM10 (11G Single-Port Tunable Multirate Mux (10 universal clients)

(10xAny Tunable OT)
Dangling OT 1696R 1830 interworking, (R1.1)

Optical protection switch (OPS) (1+1 protection)
Alien wavelengths via SVAC
SCOT
Wavelength Tracker
Auto power leveling
Engineering Planning Tool (EPT)

Web GUI
Redundant controllers
TL1, SNMP, CLI

1354RM-PhM Network Management System
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
1-9
Issue 3 April 2009
Introduction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE Edge Device is included in Release 1.0,
introduced in October 2008.

Introduction
This section is reserved for and will contain feature lists by product release and date.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
1-10
Features
2
Overview
Purpose
This chapter highlights the key features of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service
Switch-32 (1830 PSS-32). Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 is part of the 1830 PSS Metro
WDM product family, which also includes the 1830 PSS-1 edge devices, including the
1830 PSS-1 GBE Edge Device.
Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE Edge Device User Guide for complete
information about the 1830 PSS-1 GBE.
Contents
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch PSS-32 (1830 PSS-32)
2-2
Overview
2-2
2-2
2-9
2-11
Wavelength Tracker
2-15
Alien wavelengths
2-18
Optical protection
2-19
2-25
CWDM
2-28
2-29
2-39
2-43
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
2-1
Issue 3 April 2009
Features
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch PSS-32

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch

PSS-32 (1830 PSS-32)
Overview
Metropolitan networks differ from long-haul systems in that they typically contain
nodes of significantly different sizes and degrees and often face unpredictable traffic
growth.
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 is designed as a highly modular metro wavelength
division multiplexing (WDM) platform to cost-effectively meet the requirements of
initial network demands while simultaneously ready for upgrade to meet future
demands. At the same time, it employs advanced Zero Touch Photonics management
and control features, simplifying WDM system management so that it approaches the
ease-of-use usually associated only with SDH/SONET technology.

Overview
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 R1.0 supports up to 44 DWDM wavelength channels

in the C-band from the standardized optical grid specified by the ITU-T G.692
recommendation. Channel spacing is 100 GHz.
A future release of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 will support 88 channels on a 50-GHz
grid.
Refer to Table 2-1, 100-GHz DWDM wavelength scheme (p. 2-2).
Table 2-1
100-GHz DWDM wavelength scheme
Chan. Freq.
(nm)
(THz)
Chan.
Freq.
(THz)
(nm)
Chan.
Freq.
(THz)
(nm)
Chan.
Freq.
(THz)
(nm)
9170 191.7
1563.86
9280
192.8
1554.94
9390
193.9
1546.12
9500
195.0
1537.40
9180 191.8
1563.05
9290
192.9
1554.13
9400
194.0
1545.32
9510
195.1
1536.61
9190 191.9
1563.23
9300
193.0
1553.33
9410
194.1
1554.53
9520
195.2
1535.82
9200 192.0
1561.42
9310
193.1
1552.52
9420
194.2
1543.73
9530
195.3
1535.04
9210 192.1
1560.61
9320
193.2
1551.72
9430
194.3
1542.94
9540
195.4
1534.25
9220 192.2
1559.79
9330
193.3
1550.92
9440
194.4
1542.14
9550
195.5
1533.47
9230 192.3
1558.98
9340
193.4
1550.12
9450
194.5
1541.35
9560
195.6
1532.68
9240 192.4
1558.17
9350
193.5
1549.32
9460
194.6
1540.56
9570
195.7
1531.90
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
2-2
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-1
100-GHz DWDM wavelength scheme (continued)
Chan. Freq.
(nm)
(THz)
Chan.
Freq.
(THz)
(nm)
Chan.
Freq.
(THz)
(nm)
Chan.
Freq.
(THz)
(nm)
9250 192.5
1557.36
9360
193.6
1548.51
9470
194.7
1539.77
9580
195.8
1531.12
9260 192.6
1556.55
9370
193.7
1547.72
9480
194.8
1538.98
9590
195.9
1530.33
9270 192.7
1555.75
9380
193.8
1546.92
9490
194.9
1538.19
9600
196.0
1529.55
Transmission is over a fiber pair, i.e., one direction of transmission in each fiber.
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 supports a wide range of DWDM filter architectures
that allow the operator to optimize for lowest first equipment cost (capex) or lowest
operating cost (opex). In fact, nodes with different types of filters can be mixed in the
same network to allow even more granular optimization, if desired.
The different filter architectures are characterized by the optical technologies employed
in the multiplexing/demultiplexing and, in some cases, switching of optical channel
wavelengths.
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 supports multi-degree nodes up to 4 degrees, i.e.,
transparent transponderless interconnection of wavelengths between four line systems.
Multiple 4-degree instantiations (i.e., disjoint optical domains) can be supported in a
single NE.
A future release of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 will support 8 degrees.
FOADM
Fixed OADM (FOADM) optimizes for lowest first cost by using static optical filters
for multiplexing/demultiplexing. Further optimization is obtained by offering two
FOADM filter choices: a full-band 44-channel architecture and a scalable 5-channel
filter architecture.
Static filters require that optical transponders need to be fibered to the correct
wavelength ports on the filter faceplates, and any reconfigurability requires manual
re-arrangement of the fibers.
44-channel static filter (SFD44)
Each SFD44 filter card has a 44-channel optical multiplexer and 44-channel
demultiplexer. An SFD44 gives local access to all 44 channels from day 1. This gives
the greatest flexibility and simplifies planning, but at a slightly higher first cost than a
single 5-channel filter. Each of the 44 channels can be locally add-dropped,
transparently passed through, or regenerated if necessary. No expansion port is required
as all channels are available.
Refer to Figure 2-1, FOADM 44-channel static filter architecture (2-degree) (p. 2-4).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
2-3
Issue 3 April 2009
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-1 FOADM 44-channel static filter architecture (2-degree)
5-channel static filter (SFD5)
The eight 5-channel filters shown in Table 2-2, SFD5 channel coverage (p. 2-4)
cover 40 of the 44 DWDM wavelengths listed in Table 2-1, 100-GHz DWDM
wavelength scheme (p. 2-2).
Table 2-2
SFD5 channel coverage
Chan.
SFD5
filter
9170
Chan.
Chan.
SFD5
filter
9390
9180
9400
9190
SFD5A
9410
SFD5E
9290
SFD5
filter
SFD5C
Chan.
SFD5
filter
9510
SFD5G
9200
9300
9420
9520
9210
9310
9430
9530
9220
9320
9440
9540
9230
9330
9450
9550
9240
SFD5B
9340
SFD5D
9460
SFD5F
9560
9250
9350
9470
9570
9260
9360
9480
9580
9270
9370
9490
9590
9280
9380
9500
9600
SFD5H
Each SFD5 filter card has a 5-channel optical multiplexer and 5-channel demultiplexer,
plus a two-fiber expansion port.
Refer to Figure 2-2, FOADM 5-channel static-filter architecture (2-degree) (p. 2-5).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
2-4
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-2 FOADM 5-channel static-filter architecture (2-degree)
Expansion ports are used to cascade up to 3 filters in any combination, allowing for a
total of maximum 15 individually demultiplexed/multiplexed channels. Each of these
15 locally accessible channels can be either locally add-dropped, transparently passed
through, or regenerated if necessary. All other channels are band-passed through.
For lowest start-up cost, a node would start with a single SFD5x filter (with x being
any of the 8 variants). As more local add/drop channels are required, a second or third
SFD5 can be cascaded. Alternatively, a 44-channel SFD44 filter can be cascaded to the
expansion port of the SFD5 start-up filter to gain access to all 44 channels if necessary.
This upgrade path merges the lowest start-up cost with the capability to later expand to
maximum capacity.
ROADM
A reconfigurable OADM (ROADM) uses the 8-channel wavelength router (CWR8),

with a static filter (or cascade of static filters) connected to its expansion port.
Refer to Figure 2-3, ROADM filter architecture (2-degree) (p. 2-6).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
2-5
Issue 3 April 2009
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-3 ROADM filter architecture (2-degree)
The static filter(s) are used only for local add-drop or regeneration (if required). Like
the FOADM, transponders must be connected to the correct wavelength port on the
filters. However, unlike FOADMs, the through channels can be reconfigured to
add-drop (and vice versa) by the wavelength router remotely via software. Software
also automatically prevents channel collisions that might result from mis-fibered
transponders.
TOADM
The tunable ROADM (TOADM) is a refinement to the ROADM that yields the
ultimate in operational flexibility, especially when used in conjunction with
transponders with tunable wavelength lasers (all Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 R1.0
transponders support tunable lasers).
Refer to Figure 2-4, TOADM filter architecture (2-degree) (p. 2-7).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
2-6
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-4 TOADM filter architecture (2-degree)
In a 2-degree TOADM, transponders can be connected to any of the 8 colorless ports

on the same CWR8 regardless of transmission wavelengthsimplifying wavelength
adds. During reconfiguration, tunable transponders can tune to a new wavelength
without the need for any manual re-fibering. This combination of wavelength
switching, colorless add/drop, and tunable transponders yields a fully remotely
reconfigurable optical node, of which the ROADM was only a first step.
Additionally, the start-up cost of the TOADM is less than the ROADM because no
static filters are required; colorless add-drop ports are inherently part of the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 CWR8 wavelength router architecture.
For R1.0, it is only for large nodes with the addition of the 9th add-drop wavelength
that static (colored) filters need be added. In this case, up to 44 channels can be locally
add-dropped, although only the first 8 channels will support colorless add-drop.
Refer to Figure 2-5, TOADM filter architecture w/growth beyond 8 add-drop
channels (p. 2-8)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
2-7
Issue 3 April 2009
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-5 TOADM filter architecture w/growth beyond 8 add-drop channels
Colorless ports are also used for interconnection of additional CWR8 packs for higher
degree TOADM nodes. Therefore, for a 3-degree TOADM, there is one less colorless
port for transponders: seven; for 4-degree TOADM, six.
In future releases of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32, CWR8 wavelength routers can be
optionally cascaded for up to a 44-colorless-channel TOADM.
Also in a future release, a CWR8 cascade will be able to effect a directionless
TOADM. In the standard TOADM of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 R1.0, each CWR8
is associated with a particular WDM line (degree), and a transponder connected to that
CWR8 is also associated with that line. In a directionless TOADM, a transponder can
be switched to different optical lines without any re-fibering.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
2-8
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Optical amplifiers
Two optical amplifiers (OA) (also referred to as line drivers) are available in
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 R1.0.
Low Power High Gain DWDM Amplifier (ALPHG)
High Power High Gain DWDM Amplifier (AHPHG)
These OAs consist of two stages of EDFA amplifiers with mid-stage access for DCMs
in between. Features:
Support for all of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 44 channels (future, 88 channels) in

the C-band
Variable gain type: no LBOs are required except for at mid-stage when there is no
DCM
Integrated, provisionable tilt control (necessary for FOADM nodes; in TOADM

nodes the CWR8 performs optical equalization)
Transient support
Optical supervisory channel (OSC)
Inter-node management and control information is communicated over the OSC. The
OSC wavelength is at 1510 nm and is terminated on the amplifiers via pluggable SFP.
Three different OSC SFPs support three different ranges of span losses.
Refer to Table 2-3, OSC SFP span loss support (p. 2-9).
Table 2-3
OSC SFP span loss support
OSC SFP
Span loss range (dB)

(measured at 1545 nm)
Short reach
3 to 16
Long reach
11 to 26
Ultra-long reach
14 to 33
Amplifier node configuration
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 uses an optical amplifier at the ingress to the node,
and optionally at the egress. The ingress amplifier also provides OSC termination in
both directions.
Refer to Figure 2-6, Node optical architecture (p. 2-10)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
2-9
Issue 3 April 2009
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-6 Node optical architecture
Either of the ALPHG and AHPHG can be used in either position, allowing for a wide
range of flexibility with only two different packs. The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Engineering
and Planning Tool will determine the optimal combination of amplifiers.
Generally, most applications are supported by one of the amplifier configurations listed
in Table 2-4, Amplifier configurations (p. 2-10).
Table 2-4
Amplifier configurations
Optical Amplifier
Application
Ingress
Egress
Number of spans
Span length
ALPHG
AHPHG
Small
Very long
ALPHG
ALPHG
Medium
Long
ALPHG
None
High
Short
AHPHG
None
High
Medium
AHPHG
ALPHG
Low interest
AHPHG
AHPHG
Low interest
None
ALPHG
Not applicable
None
AHPHG
Not applicable
None
None
Not applicable
A future Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 release will provide a new card with the OSC
termination, but without any amplifiers, that is cost-optimized for very short spans not
requiring amplification.
Also planned for a future release is a Raman amplifier to support spans of more than
40-dB loss.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
2-10
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Chromatic dispersion compensation
For long all-optical routes, the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 uses dispersion
compensating modules (DCMs) to compensate for chromatic dispersion on the line
fiber. The granularity of the DCM lengths ensures that proper compensation can be
achieved flexibly. DCMs for standard single-mode (ITU-T G.652) fiber routes are
available for compensating 10, 20, 30, 50, 50, 60, 70, and 80 km.
DCMs are installed at the mid-stage of optical amplifiers and compensate for the line
associated with the amplifier.
In future releases, DCMs to support longer distances of SMF and to support NZ-DSF
(ITU-T G.655) fiber will be available.
In-line amplifier (ILA) node
In some physically larger networks, the distance between two add/drop nodes may
exceed the systems single span optical reach. In such a case, an ILA can be installed
at a mid-point, thereby creating two shorter spans and boosting the signal strength
before it gets too close to the noise floor.
Like an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 add/drop node, an ILA node is an individually
managed network element, but without channel add/drop capabilities. It uses a subset
of the same hardware to provide bidirectional line amplification and dispersion
compensation only.
In very long distance applications, multiple ILAs can be installed at multiple points
along the line.
Overview
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 includes a small family of highly flexible

transponders that cover a wide range of client signals and support high levels of
multiplexing to achieve maximum optical efficiency.
These transponders share many common features.
Line-side ITU-T G.709 OTU2 standards-compliant digital wrapper (10.709 Gb/s).

Supports transparent transport, optical channel level performance monitoring and
fault management, and standardized FEC for increased optical reach. (In some
special cases, described below, extended OTU2 at approximately 11 Gb/s is
supported).
Industry-leading FEC option, providing 8.5-dB OSNR coding gain, higher than
provided by the standard, is available on all transponders.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
2-11
Issue 3 April 2009
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Tunable line wavelength. Each transponder is able to tune to any of the 44

wavelengths (in a future release, 88 wavelengths) that Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32
supports. This drastically improves operations and inventory.
On-board variable optical attenuator to control optical line transmit power and
allow automatic channel power balancing.
Wavelength Tracker encoder. Adds a unique WaveKey to the line transmit

wavelength for network-wide monitoring.
Optical 1+1 protection for services requiring high availability.
Pluggable client optics. All client ports use SFPs or XFPs for maximum flexibility
of service and reach, and for lowest cost.
Facility and terminal loopbacks, provisionable error handling, client side digital
performance monitoring.
Performance monitoring available on all optical ports.
LC connectors are used on all optical connections in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830

PSS-32, for low cost and high density.
A future Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 release will introduce an additional variant of

each of the R1.0 transponders with the single tunable line interface replaced with two
pluggable XFP line interfaces. Although on-the-fly wavelength tunability is
sacrificed, lower first costs can be achieved, and integrated single-transponder
protection is supported.
A future Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 release will also provide transponders with
2.5/4G and 40G line interfaces. The former will be optimized for nodes with very
small amounts of add/drop traffic; the latter will be optimized for nodes with very
large amounts of add/drop traffic and/or 40G services.
11G Single Port Tunable AnyRate Transponder (11STAR1)
The 11STAR1 transponder accepts one of several types of 10G client signals via XFP
optics and wraps them into the 11G DWDM line signal.
The following client signals are supported.
OTU2 [ITU-T G.709]
STM-64, OC-192 [ITU-T SDH, Telcordia/ANSI SONET]
10G Ethernet WAN PHY [IEEE]

10G Ethernet LAN PHY [IEEE].
Several mappings are supported.
G.7041 compliant GFP-F mapping
Semi-transparent GFP-F mapping that includes Ethernet frame preamble

Fully transparent mapping into over-clocked OTU-2e (11.049 or 11.096 Gb/s)
10G Fibre Channel [ANSI]
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
2-12
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Back-to-back 11STAR1 transponders can also be used as a regenerator, if needed, for

any of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 line signals.
Refer to Figure 2-7, 11STAR1 transmission architecture (p. 2-13) for a high-level
transmission block diagram.
Figure 2-7 11STAR1 transmission architecture
11G Single Port Tunable Multirate Muxing Transponder (11STMM10)
The 11STMM10 transponder accepts up to ten sub-10G client signals of several types
via SFP optics and multiplexes them into the 11G DWDM line signal.
The following client signals are supported.
STM-1/-4/-16, OC-3/-12/-48 [ITU-T SDH, Telcordia/ANSI SONET].

Gigabit Ethernet (IEEE). Mapping via GFP-F or GFP-T (provisionable).
Fibre Channel 1G (FC-100), 2G (FC-200), 4G (FC-400) [ANSI]. Mapping via

GFP-F or GFP-T (provisionable)
This card supports any service-any port, i.e., any combination of the above client
signals can be mixed on any combination of client ports, as long as the aggregate
client bandwidth does not exceed the payload of the G.709 line signal.
As an example, when uniform clients are offered, the maximum capacity of the
11STMM10 is as follows:
4 x OTU1/ STM-16/ OC-48
8 x STM-1/ OC-3/ STM-4/ OC-12
9 x Gigabit Ethernet
10 x FC-100
4 x FC-200
2 x FC-400
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
2-13
Issue 3 April 2009
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer to Figure 2-8, 11STMM10 transmission architecture (p. 2-14) for a high-level
Figure 2-8 11STMM10 transmission architecture
The future dual-line version of this card will support ADM-on-a-blade functionality,
whereby individual clients may be add-dropped at a node.
11G Single Port Tunable GbE Muxing Transponder (11STGE12)
The 11STGE12 transponder accepts up to ten Gigabit Ethernet client signals via SFP
optics and performs non-blocking multiplexing into the 11G DWDM line signal (there
are 12 physical client SFP cages, but in R1.0 only ten are usable. In a future software
release, all 12 will be usable with statistical multiplexing).
Although the 11STMM10 card also multiplexes Gigabit Ethernet signals into an 11G
line signal, the 11STGE12 card is cost-optimized specifically for Gigabit Ethernet, and
allows for muxing of up to 10 (vs. 9) non-blocking signals. Instead of muxing
GFP-framed Gigabit Ethernets, the 11STGE12 uses an Ethernet switch. The switch
terminates the Ethernet physical layer and so is not fully transparent (the switch drops,
pauses, and terminates auto-negotiation but is otherwise transparent). On the other
hand, the 11STMM10 card has the option of GFP-T mapping for transparent Gigabit
Ethernet transport.
Refer to Figure 2-9, 11STGE12 transmission architecture (p. 2-15) for a high-level
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
2-14
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-9 11STGE12 transmission architecture
This card is hardware-ready for L2 traffic management, so that in a future software

release this card can be upgraded to support full L2 switching, including QoS and
oversubscription.
The future dual-line version of this card will support sub-wavelength grooming,
whereby individual clients may be add-dropped at a node.
Wavelength Tracker
Overview
Carriers need tools for managing the WDM layer that are similar in effectiveness to
those at the SDH/SONET layer. The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 has been designed
with a unique Wavelength Tracker capability, which enables every wavelength to be
traced as it passes through the WDM network.
How Wavelength Tracker works
Wavelength Tracker architecture is based on the principle of encode once, decode

many times. First, a unique optical signature known as a WaveKey is encoded into
each service wavelength at the transponders transmitter, before it enters the WDM
layer. Second, optical taps and DSP-based WaveKey decoders are present in optical
modules throughout the optical network. This circuitry reads the WaveKey and
optical power level of each wavelength, providing complete optical layer visibility for
network fiber connectivity and faults, at multiple points in each NE, regardless of
whether the wavelengths are add/dropped or simply passed through.
Refer to Figure 2-10, Wavelength Tracker coding and encoding points (p. 2-16).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
2-15
Issue 3 April 2009
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Wavelength Tracker
Figure 2-10 Wavelength Tracker coding and encoding points
The key to Wavelength Trackers cost-effectiveness is that it accomplishes all this

totally within the optical domain. Therefore, no expensive O-E-O conversions or
optical spectrum analyzers are needed, reducing overall system cost.
The assignment of WaveKeys is managed by the network elements (NEs), which
maintain a database of the WaveKeys used in the network.
Applications
Wavelength Tracker includes several applications.

Wavelength path trace
The WaveKey acts as an Optical J0 Trace Identifier. Wavelength Tracker traces the
end-to-end path of each wavelength, distinguishing each from all other
wavelengthseven multiple instances of the same wavelength when wavelength re-use
is employed on a network.
Optical power management
In ROADM/TOADM systems, power management is fully automated. Target optical

power levels are calculated for critical points in the system. Actual per-channel optical
power is measured by Wavelength Tracker. Algorithms then feed back to control power
at the transponder transmitter and at the CWR8 wavelength router. (On the former, a
variable optical attenuator [VOA] is used; on the latter. the power control is built-in to
the optical switching fabric).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
2-16
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Wavelength Tracker
This is a process that operates continuously to keep optical levels at ideal set points
and minimize optical power divergence throughout the life of the system. The result is
zero-touch power management at node commission and when adding or removing
wavelengths, and optimization of engineering rules.
Fault isolation
Whenever one or more optical powers fall outside their target zones, the occurrence is
alarmed and provides a highly effective GUI that aids in troubleshooting. The data can
be viewed in two different dimensions. One is the optical path view, which allows the
operator to trace the power of a single wavelength from the point it enters the network
until when it leaves. The other view is the optical fiber view, which shows the power
of all wavelengths at a single point.
Refer to Figure 2-11, Wavelength Tracker fault isolation (p. 2-17).
Figure 2-11 Wavelength Tracker fault isolation
The first example shows the power trace of a wavelength through two nodes
(horizontal scrolling allows viewing of the entire wavelength path), and the point in the
first node where the power falls out of the target zone. The second example shows a
point at which all but one of the wavelengths are within their target power range.
With this data, fiber bends, dirty connectors, incorrectly fibered fibers, etc., can be
isolated to a specific node and also to particular interconnect points within that node.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
2-17
Issue 3 April 2009
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Wavelength Tracker
This capability brings fault isolation out of the complex domain of analog optics with
its expensive test equipment and highly skilled craft, and into the domain of
SDH/SONET-like manageability.
Alien wavelengths
Overview
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32, as is typical with all WDM systems, accepts black
and white (B&W) client optical signals and converts them into ITU-T grid-compliant
DWDM line signals. The line card that performs this function is the optical
transponder. Among other functions, it performs optical-to-electrical-to-optical (O-E-O)
conversion and provides a manageable demarcation between the Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-32 (transport) and client switching equipment.
However, if the client equipment is capable of supporting native ITU-T grid-compliant
DWDM interfaces, it may not be necessary to use an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32
optical transponder: the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 can accept such alien
wavelengths without any O-E-O conversion. Even in this case, there are many
advantages to using optical transponders, but sometimes there is a prevailing advantage
in the economics of alien wavelengths.
In some systems, alien wavelengths are directly launched into the DWDM filters. With
no demarcation, this practice is fraught with operational problems.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 offers a mediating card creating a demarcation point
between the client and DWDM system. The card establishes a monitoring point and
has a VOA to control launch power. Uniquely, the card also has a WaveKey encoder
that enables optical performance monitoring and wavelength tracing of the alien
wavelength as it traverses the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 domainproviding for
unrivalled management of alien wavelengths. In R1.0 this card is the single port
variable attenuator card (SVAC); a multi-port card will be available in a future release.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
2-18
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Optical protection
Optical protection
Overview
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 supports optical 1+1 protection on a per-wavelength

basis over any network topology where diverse routes are available. Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-32 provides a choice of 1+1 architectures that allow the network operator to
make capex vs. service availability trade-offs. In other words, the amount of line and
transmission equipment redundancy can be adjusted to restrict the number of single
points of failure commensurate with a targeted availability requirement.
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 protection options share several common features.
Channels are protected on an individual basis
Protected and unprotected channels can be mixed in nodes and in fiber paths.
Protection switching is performed in less than 50 ms.

Lockout, forced, and manual switching are supported.
Examples include: full digital PMs on client and line side, facility and terminal
loopbacks, muxing of lower speed clients into single wavelength, wider range of
optical 1+1 protection options, better support of remote clients, guaranteed engineering
rules under all operating conditions and over the lifetime of the equipment.
Future releases of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 will support additional protection
architectures, sharing the common features above, but each with their own advantages
and trade-offs.
Per-channel optical line protection (with OPS)
This option 1+1 protects the optical line only. However, because the optical
transponder is not duplicated, it is the lowest cost option.
Refer to Figure 2-12, Per-channel optical line protection (p. 2-19)
Figure 2-12 Per-channel optical line protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
2-19
Issue 3 April 2009
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Optical protection
Following the left to right signal path, an unprotected client signal is converted to a
WDM line signal by a transponder. An Optical Protection Switch (OPS) pack is
inserted between the transponder and WDM filter. The OPS head-end bridges (passive
optical splitting) the line signal to a pair of diversely routed fibers. At the far end of
the network, the two line signals are received by the far-side OPS. The OPS switches
(optically) a valid line signal to the far-end transponder, which forwards the signal to
the far-end client. In the event of a line fiber cut on the working path, the far-end OPS
switches to the alternate signal. The switching criteria is based on loss of optical
power. The OPS also monitors the health of the protect path so that if there is a fiber
cut, the signal will be switched to a known good path. The reverse path operates in the
same but independent manner, i.e., the OPS supports uni-directional switching.
Only non-revertive mode is supported by the OPS in Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32
R1.0. Revertive switching is planned to be supported in a future release of
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32.
OPS protection configurations
For protection configurations, the working and protection lines may be both auto-power
managed, both manual-power managed, or one auto-power and one manual-power
managed.
The following combinations will be supported in R1.1.
OT OPS protection: TOADM auto-auto paths with and without SFDs (see Figure
2-13, OT OPS protection - TOADM auto-auto paths (p. 2-21))
SVAC OPS protection: TOADM auto-auto paths with and without SFDs
OT OPS protection: FOADM manual-manual paths
SVAC OPS protection: FOADM manual-manual paths (see Figure 2-14, SVAC
OPS protection - FOADM manual-manual paths (p. 2-21))
OT OPS protection: FOADM auto-auto and FOADM manual-manual paths (see

Figure 2-15, OT OPS protection - FOADM auto-auto and FOADM
manual-manual paths (p. 2-22))
SVAC OPS protection: FOADM auto-auto and FOADM manual-manual paths
OT OPS protection: FOADM auto-auto paths (see Figure 2-16, OT OPS

protection - FOADM auto-auto paths (p. 2-22))
SVAC OPS protection: FOADM auto-auto paths
OT OPS protection: FOADM auto-auto and TOADM auto-auto paths (see Figure
2-17, OT OPS protection - FOADM auto-auto and TOADM auto-auto paths
(p. 2-22))
SVAC OPS protection: FOADM auto-auto and TOADM auto-auto paths
The following figures show examples of power management combinations supported.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
2-20
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Optical protection
Figure 2-13 OT OPS protection - TOADM auto-auto paths
Auto
LD
CWR8
Th
ru
Th
ru
Auto
CWR8
LD
Line 2
Line 1
SFD
44
SFD
44
Th
ru
Auto
LD
CWR8
Th
ru
Auto
CWR8
LD
Line 2
Line 1
OPSA
SFD
44
SFD
44
Plus dual OT->OPSA->SFD44->

CWR8 OMD add path
OPSA
Figure 2-14 SVAC OPS protection - FOADM manual-manual paths
Manual
LD
Line 1
S
F
D
5
S
F
D
5
Manual
LD
Manual
LD
Line 2
Line 1
S
F
D
5
S
F
D
5
SVACSVAC
SVACSVAC
OPSA
OPSA
Alien Tx
Manual
LD
Line 2
Alien Tx
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
2-21
Issue 3 April 2009
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Optical protection
Figure 2-15 OT OPS protection - FOADM auto-auto and FOADM manual-manual

paths
Express
Auto
LD
Line 1
S
F
D
5
S
F
D
5
Express
Manual
LD
Manual
LD
Line 3
Line 3
S
F
D
5
Plus Alien tx->OPSA->SVAC add

path
OPSA
S
F
D
5
LD
S
F
D
44
LD
Auto
Line 2
OPSA
Figure 2-16 OT OPS protection - FOADM auto-auto paths
Auto
LD
Line 1
S
F
D
44
S
F
D
44
Auto
Auto
LD
LD
Line 2
Line 1
S
F
D
44
Plus Alien tx->OPSA->SVAC add

path
OPSA
Auto
Line 2
OPSA
Figure 2-17 OT OPS protection - FOADM auto-auto and TOADM auto-auto paths
Th
ru
Auto
LD
CWR8
S
F
D
44
Line 1
Auto
Auto
LD
LD
Line 3
Line 3
Th
ru
S
F
D
44
Auto
CWR8
LD
Line 2
SF
D44
SF
D44
Plus Alien tx ->OPSA ->SVAC ->SFD

x
add path
OPS
OPSA
T
T
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
2-22
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Optical protection
Optical sub-block network connection protection (O-SCNP)
This option 1+1 protects both the optical line and the transponders for higher service
availability.
Refer to Figure 2-18, Optical sub-network connection protection (O-SCNP) (p. 2-23)
Figure 2-18 Optical sub-network connection protection (O-SCNP)
Following the left to right signal path, an unprotected client signal is passively
head-end bridged by the Y-cable to a pair of redundant transponders. Each transponder
transmits a WDM line signal onto a diversely routed fiber. One signal is the primary,
and one signal is the secondary. At the far end, the primary and secondary signals are
received by another pair of redundant transponders. The transponder receiving the
primary line signal converts it to a client signal and passes it through the Y-cable to the
client equipment. The secondary transponder has its client interface turned off. In the
event of a primary line fiber cut, primary transponder failure, or primary signal
degrade, the primary transponder in the failed path will disable client signal
transmission and the secondary transponder will turn on its client signal transmission.
A major advantage to O-SNCP vs. using an OPS card is that the transponders perform
the switching. Because the transponders are O-E-O devices, protection switching can
be triggered by digital performance monitoring. Excessive BER is monitored by a
provisionable parameter, sfth, that the user can set to BER=10-3, or 10-4, or 10-5,
when an 11STAR1 or 11STMM10 client port is provisioned to SONET/SDH. (See the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 User Provisioning Guide for complete parameter details.)
Defects that contribute to a switch of 10G LAN clients are Loss of Signal, Loss of
Synchronization, HIBER, and line-side OTN defects (LOS, LOF, LOM, etc.). The
HIBER threshold is not a provisionable parameter. The secondary path is monitored in
an identical manner.
Switching can be provisioned as uni-directional or bi-directional, the latter required to
support Gigabit Ethernet auto-negotiation with client switches/routers. Revertive and
non-revertive switching are supported.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
2-23
Issue 3 April 2009
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Optical protection
Although the Y-cable is a single point of failure, it is only a passive component with a
very low failure rate. Note that there are three versions of the Y-cable: one supports
single-mode fiber connections (YSMF), and two support multi-mode client fiber:
50/125 (YMMF50) and 62.5/125 (YMMF62).
One restriction that applies to O-SNCP is that the transponder pair in each node must
reside in the same shelf, as they communicate over the shelf backplane for the
protection switching protocol.
Protection of alien wavelengths
Alien wavelengths are admitted into the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 at the SVAC
card. To support 1+1 optical layer protection for alien wavelengths, the OPS card is
used on the client side of a pair of redundant SVAC cards.
Refer to Figure 2-19, Protection of alien wavelengths (p. 2-24)
Figure 2-19 Protection of alien wavelengths
The OPS card operates in the same manner with the same features as in optical line
protection, but since it is on the client side of redundant SVAC cards.
Protection above the optical layer
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 optical 1+1 protection architectures include a tool kit
that provides an alternative to protection above the optical layer by the client
equipment. For protection above the optical layer, SDH/SONET ADMs and XCs,
Ethernet switches, and IP routers can offer the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 redundant
client interfaces and perform protection switching at their respective higher layers.
For protection at the optical layer, the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 treats the two
interfaces independently and routes them diversely.
Although protection above the optical layer can often provide the highest availability, it
will also be the most expensive to deploy.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
2-24
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Every network is unique, and except for very simple networks each will require an
individual optical design. The generalized engineering rules described in this section
apply to networks with uniform span losses. These engineering rules can give an
indication as to the optical reach capabilities of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32.
Figure 2-20, ERules - TOADM w/ingress amplification only (p. 2-26) shows the
maximum span loss that can be supported as a function of the number of spans and the
number of DWDM channels, when only ingress amplification is used. The span loss is
assumed to be equal to the span length (km) multiplied by 0.22 dB/km, plus 1 dB for
connectors. It is also assumed that all nodes are TOADM nodes (no FOADM nodes or
ILAs).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
2-25
Issue 3 April 2009
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-20 ERules - TOADM w/ingress amplification only
Figure 2-21, ERules - TOADM w/ingress and egress amplification (p. 2-27) shows
both ingress and egress amplifiers. The egress amplifiers boost the span losses that can
be supported.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
2-26
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-21 ERules - TOADM w/ingress and egress amplification
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
2-27
Issue 3 April 2009
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CWDM
CWDM
Overview
Compared to DWDM networks, CWDM networks have lower capacity and shorter
optical reach; however they are also lower in cost for certain applications where they
are suitable. Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 support for CWDM is another instance of the
products flexibility to cost-optimize for any Metro application, in this case usually for
Metro Access.
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 supports up to eight CWDM wavelength channels
from the standardized optical grid specified by the ITU-T G.694.2 recommendation.
Channel spacing is 20 nm. The 8 channels are 1471, 1491, 1511, 1531, 1551, 1571,
1591, and 1611 nm.
When Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 is configured to support CWDM, it shares all the
same hardware as DWDM and is supported out of the same shelf. That is, a node can
be on a DWDM ring with a CWDM spur. The major hardware differences are that a
CWDM line uses CWDM filters, is not amplified, and uses an embedded GCC channel
instead of an OSC for supervisory communications.
CWDM filters
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 R.1 includes three filter types.
SFC8: 8 add/drop channels; no pass-through channels. 1 variant.
SFC4x: 4 add/drop channels; 4 pass-through channels. 2 variants: x=A, B
SFC2x: 2 add/drop channels; 6 pass-through channels. 4 variants: x=A, B, C, D.
Refer to Table 2-5, CWDM filter scheme (p. 2-28)

Table 2-5
CWDM filter scheme
Wavelength (nm)
SFC2
SFC4
SFC8
1471
SFC2A
SFC4A
SFC8
1491
1511
SFC2B
1531
1551
SFC2C
SFC4B
1571
1591
SFC2D
1611
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
2-28
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CWDM
These filters do not support an OSC channel. Management information is

communicated node-to-node using the embedded GCC channel.
In a future release of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32, an SFC1x will become available
with one add/drop channel and seven pass-through channels.
CWDM optical interface
In Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 R1.0, a CWDM spur off of a DWDM ring can be
realized by plugging a CWDM SFP or XFP into a client port of an Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-32 optical transponder, which can connect to CWDM subtending equipment
on the spurs far end.
Two cases can be considered:
A CWDM XFP can be used on the client side of the 11STAR1 transponder. Two
reaches are available: 40 and 80 km. In this case, if the subtending device is an
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE edge device, then the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
management domain can be extended via the embedded GCC channel.
A CWDM SFP can be used on the client side of the 11STGE12 and 11STMM10
transponders. 80-km reach is available.
In Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 R1.0, CWDM is not supported on the line-side of the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 optical transponders (only tunable DWDM lasers).
However, in a future release, new versions of the optical transponders will be available
where the tunable line side DWDM laser is replaced with one or two pluggable
line-side XFPs. At that time, it will be possible to plug CWDM XFPs into the line-side
of transponders to enable full CWDM networking.

Wired equipment
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 hardware includes the wired equipment discussed in
this section.
Central office shelf (COSHF)/Universal shelf
The CO shelf is a 300mm/12-inch deep shelf (including all cabling, fibers, and shelf
cover), installable in 19-, 21-, and 23-inch racks. It is 14 RU (rack unit) high and up to
three shelves can be physically and thermally supported in a rack with 2000-mm
stacking space. All fibering is front access. Back-to-back racking is supported in an
ETSI frame.
Note: The terms COSHF and universal shelf are used interchangeably.
Refer to Figure 2-22, Central office shelf - physical design (p. 2-30)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
2-29
Issue 3 April 2009
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-22 Central office shelf - physical design
The shelf supports redundant control, redundant power, 32 universal slots, and all
office interfaces (management, maintenance, synchronization, and alarm) required for a
central office/government/enterprise application. The backplane provides for control
and management, power, and transponder-transponder communication in support of
O-SNCP.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
2-30
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 32 universal slots are arranged in two rows of 16, one above the other and
numbered 2 through 17 and 20 through 35 (shown in blue in Figure 2-23, CO shelf
slot numbering (p. 2-31)).
Figure 2-23 CO shelf slot numbering
Individual universal slots or combinations of universal slots are used to house cards of
varying height and width, enabling great flexibility and future-proofing the shelf. In
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 R1.0, universal slots support amplifier cards, filter cards,
transponders, SVACs and OPSs.
Each vertically adjacent pair of universal slots is separated by a user-installable/
removable Half Slot Adaptor (HSALD). The HSALD provides mechanical support to
the top of the pack in the lower universal slot and to the bottom of the pack in the top
universal slot.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
2-31
Issue 3 April 2009
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
With an HSALD installed, an individual universal slot can house a half-height,

single-wide circuit pack. Without an HSALD to separate them, two vertically adjacent
universal slots can be combined to form a single full-height, single-wide slot. Then two
adjacent full-height single-wide slots can be combined to form a single full-height
double wide slot.
There are also dedicated slots for duplex ECs (1 and 18), duplex power filters (19 and
36), fan (37), and user interface panel (40). Slots 38 and 39 are for future use.
Blanks are used to cover unused slots to improve cooling air flow.
Equipment controller (EC)
The Equipment Controller provides all node and shelf control and management
functions. The functions performed by the EC depend in which shelf it resides.
In Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 R1.0, up to eight shelves can be managed as a single
NE. (In future software releases, R1.0 systems can be upgraded to support a larger
number, ultimately supporting up to 24 shelves as a single NE.) The first CO shelf is
the master shelf. The EC in the master shelf is the master EC, and it provides the
LAN interfaces to external management systems and subtending shelves. The EC
maintains the persistent database and configures all shelves and packs in the NE
accordingly, and it also monitors their health.
An EC in a subtending shelf is called a subtending EC, which coordinates all
communication within its shelf and communicates fault and performance data back to
the master EC.
Management connectivity between shelves is done via Ethernet ports on the ECs. Refer
to Figure 2-24, Sample multi-shelf NE connectivity (p. 2-33).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
2-32
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-24 Sample multi-shelf NE connectivity
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
2-33
Issue 3 April 2009
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Power filters (PFDCxx)
The shelf supports optionally redundant DC power filters, which terminate the -48VDC
/ -60VDC power feeders from the office power supply and provides the requisite
DC/DC conversion and power filtering for the shelf. Each PF is capable of sustaining
the entire load of the system. The shelf power and ground connectors are located at the
rear of the shelf. The power filters come in 30A, 50A, and 70A sizes (PFDC30,
PFDC50, and PFDC70, respectively).
User interface panel (USRPNL)
The User Interface Panel provides craft access, extra LAN connections, the VoIP
orderwire, housekeeping inputs/outputs, rack alarm/lamp outputs, system status
indicators, lamp test, and audible alarm cut-off push buttons. It mounts into the master
COSHF, but it is not used by the subtending shelves (if any).
Fan (FAN)
The shelf is cooled by an in-service, field-replaceable fan tray. The FAN houses two
variable-speed fans and a controller, which communicates with the EC to control the
FAN speed.
Fiber storage tray (FST)
The Fiber Storage Tray is rack-mountable and is used for managing excess cable
lengths within the boundaries of the rack.
DCM shelf (DCMSHFxx)
The DCM shelf is a rack-mountable tray used for holding multiple DCM modules.
There is one version that is mountable in 19-inch racks (DCMSHF19) and one in ETSI
and ANSI (23-inch) racks (DCMSHF23). The number of DCMs that a shelf can house
depends on the rack type and DCM type (length).
Attenuator drawer (ATTNDRW)
The attenuator drawer is a 1 RU-high rack-mountable tray for storage of up to 24

attenuators of any size, if/when attenuators are needed for FOADM nodes.
Flex shelf (FLEXxxxx)
The Flex Shelf is a 6 RU-high mounting kit with cover that accepts the rack-mountable
SFD44, DCMSHFxx, ATTNHDRW, and FST. It comes in three variants: FLEX19 for
19-inch racks, FLEX23 for 23-inch racks, and FLEXETSI for 300-mm ETSI racks.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
2-34
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Card list
Refer to Table 2-6, Card list (p. 2-35)

Table 2-6
Card list
Acronym
Description
Variants
Size
SFD5x
Static Filter DWDM

5 channel
8: x=A, B, C, D, E,
F, G, H
Single-width,
half-height
SFD44
44 Channel Optical
Mux/Demux
Rack-mounted, 2
RU height
CWR8
8 Channel Colorless
Wavelength Router
Double-width, full
height
SFC8
Static Filter CWDM

8 Channel
Single-width, full
height
SFC4x
Static Filter CWDM

4 Channel
2: x=A, B
Single-width,
half-height
SFC2x
Static Filter CWDM

2 Channel
4 variants: x=A, B,
C, D
Single-width,
half-height
ALPHG
Low Power High

Gain DWDM
Amplifier
Single-width, full
height
AHPHG
High Power High

Gain DWDM
Amplifier
Single-width, full
height
8: x=010, 020, 030,

040, 050, 060, 070,
080
Optical filters
Amplifiers
Dispersion Compensation Modules

DMSMFxxx
DCM single-mode
fiber (G.652)
Optical transponders and associated cards

11STAR1
11G Single Port

Tunable AnyRate (1
client)
Single-width,
half-height
11STMM10
11G Single Port

Tunable Multirate
Mux (10 universal
clients)
Single-width, full
height
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
2-35
Issue 3 April 2009
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-6
Card list
(continued)
Acronym
Description
Variants
Size
11STGE12
11G Single Port

Tunable GBE Mux
(12 client)
Single-width,
full-height
OPSA
Enhanced Optical
Protection Switch
Pack
Single-width,
half-height
SVAC
Single Variable
Attenuator Card
Single-width,
half-height
EC
Equipment
controller
1 EC slot
FAN
Fan
1 FAN slot
PFDCxx
Power Filter
3: x=30, 50, 70
1 PF slot
USRPNL
User Interface Panel
1 USRPNL slot
Wired equipment
Pluggable SFP and XFP optics
An array of pluggable optics are available that support the client-side interfaces on the
optical transponders, as indicated by a check mark in Table 2-7, SFP list (p. 2-36)
and Table 2-8, XFP list (p. 2-37). (B&W refers to the black and white non-WDM
wavelengths.)
Table 2-7
SFP list
Client signal
Reach
(nm)
11STGE12
11STMM10
B&W
STM-1/OC-3
L-1.1/LR-1
1310
B&W
STM-4/OC-12
S-4.1/IR-1
1310
B&W STM-16/
OC-48/ OTU-1
I-16.1/SR-1
1310
B&W STM-16/
OC-48/ OTU-1
S-16.1/SR-1
1310
B&W STM-16/
OC-48/ OTU-1
L-16.1/LR-1
1310
B&W STM-16/
OC-48/ OTU-1
L-16.2/LR-2
1550
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
2-36
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-7
SFP list
(continued)
Client signal
Reach
(nm)
11STGE12
11STMM10
B&W multirate
2.7 Gbps
S-16.1/IR-1
1310
B&W GBE
1000BASE-SX
850
B&W GBE
1000BASE-LX
1310
B&W GBE
1000BASE-ZX
1550
B&W 1G/2G
FC
SN-I
850
B&W
1G/2G/4G FC
SN-I
850
CWDM
multirate 2.7
Gbps
80 km
1470 to 1610
Future
Table 2-8
XFP list
Client signal
Reach
(nm)
11STAR1
B&W STM-64/
OC-192/OTU2/
10GbE
I64.1/ SR-1/
10GBASE-LX
1310
B&W STM-64/
OC-192/OTU2/
10GbE
S64.2b/ IR-2/
10GBASE-EX
1550
B&W 10GbE
10GBASE-SR
850
CWDM
70 km
1471 to 1611
Example shelf configurations
Figure 2-25, Example TOADM shelf configuration (p. 2-38) shows examples of 2and 4-degree TOADM shelf configurations. As slot assignments are fully flexible
(other than EC and PF), other configurations are equally valid. Unassigned slots are
used for growth cards, e.g., transponders and static filters.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
2-37
Issue 3 April 2009
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-25 Example TOADM shelf configuration
A ROADM starts with the TOADM configuration and adds static filters, either SFD5
filters into the shelf and/or SFD44 filters miscellaneously mounted in the rack.
A FOADM would not have any CWR8 cards. It would only have either SFD5 filters in
the shelf and/or SFD44 filters miscellaneously mounted in the rack.
In all cases, once the first shelf is filled, additional subtending shelves are added as
needed.
A special case is a transponder-only node that does not have any optical amplifiers or
filters. This configuration is used when Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 transponders are
used in conjunction with an existing and compatible DWDM line system, e.g., the
Alcatel-Lucent 1696 Metrospan and 1696ROADM.
Compliance
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 complies with the follow regulatory standards for
Environmental, Safety, EMC, ESD, and Hazardous Substances
Telcordia NEBS Level 3, GR63 and GR1089

FCC Part 15 Class A
UL Certification UL 1950 / UL 60950
CE marking EN 300 386 (Ed.09/2001)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
2-38
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IEC Safety
Includes:
IEC 60950: 1999 + Corr.1: 2000 (electrical safety)
IEC 60825-1: 2001 (optical safety)
IEC 60825-2: 2000 + ISO1: 2001 (optical safety)

Canadian Safety Assoc. CSA-22.2-No.25-M90
ETSI Environmental ETS 300 019
Includes:
Storage: ETS 300 01912 : 1992, hazard level 1.2

Transportation: ETS 300 01911 : 1992, hazard level 2.2
Operations: ETS 300 01913 :1992 , hazard level 3.2
ETSI EMC
Includes:
EN 300 386 v1.3.2 (Ed.05/2003
ETSI ES 201 468 v.1.2.1 (Ed.09/2002)
EMC directive 89/336 LV - directive 73/23

ETSI acoustic ETS 300 753 (Ed.10/1997)
ANSI T1.308-1996 (ESD)
RoHS-5 Restriction of Hazardous Substances

GR-383-CORE Generic Requirements for COMMON LANGUAGE Bar Code
Labels, Issue 2, October 2000

Management interfaces
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 NE supports a range of management interfaces.

Simple network management protocol (SNMP)
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 system supports the following SNMP functions.
Provisioning interface for all equipment and parameters via SNMPv2c. A future
release of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 will support SNMPv3.
Reporting of all alarms/traps and ability to define trap destination.
Transaction language 1 (TL1)
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 system supports a TL1 command interface for all
provisioning, reporting, and alarming.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
2-39
Issue 3 April 2009
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Web GUI interface
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 network element (NE) includes a web server so that
craft can manage an NE from any Windows-based PC with a web browser, without the
need for any other special software.
Command line interface (CLI)
A CLI supports all 1830 PSS-32 system functionality.

Gateway network element (GNE)
The network management system can manage an 1830 PSS-32 network while only
connecting to a single 1830 PSS-32 NE. That NE is called a GNE and provides the
management connectivity to all other 1830 PSS-32 NEs in the network.
Inter-node communication
Optical supervisory channel (OSC)
The OSC is a separate optical channel, operating at the STM-1/OC-3 rate of 155 Mb/s,
that transfers management and control information between the ECs of two adjacent
nodes, regardless of whether any of the DWDM payload channels are terminated
between those two nodes. The channel is capable of transporting both IP and OSI
PDUs.
General communications channel (GCC)
No OSC available in CWDM transmission, so the GCC0 bytes in the G.709 overhead
are used for inter-node communication.
Management resiliency
Duplex equipment controllers
A node can be provisioned with a single EC or with duplex EC for 1+1 redundancy. In
the latter case, an EC failure will cause an automatic protection switch to the backup
EC. In either case, an EC failure does not affect transmission or service availability.
Multiple gateway NEs
More than one NE in an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 network can be designated to be

a GNE. In this way, management connectivity can be maintained in the event of DCN
and/or Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 NE failures.
Redundant optical supervisory channel
For ring and collapsed ring topologies, OSC communications to all nodes will be
maintained in the event of a fiber break on any single span.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
2-40
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 supports Performance Monitoring on 100 percent of

all points of termination and adaptation on the boundaries of the system and between
sub-systems.
Optical PM
The system supports the monitoring and reporting of received and transmitted optical
power on client and DWDM line-side interfaces.
OTN
The line signal is G.709-framed and the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 monitors the
section and path performance parameters shown in Table 2-9, OTN performance
monitoring (p. 2-41).
Table 2-9
OTN performance monitoring
PM parameter
Section
Path
Errored seconds (ES)
Yes
Yes
Severely errored seconds

(SES)
Yes
Yes
Unavailable (UAS)
Yes
Yes
Background block errors

(BBE)
Yes
Yes
FEC: corrected bits
Yes
NA
FEC: uncorrected bytes
Yes
NA
Performance monitoring complies to ITU-T G.874 and G.798.

SDH/SONET client
The B1 and B2 overhead bytes are monitored. There are counters for code violations
(CV), ES, SES, and severely errored framing seconds (SEFS).
Ethernet client
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 supports the non-intrusive monitoring of Ethernet per
RFC-2819, including ingress counters for CV, valid bytes and valid frames, and a wide
array of RMON performance monitoring statistics.
Fibre channel client
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 counts ingress code violations.

Optical supervisory channel digital PMs
The system supports the monitoring and reporting of these OSC PMs: CV and BBE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
2-41
Issue 3 April 2009
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 is provisionable on a per-port basis to detect/process,

and report faults, failures, and performance. It is able to diagnosis equipment faults
down to a field replaceable unit (FRU) or interface. Transport fault processing is
performed as defined in G.783 and EN 300 417. The system allows provisioning for
the SONET-specific LOS/LOF handling to satisfy Telcordia GR-253 issue 3 (2000) and
ANSI T1.231.
There is one system default alarm profile that contains all alarms/conditions supported
in the system and their severity: Critical, Major, Minor. The user can change the
severity of alarms on each port/facility independently or point to the system profile.
The system profile can be modified or reset to factory defaults
Optical line
Optical line fault processing is supported.

OTN
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 complies to G.709 for defect/fault processing of

OTUk/ODUk overhead at all OTUk/ODUk interfaces.
The following is a short summary of the main functions.
Loss of frame (LOF) detected, causes signal fail (SF) condition and Alarm Insertion
Signal (AIS) insertion.
Source and Destination Access Point Identifiers (SAPI and DAPI) are monitored.
When trail Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM) detected, causes signal fail (SF)
condition and AIS insertion.
Bit-interleaved parity (BIP-8) inserted at source. At sink, violations detected,

causing signal degrade, and backwards insertion of backward error indication (BEI)
inserted.
Generally, the following indicators are sourced when appropriate: AIS, Incoming
Alignment Error (IAE), Backward Incoming Alignment Error Indication (BIAE),
and Backward Defect Information (BDI).
SDH/SONET
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 complies to G.707 and GR-253 for defect/fault
processing at all STM-n/VC-m and OC-n/STS-m interfaces, respectively. For
transparent transport of these client signals, the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 supports
non-intrusive monitoring in the source and sink directions.
The following is a short summary of the main functions.
A1, A2 bytes monitored; LOF declared when appropriate
B1, B3 bytes monitored; degraded signal conditions declared when appropriate
J0 byte monitored; TIM and SF declared when appropriate
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
2-42
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Customer LAN
A customer-usable virtual LAN is supported, whereby the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32

network transports operator traffic between any NEs, via an Ethernet port (specifically
the VoIP jack on USRPNL). This traffic is carried over the OSC.

Overview
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports an almost unlimited number of DWDM

network configurations and combined network configurations. Some of these
configurations are listed below. For more detailed information, refer to Chapter 3,
Topologies and configurations.
Simple point-to-point and linear topology with optical add-drop
Ring topology with optical add-drop

Transparent ring interconnection using multi-degree nodes with local add-drop
Additional mesh networking, e.g., in dual-node ring interconnection.
In these networks, each of the nodes can be FOADM, ROADM, or TOADM, although
the 4-degree nodes that perform ring interconnection would normally be ROADM or
TOADM.
Examples of these topologies are shown in Figure 2-26, Example: DWDM networks
for FOADM, ROADM, and TOADM (p. 2-44).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
2-43
Issue 3 April 2009
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-26 Example: DWDM networks for FOADM, ROADM, and TOADM
From such networks, spurs and dual-homed nodes can be added for metro access. as
shown in Figure 2-27, Spurs and dual-homed nodes (p. 2-45).
In these cases there is no need for reconfigurability at the access node, so typically
FOADMs are deployed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
2-44
Features

(1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-27 Spurs and dual-homed nodes
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
2-45
Issue 3 April 2009
3opologies and
T
configurations
Overview
Purpose
This chapter identifies Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 network topologies and

configurations. Interconnect between Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 and Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-1 GBE (edge device) is also highlighted. For topologies and configurations
that are specific to the 1830 PSS-1 GBE, refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE
Edge Device User Guide.
Contents
Networking overview
3-2
Network elements
3-5
3-8
3-10
3-13
TOADM networks
3-14
FOADM networks
3-19
3-22
3-23
Mixed Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE

networks
3-25
3-27
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
3-1
Issue 3 April 2009
Networking overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Networking overview
Introduction
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 network consists of single, standalone network

element (NE), or two or more interconnected network elements that provide
SDH/SONET/GigE aggregation and transport, 10G, FC (R1.1), or transponderless
wavelength services in a metropolitan or regional networking environment.
Linear configuration
Figure 3-1, Linear network configuration (p. 3-2) shows network elements connected
in a linear fashion. While protection may be added by providing working and
protection fiber pairs between network elements, a cut in the fiber conduit used to
connect two network elements (assuming the working and protection fibers share the
same conduit) would isolate one or more network elements. This configuration is also
bandwidth limiting, since intermediate network elements must carry extensive
pass-through traffic.
Figure 3-1 Linear network configuration
Ring configuration
Figure 3-2, Ring network configuration (p. 3-3) shows network elements connected
in a ring. This configuration assures that in the case of a fiber cut, traffic can be safely
rerouted. However, in the case of a fiber cut, the ring configuration effectively
becomes a point-to-point linear configuration, with all of its inherent limitations.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
3-2
Networking overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-2 Ring network configuration
Interconnected rings
In order to pass traffic between two or more rings, the rings can be connected using a
multi-degree NE that is capable of passing traffic around each of the rings and between
the two rings, as illustrated in Figure 3-3, Interconnected ring network configuration
(p. 3-4)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
3-3
Issue 3 April 2009
Networking overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-3 Interconnected ring network configuration
Mesh configuration
A mesh network contains at least one network element that provides more than two
degrees of connectivity to other NEs in the network. For example, in the network
illustrated in Figure 3-4, Mesh network configuration (p. 3-5), NEs 2, 3, 5, and 6 ,
each connect to four different network fibers, and provide four degrees of network
connectivity. Because they provide multiple links and data paths between NEs, mesh
networks are highly resilient.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
3-4
Networking overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-4 Mesh network configuration
Network elements
Introduction
The network element (NE) is the basic building block for a network. Networks can
comprise hundreds of network elements
Each NE consists of a single shelf, or two or more interconnected shelves that are
equipped with the service cards required to provide network services. An NE, whether
it consists of one or more Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelves, is viewed as a single
entity by the network management system.
Transmission between NEs
Within the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 network, data is carried between the NEs over
optical fiber pairs as a single wavelength, or as multiple wavelengths, using
wavelength division multiplexing (WDM). Because WDM allows you to transmit
several signals over a single fiber pair, efficient use of the optical fiber plant is
ensured.
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 supports dense wavelength division multiplexing
(DWDM) which allows you to carry up to 44 channels over a single fiber pair, as
described in Table 3-1, DWDM wavelength transmission (p. 3-6). Coarse wavelength
division multiplexing (CWDM) is also supported, which allows you to carry up to
eight channels over a single fiber pair, as described in Table 3-2, CWDM wavelength
transmission (p. 3-7).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
3-5
Issue 3 April 2009
Network elements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 3-1
44
10

5
ITU Ch.
Freq.
Wave-
Port
(THz)
length
Label
SFD5
SFD44
CRW8
(nm)
L2
L21
L22
L1
L11
L12
S2
S21
S22
17
191.7
1563.86
9170
18
191.8
1563.05
9180
19
191.9
1562.23
9190
20
192.0
1561.42
9200
21
192.1
1560.61
9210
22
192.2
1559.79
9220
23
192.3
1558.98
9230
24
192.4
1558.17
9240
25
192.5
1557.36
9250
26
192.6
1556.55
9260
27
192.7
1555.75
9270
28
192.8
1554.94
9280
29
192.9
1554.13
9290
30
193.0
1553.33
9300
31
193.1
1552.52
9310
32
193.2
1551.72
9320
33
193.3
1550.92
9330
34
193.4
1550.12
9340
35
193.5
1549.32
9350
36
193.6
1548.51
9360
37
193.7
1547.72
9370
38
193.8
1546.92
9380
39
193.9
1546.12
9390
40
194.0
1545.32
9400
41
194.1
1554.53
9410
42
194.2
1543.73
9420
43
194.3
1542.94
9430
44
194.4
1542.14
9440
45
194.5
1541.35
9450
46
194.6
1540.56
9460
47
194.7
1539.77
9470
SFD44
SFD5A
SFD5B
SFD5C
SFD5D
SFD5E
SFD5F
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
3-6
Network elements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 3-1
44
10

5
(continued)
ITU Ch.
Freq.
Wave-
Port
(THz)
length
Label
SFD5
SFD44
CRW8
(nm)
S2
S1
S2
Table 3-2
Label
S22
S11
S12
48
194.8
1538.98
9480
49
194.9
1538.19
9490
50
195.0
1537.40
9500
51
195.1
1536.61
9510
52
195.2
1535.82
9520
53
195.3
1535.04
9530
54
195.4
1534.25
9540
55
195.5
1533.47
9550
56
195.6
1532.68
9560
57
195.7
1531.90
9570
58
195.8
1531.12
9580
59
195.9
1530.33
9590
60
196.0
1529.55
9600
SFD5F
SFD5G
SFD5H
CWDM wavelength transmission

Center
SFC1
SFC2
SFC4
SFC8
SFC2A&
E-SFC2A
SFC4A &
E-SFC4A
SFC8 &
E-SFC8
Wavelength (nm)
1471
1471
E-SFC1A
1491
1491
E-SFC1B
1511
1511
E-SFC1C
1531
1531
E-SFC1D
1551
1551
E-SFC1E
1571
1571
E-SFC1F
1591
1591
E-SFC1G
1611
1611
E-SFC1H
SFC2B &
E-SFC2B
SFC2C &
E-SFC2C
SFC4B &
E-SFC4B
SFC2D &
E-SFC2D
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
3-7
Issue 3 April 2009
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Degree-2 TOADM
The basic configuration for an 8-channel, degree-2 TOADM is capable of adding and
dropping up to eight colorless CWR8 (non-WDM-specific) channels per optical line.
The node can be upgraded while in-service to 44-channel colored (WDM-specific) A/D
and mesh.
Refer to Figure 3-5, Degree-2 TOADM block diagram (p. 3-8) for an example that
depicts both directions of transmission with one and two OAs. Note that in the egress
direction, the OA is optional.
Figure 3-5 Degree-2 TOADM block diagram
Degree-3 TOADM mesh
Mesh TOADM connections are between CWR8 colorless-drop outputs and

colorless-add inputs. Additional through paths are established so that a channel entering
on one optical line can exit on any of the other CWR8 optical lines. Channels that are
added and dropped must be fibered to the correct optical line and connect only to OTs.
Refer to Figure 3-6, Degree-3 TOADM block diagram (p. 3-9) for an example.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
3-8
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-6 Degree-3 TOADM block diagram
TOADM terminal node
A degree-1 TOADM can be built using one CWR8 and one or two line drivers (LDs)
and can be upgraded in service to a higher degree.
Refer to Figure 3-7, TOADM terminal node block diagram (p. 3-10) for an example.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
3-9
Issue 3 April 2009
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-7 TOADM terminal node block diagram
FOADM line terminal
A FOADM line terminal configuration has one optical line at the ends of a
point-to-point link where OT(s) terminate all wavelengths.
Refer to Figure 3-8, FOADM line terminal block diagram (p. 3-10) for an example
of a line terminal configuration with one or two LDs.
Figure 3-8 FOADM line terminal block diagram
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
3-10
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FOADM Hub
A FOADM hub is a configuration of two lines in a ring where OTs terminate all
wavelengths. No channels cross transparently between these two lines. A FOADM hub
can be viewed as an East line terminal and a West line terminal in a single NE.
Refer to Figure 3-9, FOADM Hub block diagram (p. 3-11) for an example of a Hub
node that uses dual line terminals. Either end terminal can have one or two LDs, and
the egress LD is optional.
Figure 3-9 FOADM Hub block diagram
Degree-2 FOADM
The FOADM configuration faces both east and west directions. Traffic from the optical
lines can be added or dropped, and at least one single wavelength transits transparently
as permitted by the engineering rules (see the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Engineering
and Planning Tool User Guide.
Refer to Figure 3-10, Degree-2 FOADM block diagram (p. 3-12) for an example
showing both directions of transmission in a FOADM with one or two OAs. Static
filter DWDMs (SFDs) can be SFD44 or SFD5.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
3-11
Issue 3 April 2009
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-10 Degree-2 FOADM block diagram
Degree-3 FOADM
A degree-3 FOADM configuration is a mesh node with three valid DWDM line
terminals. Individual channels enter from one line and can be added or dropped, and
wavelengths transit transparently as permitted by the engineering rules (see the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Engineering and Planning Tool User Guide).
Refer to Figure 3-11, Degree-3 FOADM block diagram (p. 3-13) for an example of a
FOADM mesh node.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
3-12
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-11 Degree-3 FOADM block diagram

ILA node
The in-line amplifier (ILA) amplifies the aggregate optical channel and terminates the
OSC for two optical lines. An ILA configuration consists of two line drivers (LDs),
DCMs, power, and control packs for a standard shelf.
Either the high-power, high-gain DWDM amplifier (AHPHG) or the low-power,
high-gain DWDM amplifier (ALPHG) LD can be used in an ILA configuration.
ALPHG is used for span losses up to 29 dB.
AHPHG provides 4 dB higher gain and output power than ALPHG and is used for
span losses up to 33 dB.
See the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Engineering and Planning Tool User Guide for
further information.
Refer to Figure 3-12, ILA block diagram (p. 3-14) for an example of an ILA
configuration. Note that the SIG OUT ports of both LDs are connected to the span.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
3-13
Issue 3 April 2009
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-12 ILA block diagram
TOADM networks
Introduction
Tunable OADM (TOADM) networks are designed such that any wavelength can be
added or dropped at any site, and the network can also be reconfigured in-service to
alter the wavelength routings. Because final wavelength routings are unknown at the
time of network design and deployment, this network design approach requires an
any-network-element- to-any-network-element analysis for all possible wavelength
routings.
In particular,
Lightpath link budget analysis must be pre-calculated to ensure that receive powers
and OSNR sensitivities are satisfied for all possible transponder types and all
possible wavelength routings
Dispersion compensation must be allocated in such a way that no matter where
wavelengths are added and dropped, the residual dispersion after compensation
remains within the dispersion tolerances for all possible transponder types
The Alcatel-Lucent Engineering and Planning Tool provides a simple way to both
specify a TOADM network design and to perform full network synthesis and analysis
of these constraints. Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Engineering and
Planning Tool User Guide for information.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
3-14
TOADM networks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The primary advantage of the TOADM design philosophy is to allow a design once,
provision forever model, in which:
No engineering analysis is required at lightpath turn-up, as all connectivity is

pre-verified
No service disruptions occur as new services are commissioned, or as capacity is
added.
No service disruptions occur for moves, adds, and changes to wavelength routings.
In order to accomplish this, it is important that the entire network element through-path
be installed during ring commissioning, so that through-wavelengths are not disturbed
during network element and network growth.
The secondary advantage of the TOADM model is the automated adaptation to
physical variations in the network; either variations in fiber plant losses from planned
values, or the natural variation of the various optical elements themselves.
TOADM rings
The typical TOADM topology is a ring in which lightpaths all begin and end on
TOADM network elements. The lightpaths may be created using either 1830 TOADM
transponders, or directly connected third-party ITU transponders. A TOADM ring
consists of two-degree TOADM NEs and, optionally, in-line amplifier.
In order to support any-to-any connectivity in the ring, the through path around the
ring is automatically balanced during network commissioning. The automatic balancing
adjusts amplifier gains around the ring through-path to ensure all channels leaving a
given node do so at the designed power level. After the ring has been commissioned,
automatic power management adapts to changes in the network to keep a given
channel within provisioned ranges, as described in the Automatic power management
section in Chapter 5, Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning.
Figure 3-13, TOADM ring network topology (p. 3-16) is an illustration of TOADM
ring network topology.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
3-15
Issue 3 April 2009
TOADM networks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-13 TOADM ring network topology
Interconnected TOADM rings
TOADM rings can be connected using a common NE that has four degrees of network
connectivity. TOADM rings can also be connected using two TOADM degree-4 NEs.
Refer to Figure 3-14, Interconnected TOADM rings (p. 3-17)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
3-16
TOADM networks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-14 Interconnected TOADM rings
The NEs used in the rings are equipped with four connected TOADM CWR8 cards as
shown in Figure 3-15, NE with connected TOADM CWR8 cards (p. 3-18).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
3-17
Issue 3 April 2009
TOADM networks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-15 NE with connected TOADM CWR8 cards
Linear TOADM networks
A linear TOADM network consists of a chain of two-degree TOADM NEs and,

optionally, an in-line amplifier and NEs that are terminated by single-degree NEs at
either end of the network, as shown in Figure 3-16, Two-degree TOADM NE linear
network (p. 3-19). The single-degree FOADM terminal NEs typically employ SFD
filtering, since they contain no through path and add/drop all of the wavelengths at the
site.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
3-18
TOADM networks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-16 Two-degree TOADM NE linear network
FOADM networks
Introduction
FOADM networks consist of one or more interconnected FOADM NEs. The possible
configurations are limited only by the number of channels allowed at an NE or allowed
on a network fiber.
The general rule for configuring FOADM networks is if a network can be connected, it
can be built. Therefore, FOADM networks can assume almost any configuration, such
as ring, linear, hub and spoke, or mesh. The limiting factor when designing FOADM
networks is the finite number of wavelengths that can be carried on a fiber.
A network fiber can carry a maximum of 44 wavelengths (using the SFD44 to provide
channel filtering) or 40 DWDM wavelengths (using SFD5 to provide channel filtering)
or 8 CWDM wavelengths (using SFC2, 4, 8). Only one instance of a particular channel
is allowed on a fiber. Multiple instances of the same channel may be re-used in the
network, provided they are on different fibers. Signal amplification is performed for all
DWDM channels on the fiber, but not for CWDM.
A FOADM ring is shown in Figure 3-17, FOADM HUB ring (p. 3-20). Note that a
FOADM HUB is needed in the ring to terminate each wavelength at least once to
prevent lasing.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
3-19
Issue 3 April 2009
FOADM networks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-17 FOADM HUB ring
A FOADM spur connection is shown in Figure 3-18, FOADM spur connection

(p. 3-21).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
3-20
FOADM networks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-18 FOADM spur connection
A FOADM network includes a one degree-3 FOADM NE, as shown in Figure 3-19,
Degree-3 FOADM (p. 3-22).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
3-21
Issue 3 April 2009
FOADM networks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-19 Degree-3 FOADM

Introduction
In a mixed TOADM/FOADM network, FOADM network segments (spurs) are

connected to a TOADM ring or linear network using the TOADM add/drop or Line
ports to create a hybrid network such as that illustrated in Figure 3-20, TOADM ring
with static network spurs (p. 3-23).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
3-22
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-20 TOADM ring with static network spurs

Introduction
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS1-GBE edge device is a next-generation, high-density

Ethernet transport device with up to twelve 1-GBE client ports and two 10-GbE uplink
ports. Each shelf also has slots reserved for SFD DWDM and SFC CWDM filter pack.
The uplink ports use XFP modules to support single channel, DWDM and CWDM
transportations. The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE can be deployed at the customer
premises for Ethernet aggregation and access.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE linear network
The typical Alcatel-Lucent PSS-1 GBE topology is a standalone-linear network or a

spur of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
3-23
Issue 3 April 2009
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
An Alcatel-Lucent PSS-1 GBE linear network consists of a two-degree PSS-1 OADM

configuration and one-degree PSS-1 terminal configuration. For details of
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE node configurations, please refer to the Alcatel-Lucent
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE NEs support both CWDM and black and white
(B&W) linear topologies; no optical amplifier is used between the NEs. Refer to
Figure 3-21, Linear network topology (p. 3-24) for topology examples.
Figure 3-21 Linear network topology
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE ring network
An Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE ring network consists of interconnected

two-degree 1830 PSS-1 GBE OADM nodes. Figure 3-22, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1
GBE ring network (p. 3-25)shows the network and physical view of a CWDM 1830
PSS-1 GBE ring topology.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
3-24
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-22 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE ring network
Mixed Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 and Alcatel-Lucent 1830

PSS-1 GBE networks
Introduction
An interconnected Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 and Alcatel-Lucent PSS-1 GBE

network configuration provides a total flexible and cost-effective metro edge optical
network. This mixed network configuration can be accomplished by extending one or
more wavelengths from the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 down to the PSS-1 GBE edge
devices over single fiber pairs.
In Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 R1.0, the wavelength used for interconnect
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE is supported via an
11STAR1 OT. When equipped with various XFPs, the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE
supports black and white (B&W), CWDM, or DWDM transportation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
3-25
Issue 3 April 2009
Mixed Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 and Alcatel-Lucent

1830 PSS-1 GBE networks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-23, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 interconnected with Alcatel-Lucent 1830

PSS-1 GBE (p. 3-26) illustrates the physical connection between the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-32and Alcatel-Lucent PSS-1 GBE network via single-channel and multiple
channels.
Figure 3-23 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 interconnected with Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-1 GBE
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE mixed networks
provide various flexible topologies, as illustrated in Figure 3-24, Examples of Mixed
1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-1 GBE topologies (p. 3-27)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
3-26
Mixed Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 and Alcatel-Lucent

1830 PSS-1 GBE networks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-24 Examples of Mixed 1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-1 GBE topologies
Introduction
Beginning in Release 1.1, the line interface of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 OTs can be fibered
directly to a 1696R node for transport in a 1696-based network. For this application,
the 1830 OT provides a signal, with WaveTracker encoding and power management,
to the 1696R node. The OT itself is installed in an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelf,
and is managed by the 1830 node.
Description
A dangling OT is an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 optical transponder, plugged into an

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelf, and managed by the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 node, but
connected on the line side to a 1696R node. Because the line side optical ports
(transmit and receive) are not fiber-connected to a CWR or OMD pack in the 1830
PSS NE, this OT is characterized as a dangling OT on the 1696 network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
3-27
Issue 3 April 2009
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-25 1830 Dangling OT
The system supports connection of the line port on the OT in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830
shelf, to the 1696R node via the CMD-42 card. Figure 3-25, 1830 Dangling OT
(p. 3-28) shows interconnection for this application. The WaveTracker encoding
function and power control management are enabled on the OT. The 1696R and 1830
shelves each have a TID.
The following 1830 PSS OTs support Dangling OT interworking:
11STAR1
11STMM10
11STGE12
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
3-28
Product description
4
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 hardware architecture, product
functionality, and the individual modules.
Descriptions are provided for common hardware components (such as shelf, equipment
controller, power distribution module, etc.), core optics modules (such as line
drivers/optical amplifiers, colorless wavelength routers, SFDx, DCM modules, etc.),
optical transponders (OTs), and miscellaneous modules.
Contents
4-2
Overview
4-2
Universal shelf
4-3
Overview
4-3
Mandatory modules
4-8
4-15
DCM shelf
4-45
Overview
4-45
OMD shelf
4-47
Overview
4-47
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
4-1
Issue 3 April 2009
Product description

Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelves
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 system supports three types of shelves: universal,
DCM, and OMD.
Universal shelf
The universal shelf is the basic building block for the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32
network element (NE). It provides a framework for all active modules in a system
(such as controller, interface cards, etc.).
DCM and OMD shelves
DCM and OMD shelves are passive module shelves that hold DCM and SFD44
modules. These modules provide dispersion compensation and optical mux/demux
function associated with core optics modules (line drivers and CWR8, respectively)
that are present in the universal shelf. Each Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Network
Element (NE) includes up to 8 universal shelves and up to 24 DCM/OMD shelves.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
4-2
Product description
Universal shelf
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Universal shelf
Overview
Overview
The universal shelf provides the framework upon which all configurations of the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch-32 (1830 PSS-32) NEs are constructed.
The universal shelf provides card slots, fiber management trays, backplane, power
distribution, and cooling for the NE. Network elements can be deployed in a single
shelf or expanded as the need arises to multiple interconnected universal shelves.
The first universal shelf of an NE becomes the master shelf and provides the
management and control connections to the operations systems for the cluster of
shelves in a multi-shelf NE. Expansion shelves connect to the master self via protected
internal LAN communication links and provide extended slot capacity managed by the
single database that resides in the master shelf.
Refer to Figure 4-1, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Universal Shelf (p. 4-4) .
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
4-3
Issue 3 April 2009
Product description
Universal shelf
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-1 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Universal Shelf
Universal shelf description
Each Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 universal shelf contains 32 function card slots. Two
additional slots are reserved for controller cards that are configured for redundant
control. Two more additional slots are reserved for the power filter cards. The top of
the shelf houses a fan tray for cooling, a customer interface panel, and two timing
interface cards that provide a redundant connection to synchronization references.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
4-4
Product description
Universal shelf
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Each universal shelf has a shelf ID Number that can be configured via a physical
mechanism (rotary dial) on the backplane. Up to eight bits of information can be set.
Shelf ID determines identity of each universal shelf in the cluster, while the most
significant bit of the rotary dial determines its role (that is, main or extension shelf).
The rotary dial for each shelf must be set to a valid value; this value must be unique
within the same NE. The values of the rotary dial shall be interpreted as follows.
Bits 4-3-2-1-0 code the Shelf ID Number, an integer in the range 1-8.
Bit 7 = zero >> Shelf role = not-Main Shelf

Bit 7 = one >> Shelf role = Main Shelf
Bits 6-5 of the rotary dial must be set to 0 (zero).

Single-shelf layout
A single-shelf network element (NE) consists of one universal shelf acting as a main
shelf. One shelf in each NE has the role of main shelf. This designation is by a
backplane rotary dial setting of 0x81 (Shelf Role = Main Shelf, Shelf ID = 1). When a
new universal shelf boots up and finds that its rotary dial is set to 0x81, it
automatically provisions itself with AID = SHELF-1 and TYPEID = UNV. The shelf
then begins to perform the role of the main shelf, relative to control and
communication functions within an NE.
Note: Two main shelves (i.e., two NEs) can not be connected by internal LAN
cable as if they belonged to a single NE (that is, as if one was subordinate to the
other).
Mandatory equipment
Each shelf contains mandatory modules equipped; some of the shelves can also have
optional modules equipped.
Mandatory equipment must be automatically provisioned whether present or not. Each
shelf includes the following mandatory equipment.
One shelf controller (EC) in either slot 1 or slot 18
Two power modules (PF)

A fan module (FAN)
The user interface panel (USRPNL) is mandatory on the main shelf only; it is not
allowed on other shelves. Mandatory equipment is provisioned without AINS state.
(AINS = Automatic In Service, which allows newly provisioned entities to be inserted
at the later time without generating alarms). Therefore, if mandatory equipment is not
present, it will be alarmed (assuming its absence is detected).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
4-5
Issue 3 April 2009
Product description
Universal shelf
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Automatic provisioning of mandatory equipment is differs from the

auto-provisioning defined for non-mandatory equipment. Mandatory equipment is
provisioned regardless of module presence detection. Non-mandatory equipment is
auto-provisioned only upon equipment detection and validation.
For non-mandatory equipment, the following modes must be defined for provisioning:
Auto-provisioning, also referred to as Plug & Play, where the EC provisions a card
upon discovering the card
Pre-provisioning, where the slot is provisioned in advance of a card being inserted
Universal shelf slot layout
Refer to Figure 4-2, Universal Shelf slot layout (p. 4-6) for an illustration.
Figure 4-2 Universal Shelf slot layout
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
4-6
Product description
Universal shelf
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Supported packs
The supported packs and slot location for the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelf are
shown in Table 4-1, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 card list and limits (p. 4-7).
Table 4-1
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 card list and limits
Card
Function
Required
Max. per shelf
Card Slots
USRPNL
User Interface
Panel
1 per main
shelf
40
PF
Power Filter
2 (1 w/alarms)
19, 36
FAN
Fan Subsystem
37
EC
Equipment
controller
1, 18
11STAR1
11G Single
Port Tunable
32
2-17, 20-35
16
2-17
16
2-17
AnyRate
Transponder (1
client)
11STGE12
11G Single
Port Tunable
GBE Mux
Transponder
(12 clients)
11STMM10
11G Single
Port Tunable
Multirate Mux
Transponder
(10 universal
clients)
CWR8
Colorless
Wavelength
Router
1 per degree
for TOADM
2-16
LD
ALPHG (Low
Power High
Gain Amp) or
1 ingress LD
per degree
16
2-17
32
2-17, 20-35
AHPHG (High
Power High
Gain Amp)
OPS
Optical
Protection
Switch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
4-7
Issue 3 April 2009
Product description
Universal shelf
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-1
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 card list and limits (continued)
Card
Function
Required
Max. per shelf
Card Slots
SVAC
Single Port
VOA Card
32
2-17, 20-35
SFD5
5 channel static
DWDM filter
2-17, 20-35
SFC2
2 channel static
CWDM filter
2-17, 20-35
SFC4
4 channel static
CWDM filter
2-17, 20-35
SFC8
8 channel static
CWDM filter
2-17
Mandatory modules
Overview
Mandatory equipment in a shelf includes the Equipment Controller (EC), Power Filter
(PF) module, Fan (FAN) module, and the user interface panel (USRPNL) (on the main
shelf only).
Equipment controller (EC)
The Equipment Controller (EC) module provides main processing and communication
function in a universal shelf and provides system storage resource when the EC is
located in the main shelf. Figure 4-3, EC faceplate (p. 4-9) illustrates the faceplate of
an EC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
4-8
Product description
Universal shelf
Mandatory modules
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-3 EC faceplate
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
4-9
Issue 3 April 2009
Product description
Universal shelf
Mandatory modules
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Each universal shelf contains at least one active EC. A standby EC can be configured
(and equipped) to provide controller redundancy. The NE can operate normally
(without alarms) with a single EC in each universal shelf.
Active and standby controllers operate in non-revertive protection arrangement. In this
context, non-revertive switching means that if an EC switchover occurs for any reason,
including a fault, the system will not switch back to the original EC after the fault is
cleared.
EC protection provides both automatic switch and user-initiated switch capability.
When both EC modules are present in universal shelf and they take Active or Stand-by
relationship:
Active EC: This EC is responsible for all run-time EC operations in the system.
Standby EC (when present): This EC is responsible for monitoring the operation of
the Active
Shelf ID
If the shelf ID is one (1), that shelf is designated as the main shelf. The Active and
Standby ECs in the main shelf are designated as Master ECs. There is always one (and
only one) main shelf per node. This shelf will always contain an Active Master EC and
connectivity to the USRPNL panel. If the node has only one shelf, the Active Master
EC performs the functionality of both the Master and the Subtending EC. If the node
consists of multiple shelves, the Master shelf contains the Master EC, and all
subsequent shelves contain Subtending ECs.
Note: The circuit pack hardware is identical for both the Master and Subtending
EC. Only the behavior of the pack changes based on the slot position and the shelf
ID.
Active Master EC
The Active Master EC performs the following functions.
Maintains a heartbeat mechanism with its companion EC
Provides the external LAN interface for management of all shelves in a multi-shelf
node
Terminates and or generates all communications with the management system. This
includes communications intended to/from the Subtending shelves. It forwards
information intended for a Subtending shelf to the proper EC.
Maintains persistent database and configures all shelves and packs in the node
using data in the persistent database.
Maintains the power state of all cards in the local universal shelf and monitors
voltage from the power filters in the same shelf.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
4-10
Product description
Universal shelf
Mandatory modules
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Monitors the health of all packs in the same shelf and monitors the health of all
shelves in the node.
Monitors the operation of the Active EC, provides access to all shared resources,
and updates its own persistent storage
Subtending EC
The Subtending EC performs the following functions.
Provides protected communication with the EC in the main shelf (Master EC for a
node)
The Active Subtending EC maintains the power state of all local cards in the
universal shelf and monitors the voltage output from the power filters in the that
shelf.
The Active Subtending EC monitors the health of all packs in the local shelf and
forwards fault, and performance information to the Active Master EC.
The Active Subtending EC monitors all services performed by a shelf and forwards
fault, and performance information to the Active Master EC.
The Active Subtending EC coordinates all communication within a shelf and

communication to the master shelf.
The Active Subtending EC stores LC application images in its local mass storage
and provides the application images from its mass storage unit to the LC cards in
the same shelf at boot time (when an LC card is reset or on request from the
Master EC).
The Standby Subtending EC monitors the operation of the Active EC, provides
access to all shared resources, and updates its own persistent storage.
Power filter
Power Filter cards condition the DC power feeds that power the network element (NE)
and protect against surge currents, low supply voltage, and other electromagnetic
interference.
Refer Figure 4-4, Power filter faceplate (p. 4-11)to for an illustration.
Figure 4-4 Power filter faceplate
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
4-11
Issue 3 April 2009
Product description
Universal shelf
Mandatory modules
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Power filter modules
Battery plant redundant feeds are brought into the system through the power filter (PF)
modules and distributed to each slot through the backplane pins. External (typically,
battery generated) DC voltages are filtered by the two PFs and distributed within the
shelf by a copper power plane. Each PF provides the 3.6V service voltage that is
distributed by the backplane. PFs also provide power to the USRPNL panel in the
main shelf.
The PF contains a resettable circuit breaker at its faceplate that protects the battery
feed. The PF module is also the source of a shared (Stratum 3 accuracy, +4.6 ppm)
precision clock source that is used to generate the Wavelength Tracker modulation and
serve as a high precision clock source for other transmission-related services.
Point-to-point connections from each PF slot to all function slots, as well as the
controller slots, carry this clock signal. Providing these clock sources on the PF
eliminates the need to add highly stable 4.6-ppm oscillators on every circuit card that
provides a Wavelength Tracker encode or decode function. The PF module also
contains a temperature sensor that measures inlet air temperature which is then used to
provide input into FAN control algorithm (adjusting FAN speed based on inlet
temperature).
There are three types of PF modules (based on the maximum current supported by
embedded circuit breaker): 30A, 50A and 70A. The required PF module types depends
on equipage in the shelf (refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Installation and
System Turn-Up Guide). Typical implementation is that the 30A module is used for
ILA (in-line amplifier, optical regeneration sites) configurations; 50A module used for
most universal shelves; 70A module is used for shelf densely equipped with high
power consumption packs such as 11STMM10 OTs. The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32
Engineering and Planning Tool provides information about the required PF module
type to be used in the specific shelf (according to the entered services to be supported
by the shelf).
FAN module
The fan tray plugs directly into the backplane and connects to the power, control, and
monitoring leads. It is located directly above the function card slots. The fan tray
contains three powerful FAN modules, each individually monitored and
speed-controlled by network element (NE) software.
Refer to Figure 4-5, Fan tray faceplate (p. 4-13) for an illustration.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
4-12
Product description
Universal shelf
Mandatory modules
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-5 Fan tray faceplate
A temperature sensor that is located within each PF measures the inlet temperature.
During operation of the fan unit, the EC adjusts the speed of each fan according to the
algorithm that optimizes airflow and noise level to maintain required thermal profile in
the shelf. The EC also monitors the status of FANs in the FAN module and provides
Alarmed condition to inform users of a possible malfunction.
User interface panel (USRPNL)
USRPNL is a module that is connected to a main shelf in the network element (NE)
and provides the following functions.
Visual status indication (node LED indication)
Management and communication physical access points
External Input/Output access points

Miscellaneous interactive buttons
The following is a listing of visual NE status indicators for NE summary Alarm LEDs.
Critical
Major
Minor
Warning
Alarm summary LEDs are activated when at least one condition in the NE with
associated severity exists.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
4-13
Issue 3 April 2009
Product description
Universal shelf
Mandatory modules
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Management and communication access points consist of the following interfaces.
Four general-purpose switched auto-sensing LAN ports (10/100BaseTX), for

connection to EMS/NMS, VoIP, and externally managed devices.
The OAMP port connect NE to the External Management System (EMS). The VoIP
port connect an IP phone to an IP managed DCN within Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-32 domain. The two external LAN ports connect to externally managed
devices. These ports are auto-sensing, so either a cross-over or straight-thru
Ethernet cable can be used.
Two craft ports. One is designed as a female (DB9) and the other a USB-B port.
Both support local RS-232C serial interface (support setting: 9600 baud, 1 stop bit,
no parity) for connection to craft terminal via a serial link. When USB-B port and
DB9 ports are simultaneously connected, preference is given to the USB-B port.
The USB-B port becomes active, and the DB9 port is rendered inactive.
External input/output access points are implemented as DB-9, DB-15, and DB-25
connectors. They are dedicated to rack lamps (RL), rack alarm (RA), and housekeeping
(HKP) interfaces. Rack lamps and Rack alarms are implemented as relay contacts
controlled by network element software (NE SW) to indicate presence of conditions of
specified severity in the NE. Housekeeping interface represents four relay contacts used
as controlled outputs and eight miscellaneous external inputs.
Refer to Figure 4-6, USRPNL faceplate view (p. 4-14) for an illustration.
Figure 4-6 USRPNL faceplate view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
4-14
Product description
Universal shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Non-mandatory modules can be grouped in the following three categories: Core optics
modules, optical transponder modules, and miscellaneous modules.
Core optics modules
Core optics modules include the following modules.

Line driver module functionality
Line driver modules provide several important functions that comprise optical transport
section of a DWDM optical line
Unidirectional optical amplification
Optical supervisory channel (OSC) generation/termination
Dispersion compensation access points

Optical line and individual optical channel monitoring points
Optical monitoring access point (OSA access point for non-intrusive monitoring
with external equipment)
Electrical access point for remote passive module inventory monitoring (DCM
and/or SFD44 modules)
Line driver modules (as optical amplifiers)
Optical amplification function is performed via a multi-stage EDFA amplifier with

mid-stage DCM access. Amplifier is implemented as integrated variable gain optical
amplifier module (VGOAM) that includes fast feedback for transient control.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 includes two types of VGOAMs: High Power High Gain
(AHPHG) and Low Power High Gain (ALPHG).
High gain indicates that amplifier gain can be 20 dB and higher; low gain indicates
that the gain of the amplifier is less then 20 dB. High power indicates that the
maximum total output power of the amplifier can be 20 dBm and higher. Low power
indicates that the maximum total output power is less than 20 dBm
This results in two line driver/optical amplifier (LD/OA) types (AHPHG and ALPHG)
that are used in various configurations, depending on target power and OSNR values in
the network. The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Engineering and Planning Tool is used
to design the DWDM network and select type and number of LD modules on each
optical transport section (OTS) line. Each OTS line has at least an ingress (receive)
amplification module while some lines may have both ingress and egress (transmit)
amplification modules.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
4-15
Issue 3 April 2009
Product description
Universal shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Each ingress LD module provides an optical supervisory channel (OSC) access point.
OSC provides high-speed data communication channel between adjacent OTS lines as
well as maintenance, monitoring, and customer clear channel communication function.
OSC is implemented as OC3 compliant digital structure with ~149 Mb/s payload
capacity for data communication and clear-channel transport. Physical layer of OSC
channel is implemented as 1510-nm OC3 SFP.
Optical monitoring is performed using the Wavelength Tracker (WT) technology. WT
uses power detector, A/D & D/A and Wavelength Tracker Decoder (WTD). The WT
and the DSP algorithm provides the power and wavelength, residual chromatic
dispersion, and OSNR information of the DWDM channels at the input and outputs of
the amplifier and before the launch to the span.
Each LD also contains two MON ports that can be connected to customer monitoring
equipment for monitoring the optical signal after the amplifier and output to the span.
Optional dispersion compensation modules (DCMs) are fibered to the mid-stage access
ports of LD. Number and type of DCM modules needed in particular points in an
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 network is determined by the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32
Engineering and Planning Tool, based on target dispersion map required to support
10G services between any two points in the DWDM network. When DCM is not used,
a 10-dB pad is placed instead.
Refer to Figure 4-7, Line driver (p. 4-16) for an illustration.
Figure 4-7 Line driver
Colorless wavelength router (CWR8)
The Colorless Wavelength Router (CWR8) module provides one of the major functions
among the core optics packs which involves routing of optical channels (single
configurable wavelength or a set of configurable wavelengths) between OTS lines and
Colorless Add/Drop points. CWR8 module provides essential function for tunable
optical add/drop (TOADM) architecture. The main sub-module of the CWR8 is 1x9
Wavelength Selective Switch (WSS), which allows configurable add/drop of selected
wavelength(s).
As shown in Figure 4-8, Functional diagram of CWR8 module within an optical line
(p. 4-17), WSS is positioned in the ingress optical flow of the CWR8 module, while
egress optical flow consists of combiners and EDFA.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
4-16
Product description
Universal shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-8 Functional diagram of CWR8 module within an optical line
Areas indicated by dashed lines represent logical layers (OTS, OMS and OCh) aligned
with ITU-T G.709 and G.798 equipment functional models.
Colorless 8-channel Wavelength Router (CWR8) packs support drop, through, and add
path.
Incoming channels go through the first coupler, and part of the signal goes to
broadband drop port that connects to the demux port of the SFD44/10/5 for colored
drop.
Signal can connect to a test port at the input to verify the connectivity during
commission.
Up to eight (8) colorless drops are routed to service ports 1-8 of the 1x9 WSS.
When mesh is supported, one or more of these ports become mesh output ports. No
limitation exists on which of colorless ports are being used as mesh from optical
architecture point of view.
Through channels are routed to through port 9 of the 1x9 WSS.

The WSS has adjustable per-channel attenuation for equalizing drop and thru
channels.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
4-17
Issue 3 April 2009
Product description
Universal shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Colorless add channel comes into the CWR8 from the OT via an 8x1 combiner and
are coupled with the colored add channel that comes from the SFD before the
add-amplifier.
The add-amplifier is a fixed gain C-band EDFA. The output of this amplifier goes
through a VOA and is then combined with the through channel on a single fiber to
feed into the LD.
CWR8 also contains three IPDs (shown as monitor points 3, 4 & 5 in Figure 4-9,
CWR8 (p. 4-18)) that are integrated with WTD for optical channel monitoring.
Figure 4-9 CWR8
In addition to optical ports, the CWR8 module includes an electrical port that is used
to monitor remote passive module inventory (SFD44 modules). For additional optical
port information see Table 9-13, CWR8 specifications (p. 9-17).
Static filter DWDM modules (SFD5, SFD44)
Static Filter DWDM modules perform the following functions.
Optical multiplexer function: receives colored optical signal from the transponder
sub-system, multiplexes the signal (together with other bands) into a WDM signal,
and launches the WDM signal to the OTS line directly (with or without an
amplification) or to the colorless port of CWR8 module.
Optical demultiplexer function: receives the WDM line signal, demultiplexes this
signal, and sends the individual optical channels to the transponder subsystem.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 supports two types of Static Filter DWDM modules.
Static Filter DWDM 5 channel (SFD5) module which can be inserted in one
half-height, single-width slot of the universal shelf.
Static Filter DWDM 44 channel (SFD44) module that is implemented as a passive
module mounted in a rack outside the universal shelf. Inventory monitoring for
SFD44 is accomplished via CWR8 or LD electrical inventory access points.
SFD5 module
SFD5 modules support set of five DWDM wavelengths from C-band. To cover the
whole C-band spectrum, eight types of SFD5 modules are supported: SFD5A, SFD5B,
SFD5C, SFD5D, SFD5E, SFD5F, SFD5G, and SDF5H.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
4-18
Product description
Universal shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The SFD5 card performs optical wavelength multiplex/demultiplex operations for five
consecutive ITU channels to/from an optical band. In addition, the SFD5 performs a
pass-through of all other bands from the SFD ingress port to the SFD egress port.
Refer to Figure 4-10, SFD5 functional diagram (p. 4-19)for an illustration
Figure 4-10 SFD5 functional diagram
The SFD5 module includes five bidirectional DWDM ports. These ports add
designated wavelengths to the DWDM line, to the multiplexed OMD port, to the
Expansion port (EXP), and to the monitoring port. The OMD port is connected to
CWR8 or LD in order to access the DWDM line. The expansion port cascades
multiple SFD5 modules to extend the multiplexing/demultiplexing port range.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
4-19
Issue 3 April 2009
Product description
Universal shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SFD44 module
The SFD44 shelf is a unit which mux/demuxes up to 44 C-band DWDM channels onto
a single fiber. SFD44 is a passive device mounted externally to the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-32 shelf in its own 1RU (one rack unit height) shelf.
Remote inventory information (EEPROM data such as module name, part number,
serial number) is monitored by CWR8 or LD module that belongs to DWDM optical
line to which SFD44 is connected. Presence of SFD44 passive module is monitored by
electrical inventory connection to CWR8/LD module.
Refer to Figure 4-11, SFD44 module (p. 4-20)for an illustration.
Figure 4-11 SFD44 module
Refer to Figure 4-12, SFD44 faceplate view (p. 4-20) for an illustration of the OMD.
Figure 4-12 SFD44 faceplate view
Static filter CWDM modules (SFC2/4/8 )
The Static Filter CWDM 2/4/8 (SFC2/4/8) card performs optical wavelength
multiplex/demultiplex operations for 2/4/8 consecutive ITU coarse channels out of total
eight channels. There are 4/2/1 SFC2/4/8 variants. In addition, the SFC2/4 performs a
pass-through of all other channels from the OMD In port to the OMD Out port (and
the reverse).
Refer to Figure 4-13, SFC2/4/8 module (p. 4-21) for an illustration.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
4-20
Product description
Universal shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-13 SFC2/4/8 module
SFC2/4/8 module has two, four, or eight bidirectional CWDM ports, respectively, for
adding designated wavelengths to the CWDM line, multiplexed OMD port, and to the
expansion port (EXP) port. OMD port is connected to the outside plant CWDM line
while Expansion port is used for cascading multiple SFC modules to extend the
multiplexing/demultiplexing port range. SFC2 & 4 are implemented as half-height
modules. SFC8 is a full-height universal slot module.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
4-21
Issue 3 April 2009
Product description
Universal shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Optical transponder (OT) modules
The traditional function of optical transponder (OT) modules is to provide

optical-electrical-optical (O-E-O) signal processing and adaptation of a colorless signal
to a specific optical channel wavelength within a DWDM/CWDM domain. In addition
to O-E-O signal regeneration, OTs perform various other functions in an electrical
domain, such as adaptation of client information structure to a carrier information
structure, multiplexing of client signals onto a carrier, cross-connection or protection
function, maintenance/monitoring function, data communication function, etc.
Generic OT model can be described through an interaction with other sub-systems
(through a backplane electrical connections) and external world (through a front
faceplate access).
Typical OT function provides O-E-O conversion. All transmission interface is through
a front access via optical transceivers. Some OT applications such as ADM on a
blade might require some type of switching sub-function and transmission interface in
the backplane towards a companion ADM OT. Furthermore, hybrid OT/TDM/IO
implementation might require transmission interfaces on the backplane side. Besides
transmission interfaces, ADM on a blade might require protection control signals
between the ADM and companion OTs.
Front side of the OT also provides status indication via a set of LEDs and possible
other indicators.
OT function also requires control, power, communicationand in some
applicationstiming interfaces in the backplane (note that COM indicates
communication interface to the system control infrastructure).
Refer to Figure 4-14, Generic OT functional model (p. 4-23) for an illustration.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
4-22
Product description
Universal shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-14 Generic OT functional model
Specific OT module description
This section provides a functional view of all OT functions supported by

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Release 1.0. Internal hardware architecture for specific
OTs, their transmission interfaces, signal processing, protection capability, status
indication, and to a certain extent, control and timing interface are also described.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 supports the following optical transponder modules.
10 client port multi-service module with 11G tunable line side (11STMM10)
12 client Ethernet port with 11G tunable line side (11STGE12)

1 client port multi-service module with 11G tunable line side (11STAR1)
All the aforementioned OT modules support the following basic functionality.

Transmission
OTs provide multi-rate and multi-protocol interfaces. Signal types, rates, or protocol
types configurable through a user interface.
OT physical interfaces are implemented as either tunable transceiver modules or as

pluggable modules SFPs/XFPs.
OTs provide inventory, monitoring, and digital diagnostics for XFP and SFP
modules. [In order to provide this function pluggable, modules must be qualified,
and their EEPROM format/content and monitoring capability must comply to
appropriate mid-stage access amplifier (MSA)]
Line-side signal digital structures are compliant with pertinent ITU-T G.709
structures.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
4-23
Issue 3 April 2009
Product description
Universal shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Line-side FEC is provisionable for standard G.709 FEC [(Reed-Solomon (255,239)

codec] and EFEC, for higher coding gain.
Line-side tunability: All 44 channels. Optical frequency can be configured by

network element software (NE SW).
Faults and maintenance
Fault processing is performed consistent with ITU-T functional models pertinent to

OT implementation (fault processing includes defect detection/clearing, correlation,
and consequent actions).
Fault processing not explicitly defined in standard documents (such as

provisionable consequent action type towards the client, Laser_off, and
Unframed_AIS).
Ethernet services support all PDU sizes, including jumbo frames.

Transport of Ethernet services support link fault propagation for Remote Fault
Indication as well as loss of signal and loss of character/block synchronization.
GFP transport modes use Client Management frames to transfer fault indication to
the far-end. As a result of detecting client management frame with fault indication,
associated transmitter will be turned off or maintenance signal generated.
Loopbacks: Each OT supports terminal and line loopback type on each of the ports.
Facility loopback is defined as ability for the received optical/electrical external
transmission signal of being looped back from the port function input back toward
the port function output. Terminal loopback is defined as ability for the electrical
transmission signal (on optical interface port functions) of being looped back from
the port function output back toward the port function input
Each of the OT ports that can be configured as a DWDM line port and provides
ability to encode Wavelength Tracker label.
Status indicators are implemented as LEDs. There is a dedicated OT pack status
and individual port status indicators (LEDs).
OTs are architectured to support software upgrades that can be implemented in
non-traffic affecting manner.
Firmware upgrade capability.
11STAR1 OT module
The 11STAR1 module is implemented as a half-half slot multi-rate and multi-protocol

interface blade capable of supporting Tunable Transponder on the line side. It supports
the following client signals: OC-192, STM-64, 10GbE WAN PHY, 10GbE LAN PHY,
OTU-2 with G.709 FEC, and 10G Fibre Channel. Client signals are transported as
constant bit rate (CBR) signals, in which case transport is transparent to the client bit
stream and timing or encapsulated (using GFP encapsulation method).
When GFP encapsulated transport method is used, the pack is transparent for client
signal characteristic information, (Ethernet PDUs, preamble and semi-transparent for
sequence ordered sets.)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
4-24
Product description
Universal shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11STAR1 pack allows user-configurable consequent action to the fault indication

detected on the line side signal. The consequent actions are Laser_OFF, Framed AIS
(LFI ordered set for 10GbE LAN), and Unframed AIS (Generic-AIS). Software and
firmware upgrade are non-service affecting. Latency through this OT is outside of FEC
processing and is negligible.
Refer Figure 4-15, 11STAR1 faceplate (p. 4-26) to for an illustration.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
4-25
Issue 3 April 2009
Product description
Universal shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-15 11STAR1 faceplate
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
4-26
Product description
Universal shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11STAR1 OT functional description
Refer to Figure 4-16, 11STAR1 block diagram (p. 4-27) for an illustration.
Figure 4-16 11STAR1 block diagram
The RS FEC encode/decode module performs the following add/drop functions.

Add direction (from client to line port):
Terminates RS FEC field of an incoming OTU2 client stream

Corrects errors using Reed Solomon error-correction algorithm
Provides performance monitoring (PM) statistics for FEC correctable and

uncorrectable errors
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
4-27
Issue 3 April 2009
Product description
Universal shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Drop direction (line to client port):
Generates FEC field of an OTU2 information structure for an OTM-0.2 provisioned

client interface type when FEC is enabled
The SDH/SONET, G.709 and 10-GbE LAN processing module performs the following
add/drop functions.
Maps incoming OC-192/STM-64 signal using asynchronous or bit-synchronous

method into an ODU2 information structure
Encapsulates incoming 10-GbE LAN signal using GFP method (both GFP-F
compliant with G.7041 and proprietary GFP-P with preamble transparency) and
maps into a standard or extended OPU2 information structure (Extended OPU2
information structure consists of seven unused OPU2 OH bytes in columns 15 and
16. Extended OPU2 structure is used for preamble transparent GFP encapsulation
mode.)
Generates ODU2 and OTU2 OH fields (except for OTM-0.2 client signal
provisioning)
Provides non-intrusive monitoring of incoming OC-192/STM-64 10-GbE LAN or
ODU2 streams
Performs fault processing following relevant requirements compliant with G.798
Drop direction (line to client port):
Terminates OTU2 OH fields

Terminates ODU2 OH fields
Bit-synchronously or asynchronously de-maps CBR10G signal from ODU2

information structure
Provides PCS layer monitoring for CBR mapped 10-GbE LAN or 10-GFC signals
Extracts 10-GbE LAN bit PDUs from GFP stream and generates PCS layer
following IEEE802.3ae
Generates OTU2 OH for an outgoing OTM-0.2 provisioned signals.

Provides non-intrusive monitoring of incoming OC-192/STM-64 or ODU2 streams
Provides RMON statistics for 10-GbE LAN traffic in egress direction
The RSFEC/EFEC module performs the following add/drop functions.

Generates FEC field of an OTU2 formatted signal based on either Reed Solomon
or EFEC algorithm (user provisioning determines which of the two will be used)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
4-28
Product description
Universal shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Drop direction (from line to client port):
Terminates FEC field of an incoming OTU2 signal

Corrects errors using Reed Solomon or EFEC error correction algorithm

The Tunable Transmitter (Tx) and Receiver (Rcvr) modules perform the following
add/drop functions:
Takes the signals from the parallel data path
Transmits the signals onto the line-side fiber
Receives the line signal

Recovers the line signals clock
Takes the signals onto the parallel data path to the next module, implementing the
tunable (44-/88-channel tunable) line-side interface
The eVOA (electronic variable optical attenuator) & Tap module performs the
functions:
Acts as an optical attenuator

Provides input for Wavelength Tracker modulation
Provides optical tap for feedback signal to the Wavelength Tracker
Wavelength Tracker module provides encoder function for optical path trace. It uses a
closed loop to maintain the modulation depth by monitoring the optical signal after the
modulation.
The XO module is an oscillator that provides a clock signal with an accuracy of 20
ppm.
The PLL modules are phase-locked loops that condition the clock to be used as a
reference in appropriate module.
CLK reference is a pair of 4.6 ppm reference clocks that are received from the shelf
PF modules.
Common CTL circuitry block provides adaptation between the system and local control
interfaces, allows shelf controller access to the on-board monitoring HW, points etc.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
4-29
Issue 3 April 2009
Product description
Universal shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11STMM10 OT module
The 10xMultiRate MUX OT cards support multi-service multiplexing platform that

aggregates various lower rate client services onto a 10G DWDM path. The pack is
designed to be used in either point-point MUX configuration to provide private line
services to supported client data, SDH/SONET or OTN signals, or add/drop MUX
configuration to allow ring or SNC/UPSR type protection for transported services.
In addition to the common OT features, the following set of features is supported by
multi-protocol client muxing OT 11STMM10:
A single-slot-wide, full-height card supporting 10x multi-service type interfaces

(GbE, FC, 2FC, 4GFC, OC-3/12/48, and CBR2G5
GFP-T encapsulation and VCAT mapping for Ethernet signals (Pack provides an
Ethernet private line service.)
GFP-T encapsulation and VCAT mapping of FC signals
Section (RSn) and Line (MSn) termination for OC-M/STM-N clients

Bit-transparent transport of OC-48/STM-16 clients (user provisionable option to
transport OC-48/STM-16 with RSn/MSn termination or bit transparent CBR2G5)
Card contains a 40G TDM Fabric (STS-1/VC3 switching granularity. Au3 level
management is not supported in SDH mode.)
Flexible port configuration: Any port-any service
11STMM10 cards are architectured to work in pairs to provide an ADM function.

ADM function refers to ability to add/drop or pass-through time slots transported
within a 10G structure in a flexible (user configurable) manner. It also implies
ability to offer protected services for time slots transported (SNC or shared
protection).
Refer to Figure 4-17, 11STMM10 faceplate (p. 4-31) for an illustration.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
4-30
Product description
Universal shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-17 11STMM10 faceplate
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
4-31
Issue 3 April 2009
Product description
Universal shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11STMM10 OT functional description
Refer to Figure 4-18, 11STMM10 OT block diagram (p. 4-32) for an illustration.
Figure 4-18 11STMM10 OT block diagram
The SFP module performs the following functions:
Provides optical-electrical signal conversion in the ingress direction and forwards

serial bit stream to the SERDES in Line INF module
Provides Electrical-Optical signal conversion and sends optical signal towards the
client
Provides monitoring of analog parameters (OPR, OPT, LBC) and detects loss of
optical power dLOS
The Framer & PP module performs the following add/drop functions

Forwards data signal types (8B/10B encoded signals) to GFP+VCAT module for
further processing
Encapsulates and passes OTU1 structure received at the client port towards the
ODU1/ODU12 multiplexing function
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
4-32
Product description
Universal shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provides RS and MS termination for SDH/SONET signals

Monitors RS and MS layers as well as non-intrusive monitoring of Path layer
Aggregates/interleaves SDH/SONET tributaries with VCG tributaries carrying data

signals onto an interface towards the SONET TSI module
De-interleaves tributaries received from the SONET TSI module and forwards VCG
member tributaries to Jake for further processing
De-capsulates OTU1 digital structure

Generates MSn and RSn layer for SDH/SONET ports
The MAC, GFP, and VCAT performs the following add/drop functions.
Performs and maintains codeword alignment based on 8B/10B synchronization state

diagram IEEE802.3 and ANSI INCITS 352 (HW shall detect loss of codeword
synchronization according to clause 36.2.2.)
Performs 64B/65B encoding and GFP-T encapsulation according to the rules

specific to client signal type and defined in G.7041 (GFP-T stream is forwarded to
allocated VCAT processing function.)
Monitors PCS and MAC layers
Performs VCAT processing and creating Virtual Concatenation Group for each
client signal processed (Up to ten VCGs are supported in the module.)
Generates Path layer OH for VCAT tributary members
Terminates VCGs: processes Path OH of the VCG tributaries, aligns tributaries

members of VCG, and extracts GFP streams from VCG containers
Extracts MAC PDUs from GFP-F stream and generates PCS layer for GbE ports.
(Generation of PCS layer includes Auto-negotiation.)
Extracts codeword bit stream from 64B/65B stream and generates of 8B/10B data
stream
Egress PCS and MAC layer monitoring
The TSI block performs the following functions:
Provides STS1/VC3 granular non-blocking switch fabric with at least 768x768

STS1/VC3 capacity
Provides transparent transport of OTU1 and CBR2G5 signals
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
4-33
Issue 3 April 2009
Product description
Universal shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The PP block performs the following functions:
Provides 10G Pointer Processing and Framer function

Provides RSn, MSn, and Sn monitoring for incoming STS48 structure
Encapsulates/decapsulates transparent OTU1/OC48 signals received from DWDM

line/TSI module
The G.709 & FEC block performs the following add/drop functions.
Maps incoming signal using asynchronous or bit-synchronous method into an

ODU2/ODU1 information structure
Multiplexes 4x ODU1 structures into and ODU2
Generates ODU2 and OTU2 OH
Provides non-intrusive monitoring of incoming STS48 or OTU1/ODU1 streams



Terminates OTU2 & ODU2 OH fields
Demultiplexes ODU1s from an ODU2

Bit-synchronously or asynchronously de-maps CBR10G signal from ODU2 or
CBR2G5 from ODU1 information structure
Provides non-intrusive monitoring of ODU1 and STS48 RS layer
The Tunable MSA module performs the following add/drop functions.

Transmits signals onto the line-side fiber
Receives the line signal
Recovering line signals clock

Takes clock signals onto the parallel data path to the next module, implementing
the tunable (44/88 channel tunable) line-side interface
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
4-34
Product description
Universal shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Wavelength Tracker module provides an encoder function for optical path trace. It
uses a closed loop to maintain the modulation depth by monitoring the optical signal
after the modulation.
The CLK block selects the shelf timing source and distributes it to SDH/SONET
processing and TSI modules.
The PLL modules are phase-locked loops that are used to condition the clock to be
used as a reference in appropriate module. Number of PLLs is decided by the number
of independently timed signals carried within the OTU2 structure.
Common CTL circuitry block provides adaptation between the system and local control
interfaces, allows shelf controller access to the on-board monitoring hardware points,
etc.
11STGE12 OT module
The 10xGbE MUX OT card provides an Ethernet multiplexing platform that aggregates
up to ten full-rate GbE client services onto a 10G DWDM path. By providing
unrestricted throughput and MAC PDU transparency for up to ten GBE clients, this
pack offers Ethernet Virtual Private Line (EVPL) service transport as defined in MEF
and ITU-T documents.
In addition to the common OT feature list, the following set of high level features are
assigned to the 10xGbET.
A single-slot-wide, full-height card supporting a multiplexing of 10 Ethernet

interfaces and a single 10G line interface
Line interface:
DWDM tunable transponder with Wavelength Tracker encoder functionality
10-GbE LAN transport as CBR in 11.096-Gb/s bit rate structure
Optical layer protection using OPS module

Digital structure specification and G.709 monitoring, alarming, and consequent
actions
Forward Error Correction mode configurable (RSFEC, EFEC) so that solution can
be flexible and take advantage of additional coding gain based on EFEC
Performance Monitoring supports the following:

G.709 interface monitoring
Full RMON statistics
GCC[n] processing for DCN extension to the access box (1830 PSS-1 GBE).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
4-35
Issue 3 April 2009
Product description
Universal shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Client interface:
Ten SFP pluggable client ports (Two unused SFP sockets will be used in the future
when statistical multiplexing and MAC bandwidth management is introduced.)
Full throughput for up to ten (10) 1-GbE clients

Mapping performed with simple port-to-VLAN mapping of incoming client PDUs
(No traffic shaping or rate limiting for ten ports.)
Optical layer protection provided
Performance monitoring (PM) supports the full RMON statistics
Supports bidirectional Ethernet private line services

Supports LOS Propagation to support diverse routes
Refer to Figure 4-19, 11STGE12 faceplate (p. 4-36) for an illustration.

Figure 4-19 11STGE12 faceplate
11STGE12 functional description
Refer to Figure 4-20, 11STGE12 block diagram (p. 4-37) for an illustration.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
4-36
Product description
Universal shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-20 11STGE12 block diagram
The SFP module performs the following functions.
Provides Optical-Electrical signal conversion in the ingress direction and forwards

serial bit stream to the SERDES into the Layer 2 switch module
Provides Electrical-Optical signal conversion and sends optical signal towards the
client
Provides monitoring of analog parameters (OPR and OPT) and detecting loss of
optical power dLOS
Provides HW/SW control for laser ON/OFF consequent action and Y-cable
The L2 Switch module performs the following functions.
Aggregates client GbE MAC PDUs to dual 10-GbE line interfaces and to two other
10GbE interfaces to companion OT (Note that only error free MAC PDUs are
aggregated.)
Provides 10/100/1000-Mbps Ethernet ports for both copper and fiber connections
Provides ingress client PDU tagging and removal of tag at the egress without
bandwidth enlargement using headers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
4-37
Issue 3 April 2009
Product description
Universal shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configures aggregation 64B/66B encoded stream by providing an effective data

rate of 10-Gbps with the ability to add provider tags without restricting client
bandwidth for up to 10-GbE ports [12-byte header is inserted before each Ethernet
packet. This header is used to segregate and forward PDUs within the L2 switch
module. The header uses 4 bytes of the IFG and the packet preamble (8 bytes), for
a total of 12 bytes to avoid bandwidth reduction on aggregation link.]
Provides PAUSE based flow control and auto-negotiation
Provides RMON
The G.709 Framer module performs the following add/drop functions.

Maps incoming 64B/66B encoded bitstream using asynchronous method into an

ODU2 information structure.
Generates ODU2 and OTU2 OH


Provides PM statistics for FEC Correctable and Uncorrectable errors
Terminates OTU2 and ODU2 OH fields
Asynchronously de-maps HiGig signal from ODU2

The FPGA module performs the following functions:
Processes the ODU2 PCC/APS bytes in order to present them to software

Provides GCC insert/extract from the TOH
The 10G LAN/WAN PHY module performs the following functions:
Converts the XAUI interface from the L2 switch to 10-GbE LAN over SF14
The Tx/Rx module performs the following add/drop functions:

Add direction (from client to port):
Transmits signals onto the line-side fiber
Receives the signal
Recovers the signal clock
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
4-38
Product description
Universal shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Takes the clock signals onto parallel data path to next module
Implements the tunable (44/88-channel tunable) line-side interface
OT protection
11STAR1, 11STMM10, and 11STGE12 OTs support several protection configurations.
Per-channel optical line protection (with OPS) (1+1 optical path)
Optical sub-block network connection protection (O-SCNP) [O-SNCP, 1+1 Optical

Path & Equipment protection configuration (Y-cable splitter/coupler between the
pair of OTs and client equipment)]
Diverse route
Note: Y-cable protection cannot currently be used with OTM0.2 client on 11STAR1
OT. ODU2 is handled transparently, so APS/PCC bytes are not available for
protection signaling.
Protection configurations
In optical Path protected configuration OT modules, colored line interface is connected

to two OTS lines via an OPS pack (Optical Protection Switching pack). Optical signal
is bridged in the source direction and transported via diverse optical paths through a
DWDM domain. In sink direction, one of the two received signals is selected by a 2:1
optical switch. This type of protection is 1+1 unidirectional type, where autonomous
switch decision can be made based on monitoring optical power on the received
signals
O-SNCP configuration relies on client transmitter arbitration between the peer
protected entities (OT packs in adjacent slots). Using so called Y-cable client input is
split and fed to both OT client port inputs while OT client port outputs are run through
a 2:1 coupler. Protection manager (implemented in OT HW) on each of the OTs
collects tributary status signals from local tributary (by reading local HW registers or
via SW interrupt service routine processing) and from the adjacent companion OT (via
backplane link). Status of both tributaries is input to a state machine which determines
the state of associated transponder.
This implementation allows 1+1 protection applications, either unidirectional or
bidirectional. One protected instance can be supported per each client adaptation
function. In the case of 11STMM10 and 11STGE12 packs, there could be up to ten
client adaptation functions while in 11STAR1 there is one client adaptation function.
As shown in Figure 4-21, 1+1 Protection using Y-cable (p. 4-41) , a pair of OT
packs in adjacent slots (horizontal adjacency is supported for full height packs and
vertical adjacency for half height modules) are configured for 1+1 protection using
Y-cable. Protection manager manages one instance of protection state machine which
takes inputs such as Signal Fail (SF[n] where n=1,..,10) or Signal Degrade (SD[n]
where n=1,..,10) from both local and companion pack. Based on these inputs and
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
4-39
Issue 3 April 2009
Product description
Universal shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
additional SW controls (to implement Manual, Forced and Inhibit switch requests)
protection manager determines the ON/OFF state of the associated client transmitter.
Protection on one client port shall be done independently from protection on the other
ports.
This implementation ensures fast protection switching based on autonomous failures of
either transmission path or supporting equipment entities. Switching is accomplished in
period shorter then 10 ms (detection, except SD) + 50 ms (switch completion) for
failures such as dLOS, dLOF, or equipment failures.
Note: Protection switching time may exceed 60ms, if the active pack (the pack that
is carrying transmission) is removed or reset cold.
Follow the procedure below, before removing or performing a cold reboot on a
pack that is a member of an APS y-cable group.
1. Check APS status to determine which is the active pack.
2. If the pack you plan to remove or reset is the active pack, perform a force
switch to standby.
3. Check the APS status again and make sure the pack you intend to remove or
reset cold is the standby pack.
4. Perform cold reset or remove the pack.
Refer to Figure 4-21, 1+1 Protection using Y-cable (p. 4-41) for an illustration.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
4-40
Product description
Universal shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-21 1+1 Protection using Y-cable
Pluggable modules
Each client port on OTs is implemented with pluggable modules to provide flexibility
in supporting various physical layer requirements associated with configured signal
type.
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 system allows user to configure expected pluggable
modules to the following types.
Specific module type from the list of acceptable modules of that entity (see Table
2-7, SFP list (p. 2-36) and Table 2-8, XFP list (p. 2-37)).
Automatic module type detection and configuration
User-specific module type
For the first two options, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 system provides monitoring of
mismatch between the expected and actual inserted pluggable module in the configured
slot. The third option is intended for users that prefer to use pluggable modules outside
of the set approved by ALU. In that case, module mismatch monitoring is not
supported.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
4-41
Issue 3 April 2009
Product description
Universal shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer to Table 2-7, SFP list (p. 2-36) and Table 2-8, XFP list (p. 2-37) for a listing
of Alcatel-Lucent approved pluggable module types that allow explicit expected
module provisioning (user configures one of the modules in the list explicitly) or
provides automatic detection and provisioning of the module upon insertion.
Automatic module detection
Automatic module type detection and configuration is accomplished by configuring

desired interface MODULETYPE on associated port entity to AUTO.
When MODULETYPE is set to AUTO, upon port provisioning, the NE SW performs
the following steps:
1. Monitors for pluggable module insertion
2. When pluggable module insertion (module presence if attribute change has been
performed) is detected, read the module EEPROM and compare content to find a
match to a module in acceptable module list for that port.
3. If a match to a module in an ALU acceptable type list is found, automatically
configure MODULETYPE attribute to the matched type.
4. Generate autonomous message to indicate MODULETYPE change.
5. If EEPROM content doe not match any of the modules in an acceptable types for
that port, declare UNKNOWN condition on the port and retain MODULETYPE
value of AUTO.
This process allows user to configure and monitor consistency between expected and
actual pluggable modules in an easy manner. Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32
User Provisioning Guide for more information.
Miscellaneous non-mandatory modules
In addition to core optics and OT modules, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 also supports
the following modules
Optical Protection Switch (OPS) module
Single Variable Attenuator Card (SVAC) module
OPS module is used to provide optical layer protection functionality. SVAC serves as
demarcation point for Alien optics input to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 DWDM
domain. These modules are logically positioned between the OT modules and core
optics modules hence they are listed in this document in a separate group.
OPS module
The OPS card provides photonic protection switching in DWDM configurations for
any supported channel in the C-band, allowing user to provide 1+1 dedicated OCh
protection for any optical signal carried in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 DWDM
domain.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
4-42
Product description
Universal shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer to Figure 4-22, OPS functional diagram (p. 4-43) for an illustration.
Figure 4-22 OPS functional diagram
As shown in Figure 4-22, OPS functional diagram (p. 4-43), the OPS card performs
head-end bridging and tail-end switching of an optical signal.
At the head end of the protected link, an optical signal is split into two identical
signals and sent over a specified OCh path to another OPS card at the tail end of
the protected link. There are also electronic variable optical attenuators (eVOAs)
controlling the A and B port transmit power.
At the tail end, the total optical power of each of the received signals is monitored.
A switch is initiated if the total optical power of one of the signals falls below a
defined threshold (according to the rules associated with OPS protection state
machine).
The threshold level at which a switch is initiated, is calculated automatically by the

system on a per-port basis on port A and port B only. When the total optical power of
an input signal falls below a threshold, the OPS card performs a protection switch with
signal disturbance of less then 50 ms due to protection switching execution.
Note: LOS switch thresholds and tolerance can be also be provisioned manually,
but only an expert user should manually provision the thresholds. The commands
used to accomplish this are only available at the Admin or Service security level.
(See the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS User Provisioning Guide, and Command Line
Interface Commands Guide (Vol.I) for details.)
In addition to autonomous switching based on monitoring of input LOS, OPS provides
user protection management by supporting Manual, Forced and Lockout protection
requests. OPS protection state machine supports 1+1 unidirectional, non-revertive
protection.
The optical protection switch (OPS) pack is implemented as a half-height module that
can be configured in any of the universal slots in the universal shelves.
Refer to Figure 4-23, OPS module faceplate (p. 4-44) for an illustration.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
4-43
Issue 3 April 2009
Product description
Universal shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-23 OPS module faceplate
SVAC module
The single-channel variable attenuation card is used as a bridge by the compatible

wavelength transponders into Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 DWDM domain.
The following are the basic functions provided by SVAC as demarcation and
adaptation for so-called alien (foreign wavelength) channel.
Encodes the Wavelength Tracker wave keys onto the optical channel.
Automatically adjusts a variable optical attenuator (VOA) on each channel to set
the channel output optical power to the target level determined by NE SW
Monitors incoming alien wavelength optical power level and appropriate alarming.
SVAC is implemented as a half-height module that can be configured in any of the

universal slots in the universal shelves.
Multi-shelf arrangement
Multiple Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelves can be configured as a single NE. Refer
to Figure 2-24, Sample multi-shelf NE connectivity (p. 2-33) for an illustration that
shows an example TOADM NE with three universal shelves, one DCM shelf with one
DCM module, and one OMD shelf. The positions of the connections on the individual
cards and modules are for illustration purposes only.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
4-44
Product description
DCM shelf
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DCM shelf
Overview
Overview
A DCM enclosure can hold a maximum of 16 DCM modules. The system models each
DCM module as a separate shelf. The inventory port of a DCM module can be
connected to an inventory port on an LD card (shown as a green line in Figure 2-24,
Sample multi-shelf NE connectivity (p. 2-33)). If connected, the inventory port must
be connected to the same LD as the Line to which it is connected. The DCM shelf can
be user-provisioned or auto-detected.
Note: The distance limit of the serial electrical inventory wire is short enough that
some customers will need to locate the DCM beyond the distance limit. In order to
accommodate a users need to mount the DCM shelf outside the range of electrical
inventory monitoring cable, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 supports non-managed
DCM shelves.
Table 4-2, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 DCMs (p. 4-45) lists the DCMs that 1830
PSS 32 supports.
Table 4-2
Acronym
DCM/Range
DCM Height1
DMSMF010
DCM010
18.5 mm
10 km DCM
DMSMF020
DCM020
18.5 mm
20 km DCM
DMSMF030
DCM030
18.5 mm
30 km DCM
DMSMF040
DCM040
18.5 mm
40 km DCM
DMSMF050
DCM050
41 mm
50 km DCM
DMSMF060
DCM060
41 mm
60 km DCM
DMSMF070
DCM070
41 mm
70 km DCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
4-45
Issue 3 April 2009
Product description
DCM shelf
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-2
(continued)
Acronym
DCM/Range
DCM Height1
DMSMF080
DCM080
41 mm
80 km DCM
Notes:
1.
DCM width and depth are 235 mm x 235 mm for all units.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
4-46
Product description
OMD shelf
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OMD shelf
Overview
Overview
The SFD44 (44-channel DWDM static filter) is modeled as an OMD shelf with a
SFD44 card. The inventory port of the SFD44 can be connected to an inventory port
on a CWR8 card (shown as green line in Figure 2-24, Sample multi-shelf NE
connectivity (p. 2-33)) or in the case of an end terminal node or FOADM node,
connected to a line driver (LD) card. If connected, the inventory port must be
connected to the same LD/CWR8 as the Line to which it is connected. The OMD shelf
can be user-provisioned or auto-detected.
Note: The distance limit of the serial electrical inventory wire is short enough that
some customers will need to locate the SFD44 beyond the distance limit. In order
to accommodate a users need to mount OMD shelf outside the range of electrical
inventory monitoring cable, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 supports non-managed
OMD shelves.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
4-47
Issue 3 April 2009
5 perations, administration,
O
maintenance, and
provisioning
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the user interfaces and network management applications that
run on the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 NE to simplify the operations, administration,
maintenance, and provisioning (OAM&P) of the network services.
Contents
OAMP
5-2
5-2
5-5
5-20
5-24
5-26
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
5-1
Issue 3 April 2009
OAMP
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OAMP
Overview
Fault management is a set of functions that enable detection, isolation, and correction
of abnormal operation of the telecommunication network and its environment.
Alarm reporting is the notification to external management systems of the internally
detected faults.
The fault processing and alarm reporting functions are part of the supervision function
of the NE that monitors and manages the NE transmission resources (logical/physical
facilities and associated equipment modules).
Fault management functions
The fault management function consists of the following supervision categories:

transmission, equipment, processing, and correlation. The primary goal of this function
is to monitor and report any failure within the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 system by
identifying the probable cause of abnormal operation of transmission resource
supported by the NE.
Transmission supervision
Transmission supervision consists of the following functions.
Continuity supervision (monitoring of LOS, UNEQP, OCI, etc.)

Connectivity supervision (monitoring of TIM)
Quality supervision (monitoring of DEG and EXC)
Payload type supervision (monitoring of PLM)

Multiplex structure supervision (monitoring of payload structure mismatch, PSM)
Alignment supervision (monitoring of LOF, LOM, and Loss of alignment in VCAT

or GFP frame stream)
Protocol supervision (monitoring of FOP in protection configurations)
Backward indication supervision (monitoring for BDI, BIAE, and RDI)

Alarm correlation and suppression (generation and monitoring of AIS, FDI, and
SSF)
Transmission supervision is implemented according to the specific functional model of

the facility being supervised. Details on set of monitored points, detection criteria, and
condition types are provided in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Maintenance and
Trouble-Clearing Guide.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
5-2
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Equipment supervision
Equipment supervision provides monitoring, detection, and isolation of

equipment-related problems and abnormal behavior. In general, equipment supervision
comprises the supervision of interchangeable and non-interchangeable units and cables.
Probable causes in this category include power, timing, temperature, and other
equipment specific abnormalities.
Processing supervision
Processing supervision is generally associated with a software or software processing

fault. Probable causes in this category include: software errors, communication errors,
version mismatches, DB consistency errors, etc.
Correlation and suppression
A correlation and suppression function is performed in order to isolate the root cause
of the abnormal system operation. It also suppresses alarming in downstream NEs that
are involved in providing end-to-end service.
Alarm reporting
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 system provides defect processing, correlation, and
probable cause declaration for each piece of equipment and facility and generates
autonomous message towards the management system (alarm or event) based on the
provisioned alarm severity.
The NE supports four levels of NE condition reporting: CR, MJ, MN, and No Alarm.
A No Report condition is supported for conditions not reported.
Conditions with a notification code CR (critical), MJ (major), MN (minor) are

reported as alarms.
Conditions with a notification code NA (Non Alarmed) are reported as events

(standing conditions).
Conditions with a notification code NR (Not Reported) are autonomously reported
but can be retrieved by user.
All alarms and conditions are available to the management systems as follows:
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 supports autonomous reporting and logging of all

alarms and conditions via WebUI or SNMP interfaces.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 supports retrieval of all alarms and conditions via CLI,
WebUI or SNMP interfaces.
Management and retrieval of alarm logs is available via CLI, WebUI, and SNMP.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
5-3
Issue 3 April 2009
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
All alarms that are reported by the system shall be time-stamped at the source.
All standing conditions are retrievable regardless of whether these conditions are
reported or not. GR-474-CORE defines a standing condition as follows: A
standing condition is a state of the NE that can be determined by inspection (e.g.,
examining a light display) or by interrogating the NE (e.g., sending a request for
status information through an OS).
A user can define and modify the severity designated to a particular condition by
configuring a specified alarm severity.
The following are the three levels of severity provisioning in the system.
Each condition type in the system has a factory default severity.
Each condition type in the system has a provisionable, system-wide factory

override severity with a higher priority than the factory default for the condition
type.
Each specific entity (AID) in the system has a provisionable severity with a higher
priority than the factory override or factory default for the condition type.
The system-wide factory override severity and specific entity severity are provisionable
via CLI, TL1, and SNMP.
Effect on service declaration
The NE supports the capability of reporting Service Affecting (SA) alarms and
Non-Service Affecting (NSA) alarms. In general, failures impacting any traffic are
Service Affecting when no protection exists or when protection is not operational, and
the alarms impacting no traffic are Non-Service Affecting.
Typically, NSA alarms have a default severity of Minor or below, and SA alarms have
a default severity of Major or Critical. The conditions report and retrieval processing
include the alarm effect on service parameter (SA/NSA).
Changing the alarm severity while some conditions on the facility are present might
not impact the exiting conditions until they clear and get declared again.
For purposes of generating alarm and event reports, time-hysteresis filtering is applied
to all signal conditions as described in GR-253. A condition must be present
continuously for 2.5 seconds before an alarm report is generated, and it must be absent
for 10 seconds before a CLEAR is generated. Some OTS and OCH layer transmission
conditions that are based on analog power monitoring are integrated over longer time
periods to avoid reporting network transient events.
Reported facility conditions correctly identify the underlying equipment source of the
problem. That is, the bay-shelf-slot part of the facility ID refers to the equipment on
which the fault exists.
Reports of alarms and conditions originating from facilities on non-failed equipment as
a result of secondary facility effects are suppressed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
5-4
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Audible alarm indications
The NE provides audible alarm dry contacts and alarm cut-off capability per GR-833.
The alarm cut-off function (OPR-ACO) removes the signal from the dry contacts, but
it does not change the internal state of the NE, nor affect any of the visual indicators.
The NE provides a visual alarm summary display on the user panel via one LED for
each alarm severity (see LED).
General performance monitoring (PM) processing
Performance Monitoring processing in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 provides the

following functions.
Monitors and accumulates digital and analog parameters pertinent to a specific

physical or logical access point (see further detailed description of monitoring types
on specific Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 NE entities)
Stores and manages history accumulation data (up to thirty-three 15-minute and
seven 1-day accumulation registers can be stored)
Validation and threshold crossing processing
Manages threshold values through profile assignment to individual port entities
Free-running counters for all monitored points
Performance Monitoring functions are performed on physical and logical points within
the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 NE representing the boundary with other NEs or an
external system. A user can define and monitor Quality Of Service at individual points
in which local NE interacts with other network entities.
Refer to Figure 5-1, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 PM points (p. 5-6) for an
illustration of performance monitoring points.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
5-5
Issue 3 April 2009
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 5-1 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 PM points
The identified points in Figure 5-1, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 PM points (p. 5-6)
provide the following transport layer and PM monitoring types:
1. OTS layer monitored type(s): Total OPR
OCh channel within the OTS monitored types: (individual channel) OPR
2. OTS layer monitored type(s): Total OPT
Och channel within the OTS monitored types: (individual channel) OPT
3. OPS layer monitored type(s): Total OPR & OPT
OTUk (Section Monitoring) layer monitored types: BBE (BIP-8), ES, SES,
UAS, FEC-EC, and FEC-UBC
ODUk (Path Monitoring) layer monitored types: BBE (BIP-8), ES, SES, and
UAS
4. Client Optical monitored type(s): OPR & OPT
Client Digital Refer to client-specific monitored type specification in the next
section.
5. OSC Receive direction monitored type(s): OPR, CV, ES, SES, SEFS, Ethernet
Interface group
6. OSC Transmit direction monitored type(s): OPT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
5-6
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Whereas digital monitoring types provide progressive accumulation of monitored

performance event counts, analog monitoring types provide watermark points (high and
low watermarks), as well as average value of analog monitored parameter over an
accumulation period.
In addition to physical and logical (OCh) facility-related PM support, the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 NE supports monitoring of the equipment controller (EC)
processing use of resources.
The controller card provides monitoring as well as 15-minute and 1-day register
accumulation and provides storage of the following resource utilization statistics.
Average CPU use
Peak Heap use

Peak Memory Pool use
Threshold crossing alert management
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 provides users with the ability to configure and manage
threshold crossing alert message generation for every PM monitoring entity. Designated
threshold for the monitored type is considered crossed when the value in the current
register is equal to or exceeds the value in the corresponding threshold register.
Threshold Crossing Alert (TCA) occurrence is reported via REPT^EVT messages or
SNMP traps upon recognition of the threshold crossings. A TCA is considered a
transient condition (implicitly cleared at the end of associated accumulation period).
Users can manage threshold values (change the threshold or disable threshold alert
generation) by modifying threshold attributes in the TCA profile assigned to an
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 NE port entity.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 supports the following TCA profile types.
OC_N (SONET port section monitoring)
STM_N (SDH port section monitoring)

DW (OTU2 and ODU2 layer PM parameters)
ETH (Ethernet group, RMON statistic)
INF (Interface group)

PCS (PCS layer monitoring for Ethernet/FC ports)
CP (Equipment PM parameters, applicable to EC, processor resources statistics)
OPR (Optical Power Received)

OPT (Optical Power Transmitted)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
5-7
Issue 3 April 2009
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Nine instances of each profile type are supported. Profile instance 0 is used to disable
TCAs for the group. Profiles with index 7 contain factory default data with 15-minute
defaults preloaded, while profile with index 8 contains 1-day defaults preloaded.
Instances 1-6 are initialized with all 0 values and can be customized by user.
Each port can be assigned one or more profile instances. (Only one instance of each
profile type can be assigned to a port/tmper combination. That is, one instance of a
profile type can be assigned to a port A, 15-minute time period, while another instance
of the same profile type can be assigned to same port A but 1-day time period.)
When a port is created, the system automatically assigns profile instance #7 (preloaded
with 15-minute defaults) and #8 (preloaded with 1-day defaults).
Analog parameter TCAs
Performance parameter thresholds are set to show degraded performance. A threshold is

the mechanism for generating a defined notification resulting from changes in
parameter values.
Two types of thresholds exist.
Counter-threshold: associated with digital parameters
Gauge-threshold: associated with analog parameters
Unlike the value of a counter parameter that can only increase in value unless its
value is reset, the value for a gauge parameter can increase or decrease continuously
over time. Analog parameters have two user configurable thresholds (notifyHigh and
notifyLow) as a high threshold and low threshold associated with the parameter,
respectively
These threshold values are checked against the appropriate tidemark low and tidemark
high monitors. TCA notification is raised when tidemark high exceeds the defined
notifyHigh value for the parameter and time period or when tidemark low drops below
the defined notifyLow value for the parameter and time period.
Refer to Figure 5-2, Analog parameter TCAs (p. 5-9) for an illustration.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
5-8
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 5-2 Analog parameter TCAs
Note that term exceed used with tidemark low/high monitored parameters indicates that
tidemark high value is greater than the corresponding threshold or that tidemark low is
below the corresponding threshold.
For OT physical layer OPR, OPT parameters TCA profiles contain values for positive
and negative deviation relative to established baselined analog value for that port.
Baselining of OPR/OPT values can be established automatically (at the point the input
signal is applied to the port initially or laser initially enabled) or manually by user
command.
Baselining applies to OT and OSC ports but does not apply to OCh and OTS ports.
OCh and OTS port thresholds are established during the commissioning phase.
Client-specific PM monitoring points
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 optical transponders (OTs) provide a variety of client

signal types that a user can configure. Each of the specific client signal types includes
optical physical layer monitoring points as well as one or more digital layer monitoring
points.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
5-9
Issue 3 April 2009
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following tables list the digital layer monitoring groups that Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-32 supports.
Table 5-1
SONET Section PM parameters
Parameter
Mnemonic per T1.231
Definition
Coding Violations
CV-S
Count of BIP-8 (Byte B1)

errors
Errored Seconds
ES-S
Count of seconds with (B1)

Errors 1 or SEF 1 or
LOS 1
Severely Errored Seconds
SES-S
Count of seconds with (B1)

Errors x2 or SEF 1 or
LOS 1
Severely Error Frame

Seconds
SEFS-S
Count of seconds with SEF

1
Notes:
1.
Value x is based on GR-253, T1.231 definition of SES for specified signal.
Table 5-2
SDH Regenerator Section PM parameters
Parameter
Mnemonic
Definition
Background Block Errors
BBE-RS
(pN_EBC for all seconds

not declared SES)
Errored Seconds
ES-RS
Count of seconds with

pN_EBC 1 or OOF 1
or LOS 1
Severely Errored Seconds
SES-RS

Block Errors x2 or OOF
1 or LOS 1
Unavailable Seconds
UAS-RS
10 or more seconds of SES
Notes:
1.
pn_EBC indicates event of detecting a block error in STM-N structure. ITU-T and ETSI
documents define pN_DS event which contributes to ES, SES, and UAS declaration. This
simplified approach is consistent with pN_DS definition in referred documents.
2.
Value x is based on G.784 definition of SES.
Table 5-3
OTUk and ODUk PM parameters (DW group)
Parameter
Mnemonic
CLI MONTYPE
Definition
Background Block
BBE-OTU
RX SM BIP8 Error
Count of BIP-8
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Errors
Count
(SM BIP-8) errors
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
5-10
fore all
seconds
Issue
3 Aprilnot
2009
declared SES
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-3
OTUk and ODUk PM parameters (DW group) (continued)
Parameter
Mnemonic
CLI MONTYPE
Definition
Errored Seconds
ES-OTU
RX SM Error
Seconds
Count of seconds
with (SM BIP-8)
Errors 1 or LOF
= True or LOM =
True or LOS = True
Severely Errored
Seconds
SES-OTU
RX SM Severely
Error Seconds
Count of seconds
with (SM BIP-8)
Errors x2 or LOF
= True or LOM =
True or LOS = True
Unavailable
Seconds
UAS-OTU
RX SM Unavailable
Seconds
See requirement
PM DWDM-1059
FEC Corrected
Errors
FECC
RX RS Corrected
Count
Count of FEC
Errors
Corrected3and LOS
= False and LOD =
False
FEC Uncorrected
Bits
FECUBC
RX RS Uncorrected
Count
Count of
Uncorrectable Bits
and LOS = False
and LOF = False
Background Block
Errors
BBE-OTU
RX PM BIP8 Error
Count
Count of BIP-8
(PM BIP-8) errors
for all seconds not
declared SES
Errored Seconds
ES-ODU
RX PM Error
Seconds
Count of seconds
with (PM BIP-8)
Errors 1 or LOF
= True or LOM =
True or LOS = True
or AIS = True or
OCI = True or LCK
= True or TIM =
True or PLM =
True
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
5-11
Issue 3 April 2009
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-3
OTUk and ODUk PM parameters (DW group) (continued)
Parameter
Mnemonic
CLI MONTYPE
Definition
Severely Errored
Seconds
SES-ODU
RX PM Severely
Error Seconds
Count of seconds
with (PM BIP-8)
Errors x2 or LOF
= True or LOM =
True or LOS = True
or AIS = True or
OCI = True or LCK
= True or TIM =
True or PLM =
True
Unavailable
Seconds
UAS-ODU
RX PM Unavailable
Seconds
10 or more seconds
SES
Table 5-4
PCS PM parameter definitions
Parameter
Mnemonic
Definition
Code Violations - PCS
CV-PCS
Count of 64B/66B or
8B/10B coding violations
Errored Seconds - PCS
ES-PCS
Count of 64B/66B or
8B/10B coding violations
1 or dLSS = True or dLOS
= True
Severely Errored Seconds PCS
SES-PCS

64B/66B or 8B/10B errors
x2or dLSS = True or
dLOS = True
Severely Errored Frame

Seconds - PCS
SEFS-PCS
Count of seconds in which

dLSS = True or dLOS =
True
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
5-12
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-5
Ethernet Statistics definitions (ETH group)
Parameter
Mnemonic
Definition
Ethernet Number of Octets
ETHOCTETS
Provides a count of the

total number of octets of
data (including the bad
packets) received on the
port. Count excludes
framing bits (SFD &
Preamble) but includes
Frame Check Sequence
(FCS) octets.
Ethernet Number of
Packets
ETHPKTS

total number of packets
(including bad packets,
broadcast, and multicast
packets) received.
Ethernet Broadcast Packets
ETHBCSTPKTS
Identifies a count of the

total number of good
packets received that were
directed to the broadcast
address. This does not
include multicast packets.
Number of collision events

on Ethernet link
ETHCOLLISIONS

total number of collisions
on the port.
Ethernet Number of
Errored Frames
ETHCRCAE

received that had a length
of between 63 and 1518
octets, inclusive, but had
either a FCS with an
integral number of octets
(FCS error) or a bad FCS
with a non-integral number
of octets (Alignment
Error). The packet length
excludes framing bits and
includes FCS octets.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
5-13
Issue 3 April 2009
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-5
Ethernet Statistics definitions (ETH group) (continued)
Parameter
Mnemonic
Definition
Ethernet Number of Drop

Events
ETHDROPEVTS

total number of events in
which packets were
dropped by the monitoring
entity due to a lack of
resources. This value is not
necessarily the number of
packets dropped; it can be
the number of times this
condition has been
detected.
Ethernet Incoming
Fragmented Packets
ETHFRGMTS

sent or received that were
less than 64 octets in
length (excluding framing
bits but including FCS
octets) and had either a
bad FCS with an integral
number of octets (FCS
Error) or a bad FCS with a
non-integral number of
octets (Alignment Error).
Ethernet Jabber Packets
ETHJABRS

sent or received that were
longer than 1518 octets
(excluding framing bits,
but including FCS octets)
and had either a bad FCS
with an integral number of
octets (FCS Error) or a bad
FCS with a non-integral
number of octets
(Alignment Error).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
5-14
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-5
Parameter
Mnemonic
Definition
Ethernet Multi-cast Packets
ETHMCSTPKTS

total number of good
packets received that were
directed to a multicast
address. This does not
include packets directed to
the broadcast.
Ethernet Oversize Packets
ETHOVRSIZEPKTS

received that were longer
than 1518 octets and were
otherwise well formed. The
packet length excludes
framing bits and includes
FCS octets.
Ethernet Undersized
Packets
ETHUNDRSIZWPKTS

received that were less
than 64 octets long and
were otherwise well
formed. The packet length
excludes framing bits and
includes FCS octets.
Ethernet 64-octet Packets
ETHPKTS64OCTETS

(including bad packets)
received that were exactly
64 octets in length. The
FCS octets.
Ethernet 65- to 127-octet

Packets
ETHPKTS127OCTETS

received that were between
65 and 127 octets in
length, inclusive. The
FCS octets.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
5-15
Issue 3 April 2009
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-5
Parameter
Mnemonic
Definition

Packets
ETHPKTS255OCTETS

FCS octets.

Packets
ETHPKTS511OCTETS

FCS octets.

Packets
ETHPKTS1023OCTETS

FCS octets.
Ethernet 1024- to
1518-octet Packets
ETHPKTS1518OCTETS

FCS octets.
Ethernet Packet Error Ratio
ETHPKTER
Provides the value of

packet error ratio within
the monitoring period
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
5-16
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-6
Interface PM Statistics definitions (INF group)
Parameter
Output MONTYPE
Definition
Interface Incoming Number

of Bytes
IFINOCTETS
The IFINOCTETS contains

the number of received
bytes in good and bad
frames.
Interface Outgoing Number

of Bytes
IFOUTOCTETS
The IFOUTOCTETS
contains the number of
transmitted bytes in good
and bad frames.

of Unicast Frames
IFINUCASTPKTS
The IFINUCASTPKTS
received unicast MAC
frames.

of Unicast Frames
IFOUTUCASTPKTS
The IFOUTUCASTPKTS
transmitted unicast MAC
frames.

of Broadcast Frames
IFINBCASTPKTS
The IFINBCASTPKTS
received MAC frames with
broadcast Destination
Address.

of Broadcast Frames
IFOUTBCASTPKTS
The IFINBCASTPKTS
transmitted MAC frames
with broadcast Destination
Address.

of Multicast Frames
IFINMCASTPKTS
The IFINMCASTPKTS
received MAC frames with
multicast Destination
Address.

of Multicast Frames
IFOUTMCASTPKTS
The IFINMCASTPKTS
transmitted MAC frames
with multicast Destination
Address.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
5-17
Issue 3 April 2009
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-6
Interface PM Statistics definitions (INF group) (continued)
Parameter
Output MONTYPE
Definition
Interface Incoming Frame

Errors
IFINERR
The IFINERR contains the

number of errored frames
received.
The received frame counts
as errored if it contains:
Interface Outgoing Frame

Errors
IFOUTERR
Symbol errors
CRC errors
Alignment errors
The IFOUTERR contains

the number of errored
frames transmitted.
The transmitted frames
count as errored if it
contains:
Symbol errors
CRC errors
Alignment errors
Interface Incoming
Discarded Frames
IFINDSCRD

number of packets
discarded at the IN port
(IfInDiscards) of the
interface.
Interface Outgoing
Discarded Frames
IFOUTDSCRD

number of packets
discarded at the OUT port
(IfOutDiscards) of the
interface.
Interface Incoming Frames

with Unknown Protocol
IFINUNKNOWNPLTS

number of packets received
at the IN port of the
interface for which the
protocol is unknown.
Interface Incoming
Unclassified Frames
IFINUNCLASSPKTS

number of unclassified
packets received at the
interface.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
5-18
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OSC port supports Section/RS monitored types, like OC3/STM1 port as well as INF
PM group.
Single-port tunable Any Rate module (11STAR1) supports the following performance
monitoring groups:
10-GbE client port entity: ETH, PCS, OPR & OPT

10 GFC client port entity: PCS, OPR & OPT
OC192/STM64 client port entity: OC_N, STN_N, OPR & OPT
OTM-0.2 client port entity: DW, OPR & OPT

Line port entity: DW, OPR & OPT
Single-line port tunable multi-rate 10-client multiplexing module (11STMM10)

supports the following performance monitoring groups:
1/2/4 GFC client port entity: PCS, OPR & OPT
OC-3/12/48/STM-1/4/16 client port entity: OC_N, STM_N, OPR & OPT

CBR2G5 client port entity: OC_N, STM_N, OPR & OPT
Single-line port tunable 12-GbE client Multiplexing module (11STGE12) supports the
following performance monitoring groups:
OTS and OCH entities support only Optical Power Receive and Transmit performance
monitoring groups (no threshold crossing alerts).
SVAC module supports only OPR PM group on the client port and OPT PM group on
the line port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
5-19
Issue 3 April 2009
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Automated optical power management system
Automated optical power management is a software system that controls variable

optical attenuators in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 to control the optical power
levels on a per-wavelength basis.
Several sub-systems comprise the power management system:
Stored target powers and amplifier gain ranges
Pack level control loops
Add wavelength power adjustment loop

Amplifier gain and setpoint adjustment functions
When a system is commissioned, data is transferred to the network elements (NEs) in

the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32. This data includes the target powers per-channel at
key locations in the NE and the expected minimum and maximum gains for amplifiers
in the system. The latter provides operational bounds on the gains of the amplifiers in
the system and ties their gain ranges to the planning of the network.
When an amplifier gain must be set outside the planned range, a potential optical
signal-to-noise ration (OSNR) problem is indicated within the network: The OSNR of
lightpaths travelling through this amplifier can experience more OSNR degradation
than planned. The planning data can be transferred to the NEs either manually by
entering the data using one of the user interfaces or by using the commissioning tools
provided by the Photonic Manager to automatically provision the planning data from a
commissioning file produced by the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Engineering and
Planning Tool (EPT).
Figure 5-3, EPT parameters for a TOADM node (p. 5-21) illustrates an automatically
managed tunable optical add-drop multiplexer (TOADM) node with the power targets
and gain ranges from the planning tool labeled. The small green circles indicate
Wavelength Tracker monitoring points that are used to retrieve power readings used by
the power management system.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
5-20
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 5-3 EPT parameters for a TOADM node
Pack levels
Pack level loops maintain target output powers that have been calculated and set by the
power management system. There are two types of pack level control loop.
In one version, the decoded Wavelength Tracker power levels at the output ports of the
wavelength selective switch pack (CWR8) are used to continuously update per channel
VOA settings to adjust the power level per wavelength to a target output power. The
VOAs are adjusted using an algorithm that guarantees stability of the system when
many CWR8 packs are traversed by a lightpath.
In another version, the VOA used to control the output power of a wavelength at the
point it is added onto the system and is continuously adjusted using the power reading
available on the pack where the VOA is located. In both cases, the target per
wavelength power that the loops try to achieve has been calculated by the power
management system to achieve the power levels designed for the system.
Figure 5-4, Per-channel power control points within a TOADM node (p. 5-22)
illustrates the location of some local pack target points for a TOADM network element.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
5-21
Issue 3 April 2009
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 5-4 Per-channel power control points within a TOADM node
The add wavelength power adjustment loop periodically checks the output power of
added wavelengths at their egress point onto the optical fiber at the node at which they
are launched. It then adjusts the setpoints that control the add path wavelengths to
achieve the target powers at the output of the node. These adjustments compensate for
changes in output power at the egress point of the node as wavelengths are added and
dropped from the system and for minor changes in loss in the add path components.
Adjustment functions
Two functions are provided that adjust amplifier gains, recalculate setpoints, and reset
Wavelength Tracker expected powers.
Ingress adjustment
The ingress adjustment function adjusts the gain of the optical amplifier on an
incoming line [referred to as the ingress line driver (ingress LD)] to compensate the
loss from the preceding nodes egress point to the output of the ingress LD. Target
powers at both the upstream node and the local node define the required loss.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
5-22
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Egress adjustment
The egress adjustment function adjusts the gain of the optional optical amplifier on an
outgoing line [referred to as the egress line driver (egress LD)] to compensate the loss
of the network elements through path components between the ingress LD output and
the egress line output. The target power at the egress line and the ingress LD define
the target loss. Additionally, the egress adjustment function recalculates the drop path
CWR8 setpoints for the through channels and the output power required for the add
path CWR8 to coincide with the egress amplifiers gain and the egress line target
output power.
The adjustment of the egress amplifier gain is done in such a way that the minimum
required gain is selected to compensate the nodes through loss. This minimizes the
amplifiers contribution to the transmitted signals OSNR degradation. If there is no
egress amplifier the egress adjustment function only adjusts the setpoints to meet the
egress lines target output power. After an adjustment function completes the
Wavelength Tracker monitoring point expected powers are updated to reflect the
changes in setpoints and gains within the node
The power management systems adjustments are coordinated to prevent control loops
from changing VOA settings too far from estimated required values. Inter-node
communication provides a way to monitor for large loss changes in the network to
prevent downstream network elements from compensating loss that should be
compensated by a more upstream network element. The adjustments to setpoints and
gains are made in small controlled steps to prevent any impact on other wavelengths or
other parts of the system
Automatic power management features
The automatic power management system enables the following features.
Automatic compensation for loss changes in the network up to a limit, (after which
the adjustment functions must be used by the user to adjust optical amplifier gains
or setpoints).
Automated service turn-up.
One-touch commissioning using the 1354RM-PhMPhotonic Manager.

System power re-balancing using the 1354RM-PhM Photonic Manager.
Automated network equipment upgrade tools using the 1354RM-PhM Photonic

Manager.
Alarms indicate when network events require the user to invoke a power
adjustment function. Alarms also indicate if adjustments have failed and when a
local pack control loop cannot maintain a target power.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
5-23
Issue 3 April 2009
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Finally, automated power management can be disabled on a line-by-line basis to allow

mixing static OADM network elements with re-configurable OADM network elements
within the same system. The ability to disable automated power management and use
manual power management also allows Alcatel-Lucent to be flexible when solving
network problems presented by the customer.

Overview
The key differentiating characteristic that separates open photonic layer services from
more primitive services offered by passive WDM equipment is that open photonic
layer services provide management capabilities through the Wavelength Tracker
monitoring capability feature. Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability allows a
network operator to remotely trace a lightpath and to monitor power levels without
disrupting service. This is invaluable during installation, commissioning, and ongoing
management of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 network.
Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability is more than an integrated power
measurement feature. It has the capability to uniquely identify and track each
wavelength throughout the network. This is especially valuable in WDM and OADM
networks where multiple instances of the same wavelength may occur.
Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability is a technique to tag a wavelength so that
the wavelength can be traced through the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 network.
Wavelength Tracker also allows the optical power levels to be measured along the
path.
WaveKeys
To make use of the Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability, certain optical

components are equipped with detection points that can detect the presence of
Wavelength Tracker keys and measure the optical power of each wavelength. Each
Wavelength Tracker detection point can be programmed to expect particular channels
and raise an alarm if the channels are not detected. The Wavelength Tracker detection
points can also measure the optical power of individual wavelength services. Alarms
can be raised if the optical power is too high or too low. The alarm threshold is
provisionable by the user.
The WaveKeys are detected on the following cards.
LD - LINE IN and SIG OUT
CWR - SIG IN and THRU OUT and Add VOA out

OPS - A IN and B IN and SIG IN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
5-24
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the information from the Wavelength Tracker detection points throughout the
network, the Network Management System user can perform the following.
Trace light paths through the network, verifying that the connectivity is correct
Monitor power levels along a light path, as seen in Figure 5-5, Path power trace
(p. 5-25).
Identify all the services at a Wavelength Tracker detection point
Monitor the power levels of all services at a Wavelength Tracker detection point, as
seen inFigure 5-6, Optical power levels at a Wavelength Tracker detection point
(p. 5-26).
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability enables

service providers to pro-actively manage wavelength services and to deliver true
optical service assurance.
Figure 5-5 Path power trace
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
5-25
Issue 3 April 2009
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 5-6 Optical power levels at a Wavelength Tracker detection point

Overview
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 network element (NE) software installation and upgrades
are performed by the service providers system administrator. Network elements can be
upgraded using a download from the 1354RM-PhM Element Management System, or
the WebUI via a personal computer (using a CD-ROM that contains the system
software load provided with the system).
Installation
The software installation service provides the control mechanism for nodal, shelf, and
line-card level software downloads, installations, upgrades, and backouts. The service
performs an audit of those assets that require upgrade, and uses the software load
transfer mechanism to retrieve the software from a target server. Card software
installations affect only the specified card, whereas nodal software installations affect
the entire network element.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
5-26
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Upgrades
Upgrades and backouts are treated as software installations. The software upgrade
feature consists of software load distribution, card restarts, and activity switches. The
feature performs the upgrade with minimal data loss and card down time. Mechanisms
are provided to minimize traffic over the control network when multiple cards require
upgrade to the same revision level. Future releases will enable control of line card
upgrades that can be coordinated with maintenance and/or protection switching
activities.
Backouts
The upgrade feature also offers the ability to back out of an upgrade that is in
progress. When a nodal installation completes, all cards are running the target load
with the exception of inactive mate cards. The inactive mate cards retain the previous
load. You can then either issue a backout command or commit the network element to
the newly installed load. The backout reverts to the original load, but in this case you
must restore the database from backup. Once committed, the network element installs
the target load on all inactive mate cards, and the inactive master control cards
database is synchronized to the active master control card. A backout causes the
inactive mate cards to become active and reinstalls the previous load on the previously
active card. For complete installation information, refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-32 Installation and System Turn-Up Guide.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
5-27
Issue 3 April 2009
6 ystem planning and

S
engineering
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides network and office planning guidelines to prepare for
deployment of a Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 network.
Contents
6-1
Power and grounding
6-2
6-6
Cooling
6-7

Overview
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Engineering Tool (EPT) is used to design the networks
composed of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 and 1830 PSS-1 GBE network elements
(NEs). It supports initial designs as well as incremental additions to existing networks.
Through its interface with the Network Management System, design information
produced by the EPT is downloaded to individual NEs to facilitate system turn-up.
The EPT is a stand-alone Windows application with a Graphical User Interface
(GUI) capable of capturing network requirements and synthesizing network solutions.
A built-in design optimizer produces the lowest cost network requirements.
Given the complex nature of capturing network requirements, the EPT is capable of
operating in the following ways:
Fully automatic network design synthesis
Automatic design synthesis with manual override
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
6-1
Issue 3 April 2009
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fully manual design synthesis

Phased design that enforces in-service upgrades from one phase to another
What-if scenarios to quantify how future traffic patterns operate in the design
The EPT examines thousands of network alternatives, taking into account various
optical parameters including fiber attenuation, end- of-life attenuation margin,
connector losses, chromatic dispersion, and polarization mode dispersion. It calculates
transmission characteristics including typical and worst-case optical signal-to-noise
ratio (OSNR), residual dispersion, and non-linear phase shift. The EPT also takes into
account optical penalties due to PMD, PDL, filter penalty, cross talk penalty, and
non-linear transmission penalty.
The EPT is able to model Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1
GBE, and combinations of Alcatel-Lucent PSS-32/PSS-1 GBE networks. Tunable
OADM (TOADM), fixed OADM (FOADM), and CWDM configurations can be
modeled in the EPT according to the NE configuration capabilities. Maximum channel
counts can be specified in the EPT to accommodate cost/performance trade-offs as
well.
The EPT produces a set of reports that can be used to order, install, and configure
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS networks. These reports include Bill of Materials, Amplifier
and DCM Placement, Optical Transmission Characteristics, Card Placement (both
tabular and graphical Bay Layout), Fiber Characteristics, and general network
assumptions. The EPT also produces a design file for the Network Management
System that works in conjunction with WaveTracker to define alarm thresholds
specific to each design for preventive network maintenance.
Power and grounding

Overview
Each shelf has independent power connections and is powered independently from the
other shelves in the network element. Power is provided to the front of the shelf via
two power filter modules: one on the right side of the shelf and one on the left. The
shelf is designed for redundant power it will fully operate with only one power
filter/supply although two are always recommended.
Each shelf can be grounded two separate ways. Grounding can be accomplished
through the screws that mount the shelf to the rack or through specific grounding lugs.
The grounding lug connection point is located in the bottom right corner of the shelf.
Figure 6-1, Shelf rear view showing power and ground connectors (p. 6-3)
Power is connected to the power input modules.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
6-2
Power and grounding
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 6-1 Shelf rear view showing power and ground connectors
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
6-3
Issue 3 April 2009
Power and grounding
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Shelf power and thermal budgets
Table 6-1, Power dissipation for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 (p. 6-4) lists the
maximum power (watts) for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32.
Table 6-1
Pack
Power dissipation for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32

Description
Power Consumption
MAX
TYP
T=25C
Total
MAX9
Total
TYP9
Common
EC1
Equipment Controller
43
28
43
28
USRPNL
User Panel
PFDC30
DC Power Filter (30A)
10
10
10
10
PFDC50
10
10
10
10
PFDC70
10
10
10
10
FAN2
Fan Unit
185
60
185
60
CWR83
Colorless Wave Router 44ch
35
23
35
23
AHPHG 4
Adj High Power High Gain

Optical Amp (+20 dBm)
50
35
50
35
ALPHG 4
Adj Low Power High Gain

Optical Amp (+17 dBm)
45
30
45
30
OPSA
Optical Protection Switch
10
10
11STAR1 5
10G Transponder
47
40
47
40
11STMM106
10 x Any Transponder
116
100
127
109
11STGE126
12 x GbE, Tunable
53
49
66
60
11DPGE127
12 x GbE x 2 port
pluggable
40
38
61
55
SVAC
Single Variable Attenuator
28
25
28
25
SFCx,
SFDx
static Filters,
CWDM/DWDM
0.2
0.1
0.2
0.1
DCMx
Dispersion Control Module
SFD44
static Filter - 44 channel
Universal
Rack Mount
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
6-4
Power and grounding
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Notes:
1.
EC power increases over TYP by 0.5W for each installed Line Card or Transponder (32
ports maximum)
2.
Fan power starts to increase when the ambient temperatures rises past 30C and reaches its
MAX at approx. 44C. During system startup or when an EC has been replaced, the Fan
will operate at MAX power until the EC has completed its startup procedures.
3.
The MAX power will decrease by 5W after an intial 3-minute startup period
4.
MAX value decreases by 10W after initial 3-minute startup period.
5.
The power for the Client SFP and Line XFP are included in stated values
6.
Does not include Pluggables. TYP power increases by 0.9W / SFP; MAX power increases
by 1.1W / SFP.
7.
Does not include Pluggables. TYP power increases by 0.9W / SFP & 3.3W / XFP. MAX
power increases by 1.1W / SFP and 3.9W / XFP
8.
52Vdc = Nominal/typical CO voltage: 40.5Vdc = ETSI ETS 300 132-2 specified low
voltage: 39.0Vdc = AT&T NEDS specified low voltage
9.
Values within these columns provide Power Consumption for cards having all pluggable
optics installed.
Power redundancy and reliability
Shelf power distribution is fully redundant, with two circuits, A and B, able to supply
power to the shelf. Redundant power feeds (A and B) are connected to the power
modules in slots 19 and 36. Power is fed into the shelf over two redundant power rails
(A and B) that feed all components in the shelf.
Power filters are available in 30A, 50A, and 70A capacity.
Power sources
Shelves operates fault-free in a voltage range of -40V DC to -72V DC (-48V DC or

-60 V DC nominal). You can supply power from standard -48V DC or -60 V DC
battery feeds, as is typical in a central office, or you can use an AC rectifier with
battery backup.
DC power system requirements
The DC source for the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 must meet the requirements of a
safety extra low voltage (SELV) source.
In order to avoid oscillation in the system, maximum source inductance to the DC
power source is 15uH, with a nominal value of 8uH, assuming a maximum loop of
100 meters (50 m feed and 50 m return).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
6-5
Issue 3 April 2009
Power and grounding
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Battery feeds
In a typical deployment, the shelves are installed in a central office (CO) or similar
environment that is equipped with its own power distribution center. In this
environment, power is distributed to the shelves from standard 48V DC battery feeds
that are equipped with fuses or circuit breakers.
AC rectifier feeds
In remote or controlled vault deployments, where the primary power source is an AC

utility line, a rectifier is required to convert the power from AC to DC, with a nominal
output voltage of 48 V DC. The rectifier must be capable of generating output power
that equals or exceeds the maximum input DC power requirement from the system,
plus 20 percent for battery charging.
To ensure that the shelf has a reliable power source, it is recommended that the
rectifier be N + 1 redundant and have battery backup. The power system in this
environment typically consists of a power rack to hold the rectifier, batteries, and
power distribution panel, and cable feeds that provide DC power to each shelf.
Power monitoring
The shelf controller monitors the status of the A and/or B direct current (DC) input
voltages. When a battery voltage decreases below 45V 1.5V, the Low Battery Voltage
alarm for that feed is triggered. When both power feeds are present and the A and B
Low Battery Alarms are raised, traffic may soon become interrupted. When both the A
and B power modules agree that their input power feeds have decreased below 40.5V
1.5V, they will turn power OFF to all circuit cards on the shelf, with the exception
of the EC and the SFC/Dx filters.
Introduction
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelves are designed to operate in environmentally

controlled locations or enclosures, such as central offices, commercial buildings, and
controlled environment vaults. The environmental operational limits for the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 are listed in Table 6-2, Ambient temperature and
humidity limits (p. 6-6).
Table 6-2
Ambient temperature and humidity limits
Factor
Condition
Limits
Temperature
Normal operation
5C to 40C (41F to 104F)
Short-term (2)
-5C to 50C (23F to 122F)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
6-6
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 6-2
Factor
Humidity
Ambient temperature and humidity limits (continued)

Condition
Limits
Rate of temperature
change
30C/hour (54F/hour)
Normal operation
5% to 85%
Short-term (2)
5% to 90% but not to exceed 0.024

kg of water per kg of dry air
Notes:
1.
Ambient temperature refers to conditions at a location of 1.5 m (59 in) above the floor
and 400 mm (15.8 in) in front of the equipment.
2.
Short-term operation is a period of not more than 96 consecutive hours and a total of not
more than 15 days in one year. (This refers to a total of 360 hours in any given year, but
no more than 15 occurrences during that one-year period.)
Cooling
Introduction
The shelf is cooled by a fan that houses three variable-speed fans. The fan tray is
hot-swappable in the event of a failure in the unit. If a single fan fails, the remaining
two fans will increase speed to compensate, allowing for the fan tray to be replaced
within a reasonable maintenance window. Note that the time frame to replace a failed
fan is 24 hours.
The fan tray is inserted near the top of the shelf, as illustrated in Figure 6-2, Airflow
through shelf (p. 6-8). The fan draws cool air up through the bottom of the shelf and
exhausts the heated air through the top of the shelf. Incoming air is filtered through a
replaceable air filter.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
6-7
Issue 3 April 2009
Cooling
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 6-2 Airflow through shelf
Cooling redundancy and reliability
The cooling system provides full carrier class redundancy. In the event of any single
failure the cooling system continues to operate, up to the maximum long-term
operational temperature limit defined in NEBS (40C).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
6-8
Cooling
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fan operation
In order to ensure the quietest possible operation, the speed of the fans is adjusted
automatically. Fan speed is increased to maximum in case of fault or fan tray removal.
Air filtering
The air is drawn through an air filter as it enters the bottom of the shelf. The air filter
is located below the fiber tray and is replaceable from the front of the shelf.
Figure 6-3 Air filter
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
6-9
Issue 3 April 2009
Product support
7
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes support services available to Alcatel-Lucent customers.

Alcatel-Lucent offers a number of services to assist customers with Engineering,
Installation and Technical Support of their networks. Additionally, Alcatel-Lucent offers
product-specific training courses.
Contents
7-1
Accessing and navigating the on-line customer support (OLCS) web site
7-6
7-11
Overview
Alcatel-Lucent provides the following Technical Support Services.
Remote Technical Support (RTS) - remote technical support to troubleshoot and

resolve system problems.
On-site Technical Support (OTS) - on-site assistance with operational issues and
remedial maintenance.
Repair and Replacement (R&R) - technical support services for device repair/return
or parts replacement.
Alcatel-Lucent On-Line Customer Support (OLCS) - online access to information
and services that can help resolve technical support requests.
Note: Technical Support Services are available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
7-1
Issue 3 April 2009
Product support
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For additional information regarding Alcatel-Lucent Worldwide Services, refer to the

Alcatel-Lucent web site at http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/solutions.
Select the appropriate category.
Service providers
Enterprise
Note: Use the appropriate steps below for the above categories.
Service Providers:
1. Select Service Providers.

2. Select Services .
3. Select Network Support and Maintenance Services located in the Maintenance
section.
Note: An overview of services provided is displayed. If more detailed information
on a particular category is needed, then select the appropriate information from the
top tabs displayed.
Enterprises
1. Select Enterprises.
2. Under the Evaluate section at the bottom of the page, select Products and
Services.
3. At the Products and Servicespage, select Services.
Note: An overview of the services provided is displayed. For more information,
select one of the three categories shown at the bottom of the page: Consult &
Design, Maintain & Operate, or Integrate & Deploy.
Technical support
Many of our customers have established their own support procedures. These
procedures usually involve escalation within their own companies. However, some
instances may require additional assistance from Alcatel-Lucent.
Alcatel-Lucent has been and continues to be committed to providing excellence in
technical support for its products and services. Therefore, we provide a hierarchical
support structure ready and available to solve any Alcatel-Lucent product technical
issue.
When additional assistance is required, the Alcatel-Lucent Welcome Center is the first
point of contact. An Alcatel-Lucent Welcome Center operator can direct the request to
engineers that are highly trained and skilled in resolving issues, involving
Alcatel-Lucent products. Technical assistance is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a
week.
Alcatel-Lucent Welcome Center
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
7-2
Product support
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 866 582 3688, prompt 1 (continental US)

+1 (630) 224 4672 (outside continental US)
(24 hours a day, 7 days a week)
By using the Alcatel-Lucent Welcome Center as the entry point for Alcatel-Lucent
support, customers will be assured of a timely and effective technical support
service.
On-line customer support
Overview
On-Line Customer Support (OLCS) is the Customer Support web site for our
customers technical support needs. This customer web access tool provides an easy
method to access data about Alcatel-Lucent products using the World Wide Web.
A customer must first request access to this web site to gain access to the following
customer support features:
Ask AL Knowledgebase
Customer Assistance Request Entry System (CARES)
Data Drop Box
Downloads
Alcatel-Lucent Alerts
Product Change Notices
RMA (Repair and Exchange)
The Ask AL Knowledgebase web interface feature connects you to the Knowledge
Management solutions database. The Ask AL Knowledgebase feature lets you search
for solutions by using natural language queries. Many products have an extensive set
of Solutions available. Solutions are created by technicians to provide customers with a
method to resolve issues without calling for assistance. Solutions are displayed,
showing the percentage weight or percent match, based on search criteria. Searches can
be performed on all products that are entitled, through the level of service contract a
customer has for RTS services
CARES
The CARES web interface feature makes it easy for you to submit an Assistance
Request (AR), subscribe to AR Notifications (be notified when an AR is updated), and
view all the customer ARs. The CARES feature lets you open an AR for low severity
issues or questions. Any high severity issue should be called into CTAM. Users can
stay informed about their ARs by using the flexible AR Notification subscriptions.
Users can choose a method for receiving updates: email, text messaging messages, or
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
7-3
Issue 3 April 2009
Product support
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
none. Users can choose when updates are wanted (when the state of the AR changes,
any update to the investigation field occurs, or any time any text field is modified).
Users can log into the OLCS web site and view ARs 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Data Drop Box
The Data Drop Box feature allows Alcatel-Lucent support technicians to provide
customers with a quick method to share files. The Data Drop Box allows a technician
to provide or receive a file from a customer quickly. These files remain in place for 7
days.
Documentation
The Documentation feature on the OLCS web site contains three areas: Manuals and
Guides, Technical Notes, and Release Information.
Manuals and Guides
This section contains the documents that are available in paper or electronic copy and
are distributed with a new product. These are the documents that are available within
the Alcatel-Lucent Product Documentation web site. The OLCS web site contains links
to the actual documents at the Customer Information Center (CIC) web site.
The following is a list of possible documents that are available from this site:
Administration Guide
Product Information and Planning Guide

Getting Started Guide
Installation Manual/Installation Guide
Modification Implementation Procedure (MIP)

User Guide
Maintenance and Trouble-clearing Guide
Framework User Guide

Graphical User Interface (GUI) Guide
Maintenance Guide, Provisioning Guide
User Operations Guide (UOG)
Technical Notes
This section contains documents that are specific to the product and are technical in
nature. Most of these documents will provide information in product data sheets or
white papers, which are technical documents that explain the operation of a particular
part of the system.
The following documents are available in this section.
Change Notice (CN)
Ethernet Management Guide
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
7-4
Product support
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Method of Procedure (MOP)

Planning Guide
Service Assurance Guide
Engineering Change Procedure (ECP)

Feature Contents
Operations Interworking (OI) Guide
Screen Help
White Papers
These documents will vary from product to product.

Release Information
This section contains documents that are specific to the release of a product.
The following documents are available in this section.
Acceptance Documents
Software Release Descriptions (SRDs)
Specific SRD sections

White Papers (release specific)
Software Compatibility
Upgrade Paths
Downloads
Note: This section might not apply to all products.

The Downloads area allows Alcatel-Lucent support technicians to provide access to
software downloads that are specific to a customers contract. This feature is only
allowed through negotiation with the Account Team and the Product Manager of the
product.
The Alcatel-Lucent Alerts tool is a subscription-based tool that provides the same
information that our Product Notifications (PNs) did previously provide. This new
method of communication is a vehicle to share product and support issues that are of
informational, maintenance, or preventive nature. Alcatel-Lucent Alerts contain detailed
text descriptions and urgency of Alcatel-Lucent product issues that need to be quickly
communicated to customers after the deployment of a release or product.
Product Change Notices
The Product Change Notices (PCN) area provides information on hardware changes for
a product. There is a selection of choices to help you search for Change Notices (CNs)
or Customer Change Notices (CCNs).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
7-5
Issue 3 April 2009
Product support
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Return Material Authorization (RMA) (Repair and Exchange)
Note: This section might not apply to all products

The RMA area provides a list of contact information on all Alcatel-Lucent
products. There is a request an RMA number on-line for most Alcatel-Lucent
products. An RMA number is required for all returned parts and this feature
provides you with an easy method to obtain the RMA number. Please check the
warranty status before submitting a request.
Accessing and navigating the on-line customer support

(OLCS) web site
Description
This section provides the method to access the On-Line Customer Support (OLCS)
web site, obtain a login (if necessary), and navigate to each feature listed in this
document.
Accessing the OLCS web site
To access the Alcatel-Lucent OLCS web site, enter: www.alcatel-lucent.com/support.

Once you are at this web page, select Lucent Global Support. This will bring you to
the web site where you can log in to gain access to the entitled products.
Obtaining a login for OLCS
To request a login, a customer must register, and then an email confirmation is sent
within two business days.
The following steps tell you how to register for a login.
1. Select Register Here on the top right (just below the Login and Password boxes)
of the Online Customer Support (https://support.lucent.com/portal/olcsHome.do)
web site.
2. Follow this registration process.
Select the role and accept the terms of use.

Provide a business identification, and enter in all of the required information.
Validate your email address.
Confirm your business identity and set a password.

Select content. (This will be verified against the current contract agreements.)
Register for the selected content.
3. An email confirmation of the registration and the site access privileges is sent
within two business days.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
7-6
Product support

(OLCS) web site
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4. Customize the web view one you have gained access to the OLCS web site.
After logging in, a personalized view of the Customer Support Home page
displays. This view is based on the users and the company support
entitlements.
From the U.S.
1 (866) 582 3688, prompt 7
From outside the U.S.
+1 (630) 218 7688
In Asia/Pacific
Please contact the in-country technical

support hotline
Via email
Use the email address: olcshelp@alcatellucent.com or use the sites Contact Us

form
Use the OLCS help desk number for OLCS access problems, registration questions,
password resets, navigation questions, etc.
View an OLCS website
After you have logged into the OLCS web site, a personalized view of the Customer
Support Home page is displayed. This view is based on the users and company
support entitlements
To set Customer Support as the default, if it is the primary destination on the
www.alcatel-lucent.com website, click Select default home page on the left column.
The My Products section provides you with quick navigation to the entitled products
and also quick access to the CARES tool. While navigating through the various tools,
you can establish bookmarks to certain tools, documents, or web pages (within OLCS)
by clicking Add to Bookmarks.
The Customer Support home page can be customized by selecting Customize page
layout and adjusting the fields to be displayed (uncheck the boxes to de-select those
elements). These fields can be adjusted at any time. The changes take effect
immediately
There are two methods to find product information. Click My Products to choose a
product, or click Documentation or Downloads to display a complete product
listing. When the full product list is displayed, use the alphabetic listing (default) or the
category list, whichever you prefer. Once a product is selected, a Product Summary
Page is displayed, which describes all of the tools and features available for this
product.
Note: If content has been posted, but contract entitlements do not allow access,
then the following padlock icon is displayed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
7-7
Issue 3 April 2009
Product support

(OLCS) web site
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Ask AL web page can be accessed from the left column on the Customer Support
homepage (unless you changed the view), from the Technical Support section in the
center of the page, or from the My Bookmarks section (if it was added there). Once
at the Ask AL Knowledgebase web page, enter a question or phrase using natural
language, and click the check boxes for only the products that should be searched;
otherwise, all products checked will be searched.
The results that return show a percentage weight or percent match based on the search
criteria. To refine a search, add more details to the question or phrase and answer the
other questions displayed. Once you find a solution of interest, select that solution, and
the complete solution will display.
Many of the solutions are based on generated ARs or Known Problems from the SRD.
To provide quality information, solutions go through a review process before being
posted. Content can grow daily as solutions move through the review cycle.
CARES
CARES ARs are accessed from the left column on the Customer Support homepage
(unless this view was changed), under the Technical Support section in the center of
the page, from the My Bookmarks section (if CARES was added there), or from the
Quick Link section CARES Assistance Requests, at the bottom of the Customer
Support homepage. Product Notifications and Solutions can also be selected in this
section. These are both legacy tools. The new tools, Alcatel-Lucent Alerts and Ask AL
Knowledgebase, are discussed in other sections of this document.
When you select CARES, a general web page displays. From that page, a particular
function can be selected from the left column. To provide more information on the
selected tool, select More from the center column.
ARs can be viewed (using Find an AR or Advanced query), created (using Create
an AR), or used to report a warranty defect (using Report a warranty defect). The
CARES web interface has features that keep you informed about the progress of ARs.
With the flexible AR Notification subscriptions, CARES can email or send text
messages on a variety of activities regarding an AR. A notification is sent when the AR
state is changed to Created, Resolved, Closed, or Pending Customer Action. Other
conditions that generate notifications are if the following fields are updated:
Investigation, Short Description, Current Summary, Description, and Resolution. You
can set up (subscribe), remove (unsubscribe), or change these conditions at any time
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
7-8
Product support

(OLCS) web site
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Data Drop Box
You can access the Data Drop Box from the left column on the Customer Support
homepage (unless your view was changed), from the Technical Support menu in the
center of the page, or from the My Bookmarks section (if Data Drop Box has been
added there). Click the Upload a file button in the Data Drop Box window to send a
file to the Alcatel-Lucent support technician. An email address can also be entered so
that the Alcatel-Lucent technician will be notified when the file has been sent. Click
the Download a file button from the Data Drop Box if the Alcatel-Lucent technician
has sent a file to be downloaded. These files will remain on the site for seven days.
Documentation
You can access documentation by selecting a product from the My Products area.
Alternatively, documentation can also be accessed from the left column on the
Customer Support home page (unless this view has been changed), from the Technical
Support section in the center of the page, or from the My Bookmarks section (if
Documentation has been added there). If accessing Documentation by means other than
the My Products area, choose the product whose documentation you wish to access
by selecting the product from the alphabetical listing or the category list.
Once you are on the product web page, select Manuals and Guides from the list
under the Documentation and downloads section. The Manuals and Guides link
brings you to the Library of Manuals and Guides for the product you have chosen. The
document links bring you to the document stored in the Alcatel-Lucent Customer
Information Center (CIC) web site or to another OLCS webpage that contains the
product documentation.
Within the Documentation and Downloads area, the Technical Notes link brings
you to a web page which contains documents that are not release specific and are
technical in nature.
Also, within the Documentation and Downloads area, the Release Information link
brings you to a Library of Release Notes web page that contains documents which are
release specific and are listed by release.
Click on these links to download or open a PDF file.
Downloads
Note: This might not apply to all products.

You can access downloads by selecting a product from the My Products section.
Downloads can also be accessed from the left column on the Customer Support
homepage (unless this view has been changed), from the Technical Support section
in the center of the page, or from the My Bookmarks section (if Downloads was
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
7-9
Issue 3 April 2009
Product support

(OLCS) web site
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
added there). If accessing Downloads by means other than the My Products area,
choose the product whose Downloads you wish to access by selecting the product from
the alphabetical listing or the category list.
Once you are on the product web page, click the Downloads: Electronic Delivery
link from the list under the Documentation and Downloads area. Select the
appropriate release to be downloaded from the drop-down list, and click Next. Select
the file to be downloaded and click Next. On the next web page, enter the path
where the file should be downloaded and click Download.
You can access Alcatel-Lucent Alerts from the left column on the Customer Support
homepage (unless this view has been changed), from the Technical Support section
in the center of the page, or from the My Bookmarks section (if Alcatel-Lucent
Alerts is added there).
Once you are on the Alcatel-Lucent Alerts web page, a list of products are displayed.
Click on a product to see a list of Alerts for that product. Alternatively, use the Enter
the number of the Alert field to find a specific Alert, or use the text search to search
for Alerts with certain words.
To subscribe to Alcatel-Lucent Alerts, click the Alerts Subscription Page link. Once
at the Alcatel-Lucent Alerts Subscription page, fill out the form and choose the
product whose alerts you would like to subscribe.
You have the option to click Modify Subscription or Cancel Subscription. Modify
Subscription allows you to modify the Urgency, Type, and/or Products selected.
Cancel Subscription will stop future Alcatel-Lucent Alerts email messages.
You have the option to click Modify Subscription or Cancel Subscription. Modify
Subscription allows you to modify the Urgency, Type, and/or Products selected.
Cancel Subscription will stop future Alcatel-Lucent Alerts email messages.
Product Change Notices (PCNs)
You can access Product Change Notices (PCNs) from the left column on the Customer
Support home page (unless this view has been changed), from the Technical Support
section in the center of the page, or from the My Bookmarks section (if PCNs were
added there)
Once on the PCN web page, a list of PCNs is displayed. You can search PCNs by
clicking one of the following links:
PCN cross-reference
Search for specific text in Class A PCNs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
7-10
Product support

(OLCS) web site
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PCNs added or updated within the past 30 days

Change Notice summary report
Return Material Authorization (RMA) (Repair and Exchange)
Note: This section might not apply to all products.

Return Material Authorization (RMA) can be accessed from the left column on the
Customer Support home page (unless this view has been changed), from the Technical
Support section in the center of the page, or from the My Bookmarks section (if it
was added there).
Once on the RMA web page, a table with contact information is displayed. Use the
contact information provided or choose to fill in the online RMA request form at the
bottom of that web page.

The technical support services expert workshop series
Audience:
Technicians, installers, maintenance engineers, technical support personnel, product
evaluators, and anyone who has a working knowledge of the products involved and is
interested in a hands-on workshop covering advanced troubleshooting issues.
Description:
The same engineers that resolve the Assistance Requests (ARs) have developed a series
of advanced, hands-on workshops that can be customized to the unique network
applications. Individual product modules will provide the knowledge and skills to
perform troubleshooting and fault-finding activities at the equipment site or from a
remote operations center. There are lab exercises using Alcatel-Lucent network
management systems to simulate real-world provisioning and troubleshooting scenarios.
In addition, general technology modules will round out the understanding of the
network element (NE) troubleshooting performed.
Objectives
Each module has specific objectives. Some overall series objectives are listed below:
Understand advanced network element security features.
Set up and understand interworking between Alcatel-Lucent network elements

Perform provisioning operations and remote trouble-shooting using CIT, EMS, and
TL1 interfaces.
Analyze Performance Monitoring Data
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
7-11
Issue 3 April 2009
Product support
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Understand alarm handling/alarm management

Provision and understand system synchronization techniques
Provision and understand protection schemes: BLSR, UPSR, 1+1, APS.
Understand network communication issues: OSI and TCP/IP interfacing
Length:
Product Modules are scheduled for 3 days. Technology Modules are scheduled for 1
day.
Expected Foundation Knowledge:
Suggested prerequisites are listed on each modules workshop description. Generally,
customers should have a basic understanding of digital fundamentals and lightwave
transmission systems. In addition, customers should have taken a previous
Alcatel-Lucent Operating & Maintenance course or have equivalent experience with
operations and maintenance issues related to the product.
Activities Prior to Workshop Delivery:
The effectiveness of this workshop series relies on the fact that it allows a customer to
address the issues experienced in their network today. To achieve this, prior to the
workshop, a conference call will be set up with the engineers that will facilitate the
workshop. During this call, the logistics of simulating the customers network
environment will be discussed.
Workshop Location:
This workshop will be delivered in the Customer Advocate System Test Labs in
Westford, MA. The format is 75-percent hands-on lab exercises, reinforced with 25%
classroom instruction.
How to Sign up:
To enroll in the training course:
Within the United States:
Visit https://training.lucent.com
Call 1 (888) 582 3688: Prompt 2.

Outside the continental United States:
Visit https://training.lucent.com
Call +1 (407) 767 2798: Prompt 2.

Fax: +1 (407) 767 2677
Enter Advanced Workshops in the search menu and click Go.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
7-12
Product support
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Choose which Advanced Maintenance Workshop that youd like to register for by
clicking on the link.
Read the workshop description(s) and follow the links to register.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
7-13
Issue 3 April 2009

8
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides the requirements for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 system quality
and reliability.
Contents
Reliability program
8-1
8-2
8-2
Failure rates
8-2
8-14
References
8-19
Reliability program
Overview
The reliability program is implemented as an integral part of the Alcatel-Lucent

Product Life Cycle (PLC) process. The reliability program is comprehensive and
includes the following activities:
Sets and ensures compliance with customer-focused system-reliability requirements
Ensures component qualification is consistent with use environment and system

design
Predicts failure rates of Field Replaceable Units (FRUs)
Assesses reliability architecture

Models system reliability
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
8-1
Issue 3 April 2009
Reliability program
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ensures satisfactory system-downtime performance

Reduces hardware failure rates through Environmental Stress Testing (EST)
Tracks field returns

Overview
During the design and development stage, built-in reliability is ensured through the
following activities: reliability predictions, qualification and selection of components,
definition of quality assurance audit standards, and prototyping of critical areas.

Overview
During manufacturing and field deployment, techniques such as environmental stress

testing, production quality audits, field-return tracking, failure-mode analysis, feedback,
and corrective-action further enhance the ongoing reliability improvement efforts.
Failure rates
Overview
This section provides reliability figures of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 orderable items
with non-zero failure rates per Telcordia SR-332 [1], Method I-D. For reliability
figures that pertain to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE, refer to the Alcatel-Lucent
Failure rates are expressed in FITs, where one FIT is one failure in 109 operating
hours. The mean time to failure (MTTF) in years is given by the following expression:
where is the steady-state failure rate per SR-332, Issue 2; Method I-D. The mean
time between failures (MTBF) is defined by the following expression:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
8-2
Failure rates
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
where MTTR is the mean time to repair. Because MTTF >> MTTR, MTBF is very
close to MTTF. Therefore, the two terms MTBF and MTTF are often used
interchangeably.
Refer to Table 8-1, Failure rates and MTBFs for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32
(p. 8-3).
Table 8-1
Acronym
Description
Part No.
Failure rate
(FITs)
MTBF
(yrs)
COSKIT
Main Shelf Kit

(incl. COSHF,
USRPNL, FAN,
TIBNKx2)
8DG59605AA
4525
25
COEKIT
Extension Shelf
Kit (incl.
COSHF,
UPBNK, FAN,
TIBNKx2)
8DG59606AA
3372
34
EC
Equipment
Controller
8DG59241AB
2432
47
PFDC30
DC Power
Filter (30A)
8DG59242AC
1179
97
PFDC50
DC Power
Filter (50A)
8DG59242AB
1179
97
PFDC70
DC Power
Filter (70A)
8DG59242AA
1179
97
SHFID
Shelf ID
3AL79242AA
23
4963
ATTEN-1
1-dB Attenuator
1AB371250006
30
3805
ATTEN-2
2-dB Attenuator
1AB371250002
30
3805
ATTEN-3
3-dB Attenuator
1AB371250007
30
3805
ATTEN-4
4-dB Attenuator
1AB371250001
30
3805
ATTEN-5
5-dB Attenuator
1AB371250008
30
3805
ATTEN-6
6-dB Attenuator
1AB371250003
30
3805
ATTEN-7
7-dB Attenuator
1AB371250009
30
3805
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
8-3
Issue 3 April 2009
Failure rates
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-1

(continued)
Acronym
Description
Part No.
Failure rate
(FITs)
MTBF
(yrs)
ATTEN-8
8-dB Attenuator
1AB371240001
30
3805
ATTEN-9
9-dB Attenuator
1AB371250010
30
3805
ATTEN-10
10-dB
Attenuator
1AB252030001
30
3805
ATTEN-12
12-dB
Attenuator
1AB371250004
30
3805
ATTEN-14
14-dB
Attenuator
1AB371250005
30
3805
COSHF
Central Office
Shelf (shelf +
backplane)
8DG59319AA
1229
93
USRPNL
User Interface
Panel
8DG59240AA
1153
99
FAN
Fan Unit
8DG59243AA
2143
53
ALPHG
Low Power
High Gain
DWDM
Amplifier
8DG59244AA
3559
32
AHPHG
High Power
High Gain
DWDM
Amplifier
8DG59245AA
3659
31
CWR8
8 Channel
Colorless
Wavelength
Router
8DG59246AA
5283
22
SFD5A
Static Filter
DWDM 5
Channel (A
Variant)
8DG59437AA
272
420
SFD5B
Static Filter
DWDM 5
Channel (B
Variant)
8DG59437AB
272
420
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
8-4
Failure rates
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-1

(continued)
Acronym
Description
Part No.
Failure rate
(FITs)
MTBF
(yrs)
SFD5C
Static Filter
DWDM 5
Channel (C
Variant)
8DG59437AC
272
420
SFD5D
Static Filter
DWDM 5
Channel (D
Variant)
8DG59437AD
272
420
SFD5E
Static Filter
DWDM 5
Channel (E
Variant)
8DG59437AE
272
420
SFD5F
Static Filter
DWDM 5
Channel (F
Variant)
8DG59437AF
272
420
SFD5G
Static Filter
DWDM 5
Channel (G
Variant)
8DG59437AG
272
420
SFD5H
Static Filter
DWDM 5
Channel (H
Variant)
8DG59437AH
272
420
SFD44
44 Channel
Optical
Mux/Demux
8DG59248AA
560
204
SFC2A
Static Filter
CWDM 2
Channel (A
Variant)
8DG59440AA
235
486
SFC2B
Static Filter
CWDM 2
Channel (B
Variant)
8DG59440AB
235
486
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
8-5
Issue 3 April 2009
Failure rates
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-1

(continued)
Acronym
Description
Part No.
Failure rate
(FITs)
MTBF
(yrs)
SFC2C
Static Filter
CWDM 2
Channel (C
Variant)
8DG59440AC
235
486
SFC2D
Static Filter
CWDM 2
Channel (D
Variant)
8DG59440AD
235
486
SFC4A
Static Filter
CWDM 4
Channel (A
Variant)
8DG59441AA
260
439
SFC4B
Static Filter
CWDM 4
Channel (B
Variant)
8DG59441AB
260
439
SFC8
Static Filter
CWDM 8
Channel
8DG59442AA
296
386
SVAC
Single Variable
Attenuator Card
8DG59561AA
1830
62
YSMFV
Protection
Y-Cable
Splitter (SMF)
- Vertical
Orientation
1AB215120040
20
5708
YSMFH
Protection
Y-Cable
Splitter (SMF)
- Horizontal
Orientation
1AB215120039
20
5708
YMMF62V
Protection
Y-Cable
Splitter (MMF
62.5/125 m) Vertical
Orientation
1AB215120043
20
5708
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
8-6
Failure rates
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-1

(continued)
Acronym
Description
Part No.
Failure rate
(FITs)
MTBF
(yrs)
YMMF62H
Protection
Y-Cable
Splitter (MMF
62.5/125 m) Horizontal
Orientation
1AB215120044
20
5708
YMMF50V
Protection
Y-Cable
Splitter (MMF
50/125 m) Vertical
Orientation
1AB215120041
20
5708
YMMMF50H
Protection
Y-Cable
Splitter (MMF
50/125m) Horizontal
Orientation
1AB215120042
20
5708
DMSMF010
DCM-SMF 10
km
8DG59423AA
20
5708
DMSMF020
DCM-SMF 20
km
8DG59424AA
20
5708
DMSMF30
DCM-SMF 30
km
8DG59425AA
20
5708
DMSMF40
DCM-SMF 40
km
8DG59426AA
20
5708
DMSMF50
DCM-SMF 50
km
8DG59427AA
20
5708
DMSMF60
DCM-SMF 60
km
8DG59428AA
20
5708
DMSMF70
DCM-SMF 70
km
8DG59429AA
20
5708
DMSMF80
DCM-SMF 80
km
8DG59430AA
20
5708
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
8-7
Issue 3 April 2009
Failure rates
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-1

(continued)
Acronym
Description
Part No.
Failure rate
(FITs)
MTBF
(yrs)
11STAR1
11G Single
Port Tunable
AnyRate (1
client)
8DG59249AA
3301
35
11STGE12
11G Single
Port Tunable
GBE Mux (12
clients)
8DG59339AA
3804
30
11STMM10
11G Single
Port Tunable
Multirate Mux
(10 universal
clients)
8DG59251AA
5078
22
155M SFP
L-1.1/LR-1
SFP L-1.1
-40/+85 (B&W
STM-1/OC-3
DDM 1310nm
(L-1.1/LR-1)
1AB376350002
210
544
622M SFP
S-4.1/IR-1
SFP S-4.1
-40/+85 (B&W
STM-4/OC-12
DDM 1310nm
(S-4.1/IR-1))
1AB376360001
210
544
2G5 SFP
I-16.1/SR-1
SFP I-16.1
-40/+85 (B&W
STM-16/OC-48
DDM 1310nm
(I-16.1/SR-1))
1AB376370001
210
544
2G5 SFP
L-16.1/LR-1
SFP L-16.1
-5/+85 (B&W
STM-16/OC-48
DDM 1310nm
(L-16.1/LR-1))
1AB196370008
210
544
2G5 SFP
L-16.2/LR-2
SFP L-16.2
-5/+85 (B&W;
STM-16/OC-48
DDM 1550nm
(L-16.2/LR-2))
1AB196370009
210
544
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
8-8
Failure rates
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-1

(continued)
Acronym
Description
Part No.
Failure rate
(FITs)
MTBF
(yrs)
2G5 MR SFP
S-16.1/IR-1)
SFP S-16.1
ANY RATE
-40/+85 (B&W
STM-16/OC-48
Multirate (<
2.7G) DDM
1310nm
(S-16.1/IR-1))
1AB196370007
210
544
1G SFP
1000BASE-SX
SFP GBE SX
-40/+85 (B&W
1GbE DDM
850nm
(1000BASESX))
1AB187280033
210
544
1G SFP
1000BASE-LX
SFP GBE LX
-40/+85 (B&W
1GbE DDM
1310nm
(1000BASELX))
1AB376720002
210
544
1G SFP
1000BASE-ZX
SFP GBE LX
-40/+85 (B&W
1GbE DDM
1550nm
(1000BASEZX)
1AB376720003
210
544
2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
80km APD /
1471nm
SFP
CWDM-LH
1471NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate APD
(<2.7G) DDM)
1AB196350026
210
544
2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
80km APD /
1491nm
SFP
CWDM-LH
1491NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate APD
(<2.7G) DDM)
1AB196350027
210
544
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
8-9
Issue 3 April 2009
Failure rates
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-1

(continued)
Acronym
Description
Part No.
Failure rate
(FITs)
MTBF
(yrs)
2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
80km APD /
1511nm
SFP
CWDM-LH
1511NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate APD
(<2.7G) DDM)
1AB196350028
210
544
2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
80km APD/
1531nm
SFP
CWDM-LH
1531NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate APD
(<2.7G) DDM)
1AB196350029
210
544
2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
80km APD /
1551nm
SFP
CWDM-LH
1551NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate
APD(<2.7G)
DDM)
1AB196350030
210
544
2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
80km APD /
1571nm
SFP
CWDM-LH
1571NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate APD
(<2.7G) DDM)
1AB196350031
210
544
2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
80km APD /
1591nm
SFP
CWDM-LH
1591NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate APD
(<2.7G) DDM)
1AB196350032
210
544
2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
80km APD /
1611nm
SFP
CWDM-LH
1611NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate APD
(<2.7G) DDM
CH1610)
1AB196350033
210
544
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
8-10
Failure rates
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-1

(continued)
Acronym
Description
Part No.
Failure rate
(FITs)
MTBF
(yrs)
10G MR XFP
1310nm
XFP
I-64.1/10GBE
BASE-L (B&W
Multirate 11G
(STM64/OC192/OTU-2/
10GBASE-LX)
DDM (1310nm)
1AB214540001
500
228
IR2 MR XFP
XFP
S-64.2B/10GBE
BASE-E (B&W
Multirate
11G(STM64/
OC-192/OTU2/10BASE-EX)
DDM
1AB217280001
500
228
10G GBE XFP

850nm
XFP 10BASE-S
(B&W
10G-BASE-SR
DDM (850nm)
1AB214540002
500
228
10G CWDM
XFP 70km
(1471nm)
XFP CWDM
(80km) 10G
DDM 1471nm
1AB378370001
500
228
10G CWDM
XFP 40km
(1471nm)
XFP CWDM
(40km) 10G
DDM 1471nm
1AB379240001
500
228
10G CWDM
XFP 70km
(1491nm)
XFP CWDM
(80km) 10G
DDM 1491nm
1AB378370002
500
228
10G CWDM
XFP 40km
(1491nm)
XFP CWDM
(40km) 10G
DDM 1491nm
1AB379240002
500
228
10G CWDM
XFP 70km
(1511nm)
XFP CWDM
(80km) 10G
DDM 1511nm
1AB378370003
500
228
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
8-11
Issue 3 April 2009
Failure rates
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-1

(continued)
Acronym
Description
Part No.
Failure rate
(FITs)
MTBF
(yrs)
10G CWDM
XFP 40km
(1511nm)
XFP CWDM
(40km) 10G
DDM 1511nm
1AB379240003
500
228
10G CWDM
XFP 70km
(1531nm)
XFP CWDM
(80km) 10G
DDM 1531nm
1AB378370004
500
228
10G CWDM
XFP 40km
(1531nm)
XFP CWDM
(40km) 10G
DDM 1531nm
1AB379240004
500
228
10G CWDM
XFP 70km
(1551nm)
XFP CWDM
(80km) 10G
DDM 1551nm
1AB378370005
500
228
10G CWDM
XFP 40km
(1551nm)
XFP CWDM
(40km) 10G
DDM 1551nm
1AB379240005
500
228
10G CWDM
XFP 70km
(1571nm)
XFP CWDM
(80km) 10G
DDM 1571nm
1AB378370006
500
228
10G CWDM
XFP 40km
(1571nm)
XFP CWDM
(40km) 10G
DDM 1571nm
1AB379240006
500
228
10G CWDM
XFP 70km
(1591nm)
XFP CWDM
(80km) 10G
DDM 1591nm
1AB378370007
500
228
10G CWDM
XFP 40km
(1591nm)
XFP CWDM
(40km) 10G
DDM 1591nm
1AB379240007
500
228
10G CWDM
XFP 70km
(1611nm)
XFP CWDM
(80km) 10G
DDM 1611nm
1AB378370008
500
228
10G CWDM
XFP 40km
(1611nm)
XFP CWDM
(40km) 10G
DDM 1611nm
1AB379240008
500
228
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
8-12
Failure rates
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-1

(continued)
Acronym
Description
Part No.
Failure rate
(FITs)
MTBF
(yrs)
CWP151DDMB
(OSC 1510
PIN)
CWDM
OC3/STM1
PIN SFP
(1510nm) with
DDM
1AB373110001
210
544
CWA151DDMB
(OSC 1510
APD)
CWDM
OC3/STM1
APD SFP
(1510nm) with
DDM
1AB373120001
210
544
OSC 1510 APD

ULH
OC3/STM1
APD ULHSFP
(1510nm)
1AB373120002
210
544
OPSA
Enhanced
Optical
Protection
Switch Pack
8DG59247AA
1678
68
FC SFP 1G
FC/2G FC
SN-1
OPTO-TRX
SFP FC/2FC
MM W/DDM
(B&W 1G/2G
Fibre Channel
DDM 850nm
(SN1))
1AB187280037
210
544
FC SFP 1G
FC/2G FC
LC-L
OPTO-TRX
SFP FC/2FC
SM W/DDM
(B&W 1G/2G
Fibre Channel
DDM 1319nm
(LC-L))
1AB187280038
210
544
FC SFP 1G
FC/2G FC/4G
FC SN-1
SFP
RC/2FC/4FC
850NM (B&W
1G/2G/4G
Fibre Channel
DDM 850nm
(SN-1))
1AB379640001
210
544
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
8-13
Issue 3 April 2009
Failure rates
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-1

(continued)
Acronym
Description
Part No.
Failure rate
(FITs)
MTBF
(yrs)
FC SFP 1G
FC/2G FC/4G
FC LC-L
SFP
RC/2FC/4FC
1300NM (B&W
1G/2G/4G
Fibre Channel
DDM 1310nm
(LC-L))
1AB379640002
210
544

Overview
The circuit pack sparing levels in Figure 8-1, Recommended Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-32 circuit pack and unit sparing levels: 30-day lead time (p. 8-15), Figure 8-2,
Recommended Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 circuit pack and unit sparing levels:
60-day lead time (p. 8-17), and Figure 8-3, Recommended Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-32 circuit pack and unit sparing levels: 90-day lead time (p. 8-18) were
determined using the methodology in Bell Communications Research SR-TSY-000385
[2].
In the context of sparing calculations, lead time is the time to replenish the sparing
pool with a new or repaired pack. The sparing levels are based on circuit pack
steady-state FIT rates given in Table 8-1, Failure rates and MTBFs for Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-32 (p. 8-3), with a service continuity objective of 99.999 percent.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
8-14
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 8-1 Recommended Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 circuit pack and unit
sparing levels: 30-day lead time
1. Lead time, as used herein, does not pertain to the delivery intervals from the
submission of a purchase order, as that term may be used under any applicable
contract. Furthermore, lead time should not be confused with mean time to repair
(typically, 2 hours in a central office), which is the time elapsed from when a circuit
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
8-15
Issue 3 April 2009
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
pack or unit is known to fail in service to when a spare circuit pack or unit is placed
in service to replace the failed item. It is the customers responsibility to maintain the
recommended sparing levels at all times.
The need to maintain recommended sparing levels implies that a replacement spare
must be ordered immediately upon the detection of a pack failing in service. In
addition, lead times and FIT rates specified here are assumptions for purposes of
maintaining adequate sparing levels only, and they do not change the terms of any
applicable contracts, including ordering terms, lead times, delivery provisions, or any
applicable warranties that may be in effect.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
8-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
8-17
Issue 3 April 2009
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
8-18
References
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
References
[1] Telcordia SR-332, Reliability Prediction Procedure for Electronic Equipment, Issue
2, September 2006.
[2] Bell Communications Research SR-TSY-000385, Reliability Manual, Issue 1, June
1986.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
8-19
Issue 3 April 2009
9
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 specifications, including

equipment dimensions and wavelength frequencies.
Contents
9-2
Overview
9-2
9-4
9-4
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
9-1
Issue 3 April 2009

Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Installation environment
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelf is designed to operate in environmentally

controlled locations or enclosures, such as central offices, commercial buildings, and
controlled environment vaults; 1830 PSS 32 is not intended for outdoor deployments.
The 1830 PSS 32 is compatible with standard equipment frames and overhead
rack/raised floor office practices commonly found in such environments.
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelf is mounted in a standard 19-inch, 23-inch, or
ETSI rack. Three shelves can be mounted in a standard 7-foot rack. Provided adequate
clearance, the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelf can be installed in any environment
that is able to house a standard rack.
The fan trays that are part of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelf common equipment
provide all of the cooling for the shelf. In order for the fan trays to provide adequate
shelf cooling, however, the following conditions must be met:
Number to ensure long term reliability of the shelf, the ambient temperature of the
facility should not exceed 40C. In the event that the ambient temperature does
exceed 40C, the shelf can operate at temperature up to 50C for short periods of
time. These periods are defined in Telcordia GR-63-CORE as lasting no more than
a total of 96 consecutive hours, for not more than 15 days in a year.
The facility must provide adequate ventilation for the shelf and remain free of
obstructions that may affect fan efficiency. Since air is drawn in from the front of
the shelf, the shelves cannot be installed in frames with doors, since the doors may
impede air flow into the shelf.
Dimensions and weight
The dimensions and weight for the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelf are 621.8 mm
(Height) X 438.9 mm (Width) X 289.5 mm (Depth). See Figure 9-1, Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-32 Shelf Dimensions (p. 9-3).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
9-2

Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 9-1 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Shelf Dimensions
The shelf consists of 32 universal card slots and a number of dedicated one-card slots.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
9-3
Issue 3 April 2009

Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 9-1
Management specifications
Interface
Location
Use
Connector Type
E1
User Panel
OSS
RJ45
E2
User Panel
OSS
RJ45
VOIP
User Panel
IP Phone /
Orderwire
RJ45
OAMP
User Panel
OSS
RJ45
CRAFT
User Panel
WebUI
USB
CRAFT
User Panel
WebUI
DB9
RACK LAMP
User Panel
Visual Alarms
DB9
HOUSEKEEPING
User Panel
Miscellaneous
Discretes (8 IN / 4
OUT)
DB25
ALARM
User Panel
Office Alarms
DB15
CIT
EC
WebUI/Local Craft
RJ45
AUX
EC
WebUI/Local Craft
RJ45
ES
EC
Expansion Shelf
RJ45
ES
EC
Expansion Shelf
RJ45
Serial USB
EC
Serial Port for

Administration
USB
Table 9-2
Dimensions
System
PSS-32
PSS-1
Attenuator Drawer
Height
Width
Depth
621.8 mm
438.9 mm
289.5 mm
(24.48 in.)
(17.28 in.)
(11.4 in.)
44.45 mm
438.9 mm
289.5 mm
(1.75 in.)
(17.28 in.)
(11.4 in.)
44.45 mm
482.6 mm
241.3 mm
(1.75 in.)
(19.0 in.)
(9.5 in.)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
9-4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 9-2
Dimensions (continued)
System
Fiber Storage Tray
SFD44
DCM Carrier (EIA)
DCM Carrier
(ANSI/ETSI)
Height
Width
Depth
88.9 mm
482.6 mm
241.3 mm
(3.5 in.)
(19.0 in.)
(9.5 in.)
88.9 mm
436.88 mm
200 mm
(3.5 in.)
(17.2 in.)
(7.87 in.)
88.9 mm
246.38 mm
241.3 mm
(3.5 in.)
(9.7 in.)
(9.5 in.)
88.9 mm
495.3 mm
241.3 mm
(3.5 in.)
(19.5 in.)
(9.5 in.)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
9-5
Issue 3 April 2009
20
7
30
EDFA
High Power
High Gain
DWDM
Amplifier
8DG59245AAAA
AHPHG
13 - 19
17
7
30
10 - 26
EDFA
ALPHG
Low Power
High Gain
DWDM
Amplifier
8DG59244AAAA
OA Type
Acronym
Description
APN
Table 9-3
LD specifications
Gain
Min Input
Power
(dBm)
Max Input
Power
(dBm)
Max Output
Power
(dBm)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
9-6
-10
-38
-39
+5
+4
~150km
155 Mbps
1AB373120002 OSC 1510
APD ULH
1510
-8
-28
-30
+5
+4
~80km
1AB373120001 CWA151DDMB 155 Mbps
(OSC 1510
APD)
1510
0
-18.5
-20.5
+5
Max
(dBm)
EOL
(dBm)
Max
(dBm)
+4
1510
~40km
1AB373110001 CWP151DDMB 155 Mbps
(OSC 1510
PIN)
Description
APN
Table 9-4
OSC specifications
Data Rate Distance
App Wavelength
Code
(nm)
Transmit Power
Receiver
Receiver
Overload
EOL
EOL
(dBm)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
9-7
Issue 3 April 2009
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 9-5
Channel plan (DWDM)

DWDM (C-Band)
ITU Channel
Frequency (MHz)
Wavelength (nm)
17
191700
1563.86
18
191800
1563.05
19
191900
1562.23
20
192000
1561.42
21
192100
1560.61
22
192200
1559.79
23
192300
1558.98
24
192400
1558.17
25
192500
1557.36
26
192600
1556.56
27
192700
1555.75
28
192800
1554.94
29
192900
1554.13
30
193000
1553.33
31
193100
1552.52
32
193200
1551.72
33
193300
1550.92
34
193400
1550.12
35
193500
1549.32
36
193600
1548.52
37
193700
1547.72
38
193800
1546.92
39
193900
1546.12
40
194000
1545.32
41
194100
1544.53
42
194200
1543.73
43
194300
1542.94
44
194400
1542.14
45
194500
1541.35
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
9-8
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 9-5
Channel plan (DWDM) (continued)

DWDM (C-Band)
ITU Channel
Frequency (MHz)
Wavelength (nm)
46
194600
1540.56
47
194700
1539.77
48
194800
1538.98
49
194900
1538.19
50
195000
1537.4
51
195100
1536.61
52
195200
1535.82
53
195300
1535.04
54
195400
1534.25
55
195500
1533.47
56
195600
1532.68
57
195700
1531.9
58
195800
1531.12
59
195900
1530.33
60
196000
1529.55
Table 9-6
Channel plan (CWDM)

CWDM (C-Band)
ITU Channel
Frequency (MHz)
Wavelength (nm)
1471
204100
1470
1491
201300
1490
1511
198700
1510
1531
195300
1530
1551
195500
1550
1571
191100
1570
1591
188700
1590
1611
188300
1610
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
9-9
Issue 3 April 2009
9-10
Description
Static Filter DWDM 5

Channel (A Variant)
Channel (B Variant)
Channel (C Variant)
Channel (D Variant)
Channel (E Variant)
Channel (F Variant)
Channel (G Variant)
Channel (H Variant)
44 Channel Optical
Mux/Demux
Static Filter CWDM 2
Channel (A Variant)
Channel (B Variant)
8DG59437AAAA
8DG59437ABAA
8DG59437ACAA
8DG59437ADAA
8DG59437AEAA
8DG59437AFAA
8DG59437AGAA
8DG59437AHAA
8DG59248AAAA
8DG59440AAAA
8DG59440ABAA
APN
Table 9-7
SFC2B
SFC2A
SFD44
SFD5H
SFD5G
SFD5F
SFD5E
SFD5D
SFD5C
SFD5B
SFD5A
Acronym
CWDM
CWDM
DWDM
DWDM
DWDM
DWDM
DWDM
DWDM
DWDM
DWDM
DWDM
Filter Type
20 nm
20 nm
100GHz
100GHz
100GHz
100GHz
100GHz
100GHz
100GHz
100GHz
100GHz
Spacing
Channel
1.8/1.5dB
1.8/1.5dB
5.7/6.0 dB
See Table 9-11, SFD5 Optical Insertion

Loss (p. 9-15) and Table 9-12, SFC4
Optical Insertion Loss (p. 9-16)







Optical Insertion Loss (thru Mux/Demux)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
Description

Channel (C Variant)
Channel (D Variant)
Channel (A Variant)
Channel (B Variant)
8DG59440ACAA
8DG59440ADAA
8DG59441AAAA
8DG59441ABAA
SFC4B
SFC4A
SFC2D
SFC2C
Acronym
Filter specifications (Part 1 of 2) (continued)
APN
Table 9-7
CWDM
CWDM
CWDM
CWDM
Filter Type
20 nm
20 nm
20 nm
20 nm
Spacing
Channel


1.8/1.5dB
1.8/1.5dB
Optical Insertion Loss (thru Mux/Demux)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
9-11
Issue 3 April 2009
9-12
0.6 dB
0.6 dB
0.6 dB
0.6 dB
0.6 dB
0.6 dB
0.6 dB
0.6 dB
0.5 dB
0.5 dB
0.5 dB
0.5 dB
0.5 dB
8DG59437ABAA
8DG59437ACAA
8DG59437ADAA
8DG59437AEAA
8DG59437AFAA
8DG59437AGAA
8DG59437AHAA
8DG59248AAAA
8DG59440AAAA
8DG59440ABAA
8DG59440ACAA
8DG59440ADAA
Sensitivity
Temperature
Insertion Loss
0.5
dB
0.5
dB
0.5
dB
0.5
dB
0.5
dB
0.5
dB
0.5
dB
0.5
dB
0.5
dB
0.5
dB
0.5
dB
0.5
dB
0.5
dB
Ripple
14 nm
(@0.5dB,
min)
14 nm
(@0.5dB,
min)
14 nm
(@0.5dB,
min)
14 nm
(@0.5dB,
min)
25 GHz
22.5
GHz
22.5
GHz
22.5
GHz
22.5
GHz
22.5
GHz
22.5
GHz
22.5
GHz
22.5
GHz
40dB
40dB
40dB
40dB
23dB
50dB
50dB
50dB
50dB
50dB
50dB
50dB
50dB
(@3dBm,
min)
Adjacent
Channel Loss
Bandwidth
8DG59437AAAA
APN
Table 9-8
40dB
40dB
40dB
40dB
40dB
45dB
45dB
45dB
45dB
45dB
45dB
45dB
45dB
Return Loss
-40 to85 C
-40 to85 C
-40 to85 C
-40 to85 C
-5 to65 C
-5 to 70 C
-5 to 70 C
-5 to 70 C
-5 to 70 C
-5 to 70 C
-5 to 70 C
-5 to 70 C
-5 to 70 C
Temperature
Operating
Storage
-40 to 85 C
-40 to 85 C
-40 to 85 C
-40 to 85 C
-40 to 85 C
-40 to 85 C
-40 to 85 C
-40 to 85 C
-40 to 85 C
-40 to 85 C
-40 to 85 C
-40 to 85 C
-40 to 85 C
Temperature
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
Type
Fiber
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
SSMF
-40 to 85 C
-40 to85 C
40dB
40dB
14 nm
(@0.5dB,
min)
40dB
40dB
0.5 dB
0.5 dB
8DG59441AAAA
8DG59441ABAA
0.5
dB
14 nm
(@0.5dB,
min)
min)
Sensitivity
Temperature
0.5
dB
Temperature
-40 to85 C
-40 to 85 C
SSMF
Type
Operating
(@3dBm,
Ripple
Adjacent
Channel Loss
Bandwidth
Insertion Loss
APN
Table 9-8
Filter specifications (Part 2 of 2) (continued)
Return Loss
Temperature
Storage
Fiber
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
9-13
Issue 3 April 2009
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 9-9
Passband center wavelength
ITU
Channel
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Port Label
SFD5
17
191.7
1563.86
9170
SFD44
18
191.0
1563.05
9180
SFD44
19
191.0
1562.23
9190
20
192.0
1561.42
9200
SFD44
21
192.1
1560.61
9210
SFD44
22
192.2
1559.79
9220
SFD44
23
192.3
1558.98
9230
SFD44
24
192.4
1558.17
9240
25
192.5
1557.36
9250
SFD44
26
192.6
1556.56
9260
SFD44
27
192700
1555.75
9270
SFD44
28
192.8
1554.94
9280
SFD44
29
192.9
1554.13
9290
30
193.0
1553.33
9300
SFD44
31
193.1
1552.52
9310
SFD44
32
193.2
1551.72
9320
SFD44
33
193.3
1550.92
9330
SFD44
34
193.4
1550.12
9340
35
193.5
1549.32
9350
SFD44
36
193.6
1548.52
9360
SFD44
37
193.7
1547.72
9370
SFD44
38
193.8
1546.92
9380
SFD44
39
193.9
1546.12
9390
SFD44
40
194.0
1545.32
9400
SFD44
41
194.1
1544.53
9410
42
194.2
1543.73
9420
SFD44
43
194.3
1542.94
9430
SFD44
44
194.4
1542.14
9440
SFD44
45
194.5
1541.35
9450
SFD44
SFD5A
SFD5B
SFD5C
SFD5D
SFD5E
SFD44
SFD44
SFD44
SFD44
SFD44
SFD44
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
9-14
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 9-9
Passband center wavelength (continued)
ITU
Channel
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Port Label
SFD5
SFD44
46
194.6
1540.56
9460
SFD5F
SFD44
47
194.7
1539.77
9470
SFD44
48
194.8
1538.98
9480
SFD44
49
194.9
1538.19
9490
SFD44
50
195.0
1537.4
9500
SFD44
51
195.1
1536.61
9510
52
195.2
1535.82
9520
SFD44
53
195.3
1535.04
9530
SFD44
54
195.4
1534.25
9540
SFD44
55
195.5
1533.47
9550
SFD44
56
195.6
1532.68
9560
57
195.7
1531.9
9570
SFD44
58
195.8
1531.12
9580
SFD44
59
195.9
1530.33
9590
SFD44
60
196.0
1529.55
9600
SFD44
Table 9-10
SFD5G
SFD5H
Center Wavelength
(nm)
SFC2
SFC4
1471
1471
SFC2A
SFC4A
1491
1491
SFC2B
1511
1511
SFC2C
1531
1531
SFC2D
SFD5 Loss
SFD44
Wavelengths for SFC2 and SFC4
Label
Table 9-11
SFD44
SFC4B

OMD In
OMD Out
Max (dB)
Max (dB)
Ch1
4.2
2.8
Ch2
3.9
3.2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
9-15
Issue 3 April 2009
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 9-11
SFD5 Loss
(continued)
OMD In
OMD Out
Max (dB)
Max (dB)
Ch3
3.5
3.5
Ch4
3.2
3.9
Ch5
2.8
4.2
Exp
1.4
MON
14.1
14.1
Table 9-12
SFC4 Optical Insertion Loss
SFC4 Loss
Value
Unit
Insertion Loss OMD-In Ch 4/8

_OUT
1.4
dB

_OUT
1.7
dB

_OUT
dB

_OUT
2.3
dB
Insertion Loss OMD-In

Exp_OUT
2.2
dB
Insertion Loss Exp-In

OMD-OUT
1.7
dB
Insertion Loss Ch 4/8_In

OMD-OUT
1.8
dB

OMD-OUT
1.5
dB

OMD-OUT
1.2
dB

OMD-OUT
0.9
dB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
9-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 9-13
CWR8 specifications
Description
Maximum Insertion Loss

(dB)
SIG IN to THRU OUT
8.8
SIG IN to OMD OUT
10.0
SIG IN to CLS(1-8) OUT
8.3
THRU IN to SIG OUT
2.1
TEST IN to OMD OUT
2.5
TEST IN to THRU OUT
16.8
TEST IN to CLS(1-8) OUT
16.3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
9-17
Issue 3 April 2009
1529 to
1569
1529 to
1569
1529 to
1569
-24
5
2.5
MSA
11.1G
11G Dual
Port
Pluggable
GBE Mux
(12
clients)
11G Single
Port
Tunable
Multirate
Mux (10
universal
clients)
8DG593940AA
8DG59251AA
11STMM10
Refer to XFP specifications.

XFP
11.1G
2.5
MSA
11.1G
11G Single
Port
Tunable
GBE
NMux (12
clients)
8DG59339AA
11STGE12
MSA
11.1G
11G Single
Port
Tunable
AnyRate
(1 client)
8DG59249AA
11DPGE12
5
2.5
Min
11STAR1
1529.55 to
1568.36
-24
1529.55 to
1568.36
1529.55 to
1568.36
Max
(nm)
-24
Min
Max
(nm)
Range
Range
Output
Wavelength
(dBm)
Laser Type
Data Rate
Line Side
Acronym
Description
APN
Table 9-14
Tunable OT line-side specifications
Output Power Range
Output
Input Power Range (dBm)

Wavelength
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
9-18
Description
SFP S-1.1
-40/+85 (B&W)
STM-1/OC-3
DDM 1310nm
(S-1.1/IR-1))
SFP L-1.1
-40/+85 (B&W
STM-1/OC-3
DDM 1310nm
(L-1.1/LR-1)
SFP L-1.2
-40/+85 (B&W
STM-1/OC-3
DDM 1550nm
(L-1.2/LR-2))
SFP S-4.1
-40/+85 (B&W
STM-4/OC-12
DDM 1310nm
(S-4.1/IR-1))
SFP L-4.1
-40/+85 (B&W
STM-4/OC-12
DDM 1310nm
(L-4.1/LR-1))
SFP L-4.2
-40/+85 (B&W
STM-4/OC-12
DDM 1550nm
(L-4.2/LR-2))
1AB376350001
1AB376350002
1AB376350003
1AB376360001
1AB376360002
1AB376360003
L-4.2/LR-2
L-4.1/LR-1
S-4.1/IR-1
L-1.2/LR-2
L-1.1/LR-1
S-1.1/IR-1
App Code
APN
Table 9-15
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
Fiber Type
-2
-2
-14
-4
-4
-14
(dBm)
+1
+1
-9
-1
-1
-9
(dBm)
Max
BOL
Min BOL
-3
-3
-15
-5
-5
-15
(dBm)
Min EOL
Launch Power
-8
-8
(dBm)
Max EOL
-30
-30
-30
-36
-36
-30
(dBm)
Min
-28
-28
-28
-34
-34
-28
(dBm)
EOL
Receiver Sensitivity
Receiver
-8
-8
-8
-10
-10
-7
Overload
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
9-19
Issue 3 April 2009
9-20
SFP I-16.1
-40/+85 (B&W
STM-16/OC-48
DDM 1310nm
(I-16.1/SR-1))
SFP L-16.1
-5/+85 (B&W
STM-16/OC-48
DDM 1310nm
(L-16.1/LR-1))
SFP L-16.2
-5/+85 (B&W
STM-16/OC-48
DDM 1550nm
(L-16.2/LR-2))
SFP GBE SX 1000BASE-SX

-40/+85 (B&W
1GbE DDM
850nm
(1000BASESX))
SFP GBE LX 1000BASE-LX

-40/+85 (B&W
1GbE DDM
1310nm
(1000BASELX))
1AB376370001
1AB196370008
1AB196370009
1AB187280033
1AB376720002
L-16.2/LR-2
L-16.1/LR-1
I-16.1/SR-1
S-16.1/IR-1
SFP S-16.1
-5/+85 (B&W
STM-16/OC-48
DDM 1310nm
(S-16.1/IR-1))
1AB376370002
App Code
SSMF
MMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
Fiber Type
(continued)
Description
APN
Table 9-15
-8
-8.5
-1
-1
-9
-4
BOL
(dBm)
-4
-1
+2
+2
-4
-1
(dBm)
Max
Min BOL
-9
-9.5
-2
-2
-10
-5
(dBm)
Min EOL
Launch Power
-3
+3
+3
-3
(dBm)
Max EOL
-26
-19
-29
-29
-20
-20
(dBm)
Min
-24
-17
-27
-27
-18
-18
(dBm)
EOL
Receiver
-9
-9
-3
Overload
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
App Code
OPTO-TRX
SFP FC/2FC
MM W/ DDM
(B&W 1G/2G
Fibre Channel
DDM 850nm
(SN-I))
OPTO-TRX
SFP FC/2FC
SM W/ DDM
(B&W 1G/2G
Fibre Channel
DDM 1310nm
(LC-L)
SFP
FC/2FC/4FC
850NM (B&W
1G/2G/4G
Fibre Channel
DDM 850nm
(SN-I))
SFP
FC/2FC/4FC
1300NM (B&W
1G/2G/4G
Fibre Channel
DDM 1310nm
(LC-L))
1AB187280038
1AB379640001
1AB379640002
1G FC / 2G
FC / 4G FC
LC-L
1G FC / 2G
FC / 4G FC
SN-I
1G FC / 2G
FC LC-L
1G FC / 2G
FC SN-I
SSMF
MMF
SSMF
MMF
SSMF
Fiber Type
(continued)
SFP GBE LX 1000BASE-ZX

-40/+85 (B&W
1GbE DDM
1550nm
(1000BASE-ZX)
Description
1AB187280037
1AB376720003
APN
Table 9-15
-7.4
-8
-10.7
-9
+1
BOL
(dBm)
-2
-1
-4
-1
+4
(dBm)
Max
Min BOL
-8.4
-9
-11.7
-10
(dBm)
Min EOL
Launch Power
-1
-3
+5
(dBm)
Max EOL
-19.1
-16.1
-22
-17
-26
(dBm)
Min
-17.1
-14.1
-20
-15
-24
(dBm)
EOL
Receiver
-1
-3
Overload
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
9-21
Issue 3 April 2009
9-22
Description
SFP
CWDM-SH
1471NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate PIN
(<2.7G) DDM )
SFP
CWDM-SH
1491NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate PIN
(<2.7G) DDM )
SFP
CWDM-SH
1511NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate PIN
(<2.7G) DDM)
SFP
CWDM-SH
1531NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate PIN
(<2.7G) DDM)
SFP
CWDM-SH
1551NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate
PIN(<2.7G)
DDM)
1AB377160001
1AB377160002
1AB377160003
1AB377160004
1AB377160005
S-C8S1-1D2
S-C8S1-1D2
S-C8S1-1D2
S-C8S1-1D2
S-C8S1-1D2
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
Fiber Type
(continued)
App Code
APN
Table 9-15
+1
+1
+1
+1
+1
BOL
(dBm)
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
(dBm)
Max
Min BOL
(dBm)
Min EOL
Launch Power
+5
+5
+5
+5
+5
(dBm)
Max EOL
-20.5
-20.5
-20.5
-20.5
-20.5
(dBm)
Min
-18.5
-18.5
-18.5
-18.5
-18.5
(dBm)
EOL
Receiver
Overload
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
Description
SFP
CWDM-SH
1571NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate PIN
(<2.7G) DDM)
SFP
CWDM-SH
1591NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate PIN
(<2.7G) DDM)
SFP
CWDM-SH
1611NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate PIN
(<2.7G) DDM)
SFP
CWDM-LH
1471NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate APD
(<2.7G) DDM)
SFP
CWDM-LH
1491NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate APD
(<2.7G) DDM)
1AB377160006
1AB377160007
1AB377160008
1AB196350026
1AB196350027
S-C8L1-1D2
S-C8L1-1D2
S-C8S1-1D2
S-C8S1-1D2
S-C8S1-1D2
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
Fiber Type
(continued)
App Code
APN
Table 9-15
+1
+1
+1
+1
+1
BOL
(dBm)
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
(dBm)
Max
Min BOL
(dBm)
Min EOL
Launch Power
+5
+5
+5
+5
+5
(dBm)
Max EOL
-20.5
-20.5
-20.5
-20.5
-20.5
(dBm)
Min
-18.5
-18.5
-18.5
-18.5
-18.5
(dBm)
EOL
Receiver
Overload
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
9-23
Issue 3 April 2009
-8
-28
-30
+5
0
+4
+1
SSMF
SFP
CWDM-LH
1551NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate
APD(<2.7G)
DDM)SFP
CWDM-LH
1571NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate APD
(<2.7G) DDM)
SFP
CWDM-LH
1571NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate APD
(<2.7G) DDM)
1AB196350030
1AB196350031
S-C8L1-1D2
-8
-28
-30
+5
0
+4
+1
SSMF
SFP
CWDM-LH
1531NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate APD
(<2.7G) DDM)
1AB196350029
S-C8L1-1D2
0
-18.5
-20.5
+5
0
+4
+1
SSMF
-20.5
+5
0
+4
+1
SSMF
SFP
CWDM-LH
1511NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate APD
(<2.7G) DDM)
S-C8S1-1D2
0
-18.5
(dBm)
(dBm)
(dBm)
(dBm)
BOL
(dBm)
(dBm)
EOL
Min EOL
Max
Min BOL
1AB196350028
S-C8L1-1D2
Fiber Type
App Code
Description
APN
Table 9-15
(continued)
Launch Power
Max EOL
Min
Receiver
Overload
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
9-24
Description
SFP
CWDM-LH
1591NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate APD
(<2.7G) DDM)
SFP
CWDM-LH
1611NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate APD
(<2.7G) DDM
CH1610)
SFP DWDM
CH 60 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (196.0))
SFP DWDM
CH 59 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (195.9))
SFP DWDM
CH 58 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (195.8))
SFP DWDM
CH 57 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (195.7))
SFP DWDM
CH 56 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (195.6))
1AB196350032
1AB196350033
1AB377220003
1AB377220004
1AB377220005
1AB377220006
1AB377220007
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
S-C8L1-1D2
S-C8L1-1D2
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
Fiber Type
(continued)
App Code
APN
Table 9-15
+1
+1
+1
+1
+1
+1
+1
BOL
(dBm)
+3
+3
+3
+3
+3
+4
+4
(dBm)
Max
Min BOL
(dBm)
Min EOL
Launch Power
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+5
+5
(dBm)
Max EOL
-34 with
FEC
-34 with
FEC
-34 with
FEC
-34 with
FEC
-34 with
FEC
-30
-30
(dBm)
Min
-32 with
FEC
-32 with
FEC
-32 with
FEC
-32 with
FEC
-32 with
FEC
-28
-28
(dBm)
EOL
Receiver
-8
-8
-8
-8
-8
-8
-8
Overload
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
9-25
Issue 3 April 2009
9-26
Description
SFP DWDM
CH 55 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (195.5))
SFP DWDM
CH 54 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (195.4))
SFP DWDM
CH 53 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (195.3))
SFP DWDM
CH 52 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (195.2))
SFP DWDM
CH 51 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(195.1))SFP
DWDM CH 50
(DWDM (2400
ps/nm) DDM
(195.0))
SFP DWDM
CH 50 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (195.0))
SFP DWDM
CH 49 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (194.9))
1AB377220008
1AB377220009
1AB377220010
1AB377220011
1AB377220012
1AB377220013
1AB377220014
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
Fiber Type
(continued)
App Code
APN
Table 9-15
+1
+1
+1
+1
+1
+1
+1
BOL
(dBm)
+3
+3
+3
+3
+3
+3
+3
(dBm)
Max
Min BOL
(dBm)
Min EOL
Launch Power
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
(dBm)
Max EOL
-34 with
FEC
-34 with
FEC
-34 with
FEC
-34 with
FEC
-34 with
FEC
-34 with
FEC
-34 with
FEC
(dBm)
Min
-32 with
FEC
-32 with
FEC
-32 with
FEC
-32 with
FEC
-32 with
FEC
-32 with
FEC
-32 with
FEC
(dBm)
EOL
Receiver
-8
-8
-8
-8
-8
-8
-8
Overload
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
Description
SFP DWDM
CH 48 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (194.8))
SFP DWDM
CH 47 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (194.7))
SFP DWDM
CH 46 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (194.6))
SFP DWDM
CH 45 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (194.5))
SFP DWDM
CH 44 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (194.4))
SFP DWDM
CH 43 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (194.3))
SFP DWDM
CH 42 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (194.2))
SFP DWDM
CH 41(DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (194.1))
1AB377220015
1AB377220016
1AB377220017
1AB377220018
1AB377220019
1AB377220020
1AB377220021
1AB377220022
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
Fiber Type
(continued)
App Code
APN
Table 9-15
+1
+1
+1
+1
+1
+1
+1
+1
BOL
(dBm)
+3
+3
+3
+3
+3
+3
+3
+3
(dBm)
Max
Min BOL
(dBm)
Min EOL
Launch Power
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
(dBm)
Max EOL
-34 with
FEC
-34 with
FEC
-34 with
FEC
-34 with
FEC
-34 with
FEC
-34 with
FEC
-34 with
FEC
-34 with
FEC
(dBm)
Min
-32 with
FEC
-32 with
FEC
-32 with
FEC
-32 with
FEC
-32 with
FEC
-32 with
FEC
-32 with
FEC
-32 with
FEC
(dBm)
EOL
Receiver
-8
-8
-8
-8
-8
-8
-8
-8
Overload
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
9-27
Issue 3 April 2009
9-28
Description
SFP DWDM
CH 40 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (194.0))
SFP DWDM
CH 39 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (193.9))
SFP DWDM
CH 38 (
DWDM (2400
ps/nm) DDM
(193.8))
SFP DWDM
CH 37 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (193.7))
SFP DWDM
CH 36 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (193.6))
SFP DWDM
CH 35 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (193.5))
SFP DWDM
CH 34 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (193.4))
SFP DWDM
CH 33 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (193.3))
1AB377220023
1AB377220024
1AB377220025
1AB377220026
1AB377220027
1AB377220028
1AB377220029
1AB377220030
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
Fiber Type
(continued)
App Code
APN
Table 9-15
+1
+1
+1
+1
+1
+1
+1
+1
BOL
(dBm)
+3
+3
+3
+3
+3
+3
+3
+3
(dBm)
Max
Min BOL
(dBm)
Min EOL
Launch Power
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
(dBm)
Max EOL
-34 with
FEC
-34 with
FEC
-34 with
FEC
-34 with
FEC
-34 with
FEC
-34 with
FEC
-34 with
FEC
-34 with
FEC
(dBm)
Min
-32 with
FEC
-32 with
FEC
-32 with
FEC
-32 with
FEC
-32 with
FEC
-32 with
FEC
-32 with
FEC
-32 with
FEC
(dBm)
EOL
Receiver
-8
-8
-8
-8
-8
-8
-8
-8
Overload
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
Description
SFP DWDM
CH 32 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (193.2))
SFP DWDM
CH 31 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (193.1))
SFP DWDM
CH 30 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (193.0))
SFP DWDM
CH 29 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (192.9))
SFP DWDM
CH 28 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (192.8))
SFP DWDM
CH 27 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (192.7))
SFP DWDM
CH 26 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (192.6))
SFP DWDM
CH 25 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (192.5))
1AB377220031
1AB377220032
1AB377220033
1AB377220034
1AB377220035
1AB377220036
1AB377220037
1AB377220038
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
Fiber Type
(continued)
App Code
APN
Table 9-15
+1
+1
+1
+1
+1
+1
+1
+1
BOL
(dBm)
+3
+3
+3
+3
+3
+3
+3
+3
(dBm)
Max
Min BOL
(dBm)
Min EOL
Launch Power
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
(dBm)
Max EOL
-34 with
FEC
-34 with
FEC
-34 with
FEC
-34 with
FEC
-34 with
FEC
-34 with
FEC
-34 with
FEC
-34 with
FEC
(dBm)
Min
-32 with
FEC
-32 with
FEC
-32 with
FEC
-32 with
FEC
-32 with
FEC
-32 with
FEC
-32 with
FEC
-32 with
FEC
(dBm)
EOL
Receiver
-8
-8
-8
-8
-8
-8
-8
-8
Overload
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
9-29
Issue 3 April 2009
9-30
Description
SFP DWDM
CH 24 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (192.4))
SFP DWDM
CH 23 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (192.3))
SFP DWDM
CH 22 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (192.2))
SFP DWDM
CH 21 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (192.1)
SFP DWDM
CH 20 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (192.1)
SFP DWDM
CH 19 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (191.9)
SFP DWDM
CH 18 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (191.8)
SFP DWDM
CH 17 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM (191.7))
1AB377220039
1AB377220040
1AB377220041
1AB377220042
1AB377220043
1AB377220044
1AB377220045
1AB377220046
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
Fiber Type
(continued)
App Code
APN
Table 9-15
+1
+1
+1
+1
+1
+1
+1
+1
BOL
(dBm)
+3
+3
+3
+3
+3
+3
+3
+3
(dBm)
Max
Min BOL
(dBm)
Min EOL
Launch Power
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
(dBm)
Max EOL
-34 with
FEC
-34 with
FEC
-34 with
FEC
-34 with
FEC
-34 with
FEC
-34 with
FEC
-34 with
FEC
-34 with
FEC
(dBm)
Min
-32 with
FEC
-32 with
FEC
-32 with
FEC
-32 with
FEC
-32 with
FEC
-32 with
FEC
-32 with
FEC
-32 with
FEC
(dBm)
EOL
Receiver
-8
-8
-8
-8
-8
-8
-8
-8
Overload
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
XFP
I-64.1/10GBE
BASE-L (B&W
Multirate 11G
(STM64/OC192/OTU2/10GBASE-LX)
DDM
XFP
S-64.2B/10GBE
BASE-E
(B&W)
Multirate
1AB214540001
1AB217280001
1AB379240003
1AB379240002
XFP CWDM
1AB379240001
DDM 1511 nm
(40 km) 10G
XFP CWDM
DDM 1491 nm
(40 km) 10G
XFP CWDM
DDM 1471 nm
(40 km) 10G
XFP 10BASE-S
(B&W)
10G-BASE-SR
DDM (850nm)
1AB214540002
/10BASE-EX)
DDM
/OC-192/OTU-2
11G(STM64
Description
N/A
N/A
N/A
10GBase-SR
S64.2B
(IR-2)
I-64.1
(SR-1)
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
MMF
SSMF
SSMF
Fiber Type
(continued)
App Code
APN
Table 9-15
+2
+2
+2
-6.3
-4
BOL
(dBm)
+4
+4
+4
-2
+1.5
-2
(dBm)
Max
Min BOL
+1
+1
+1
-7.2
-1
-6
(dBm)
Min EOL
Launch Power
+5
+5
+5
-1
+2
-1
(dBm)
Max EOL
-17 or
-20
-17 or
-20
-17 or
-20
-12.1
-16
-13
(dBm)
Min
-15 or
-18
-15 or
-18
-15 or
-18
-11
-14
-11
(dBm)
EOL
Receiver
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
0.5
Overload
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
9-31
Issue 3 April 2009
9-32
XFP CWDM
(70km) 10G
DDM 1471nm
XFP CWDM
(70km) 10G
DDM 1491nm
XFP CWDM
(70km) 10G
DDM 1511nm
XFP CWDM
(70km) 10G
DDM 1531nm
1AB378370002
1AB378370003
1AB378370004
DDM 1611 nm
(40 km) 10G
XFP CWDM
DDM 1591 nm
(40 km) 10G
XFP CWDM
DDM 1571 nm
(40 km) 10G
XFP CWDM
DDM 1551 nm
(40 km) 10G
XFP CWDM
DDM 1531 nm
1AB378370001
1AB379240008
1AB379240007
1AB379240006
1AB379240005
XFP CWDM
1AB379240004
(40 km) 10G
Description
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
SSMF
Fiber Type
(continued)
App Code
APN
Table 9-15
+2
+2
+2
+2
+2
+2
+2
+2
+2
BOL
(dBm)
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
(dBm)
Max
Min BOL
+1
+1
+1
+1
+1
+1
+1
+1
+1
(dBm)
Min EOL
Launch Power
+5
+5
+5
+5
+5
+5
+5
+5
+5
(dBm)
Max EOL
-26
-26
-26
-26
-17 or
-2019
-17 or
-20
-17 or
-20
-17 or
-20
-17 or
-20
(dBm)
Min
-24
-24
-24
-24
-15 or
-18
-15 or
-18
-15 or
-18
-15 or
-18
-15 or
-18
(dBm)
EOL
Receiver
-8
-8
-8
-8
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
Overload
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
-8
-24
-26
+5
+1
+4
+2
SSMF
XFP CWDM
(70km) 10G
DDM 1591nm
XFP CWDM
(70km) 10G
DDM 1611nm
1AB378370007
1AB378370008
N/A
-8
-24
-26
+5
+1
+4
+2
SSMF
XFP CWDM
(70km) 10G
DDM 1571nm
1AB378370006
N/A
-8
-24
-26
+5
+1
+4
+2
SSMF
-26
+5
+1
+4
+2
SSMF
XFP CWDM
(70km) 10G
DDM 1551nm
N/A
-8
-24
(dBm)
(dBm)
(dBm)
(dBm)
BOL
(dBm)
(dBm)
EOL
Min EOL
Max
Min BOL
1AB378370005
N/A
Fiber Type
App Code
Description
APN
Table 9-15
(continued)
Launch Power
Max EOL
Min
Receiver
Overload
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
9-33
Issue 3 April 2009
1
25
0.3
0.3
(dB)
(dB)
2.5
-0 to 12
dBm
-9.5 to 10
dBm
15251565
Single
Variable
Attenuator
Card
Path
Path
8DG59561AA
SVAC
Response
(ms)
(dB)
Attenuation
Setting
Accuracy
Accuracy
Detection
Egress
Ingress
Overhead
Optical Power
Input Range
Wavelength
Acronym
Description
APN
Alien wavelength client specifications

Table 9-16
(dB)
VOA Range
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
9-34
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
9-35
Issue 3 April 2009
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
9-36
Appendix A: Ordering
Overview
Purpose
The purpose of this appendix is to provide the necessary ordering information (part
numbers, etc.) for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE.
Contents
Software
A-3
A-3
1354RM-PhM
A-4
A-6
A-7
A-7
A-8
1830 PSS-32 filters
A-8
A-9
A-10
A-11
A-11
1832 PSS-32 cables
A-12
A-15
A-15
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 and 1830 PSS-1 GBE pluggable optics
A-18
SFP
A-18
XFP
A-24
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
A-1
Issue 3 April 2009
Ordering
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-27
Edge device
A-27
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
A-2
Ordering
Software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software
Table A-1, 1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-1 GBE NE CD-ROMs and License Point Fees
(p. A-3) lists the ordering information for the 1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-1 GBE network
element (NE) software CD-ROMs.
Table A-1
1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-1 GBE NE CD-ROMs and License Point Fees
Acronym
Description Part No.
CLEI
code
1830
PSS-32
1830
PSS-1
GBE
DCP1830PSS
R1 DOC
CDROM
1830PSS
R1.0
Documentation
CD-ROM
8DG59475AAAA
SWP-1830
PSS-32
R1.0.5
1830
PSS-32
R1.0.5
CD-ROM
8DG59835AAAA
SWP-1830
PSS-32
R1.1.0
1830
PSS-32
R1.1.0
CD-ROM
8DG59924AAAA
SWP-1830
1830 PSS-1
PSSGBE R1.0.5
1GBER1.0.5 CD-ROM
8DG59838AAAA
SWP-1830
PSS-1GBE
R1.1.0
1830 PSS-1
GBE R1.1.0
CD-ROM
8DG59926AAAA
SWLWavelength
Tracker
1830PSS32
License Fee
1830
PSS-32
R1.0
Software
License Fee
(incl.
Wavelength
Tracker)
8DG59720AAAA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
A-3
Issue 3 April 2009
Ordering
Software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-1
1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-1 GBE NE CD-ROMs and License Point

Fees (continued)
Acronym
Description Part No.
CLEI
code
1830
PSS-32
1830
PSS-1
GBE
SWLPhotonics
VERS A
WDM LP
WDM
Blade
License
Point Fee
8DG59723AAAA
SWLPhotonics
VERS A
TDM LP
TDM Blade
License
Point Fee
8DG59726AAAA
SWLPhotonics
VERS A
ETH LP
Ethernet
Blade
License
Point Fee
8DG59727AAAA
1354RM-PhM
Table A-2, 1354RM-PhM CD-ROM and License Point Fees (p. A-4) lists the
ordering information for the 1354RM-PhM software CD-ROM.
Table A-2
Acronym
Description
Part No.
CLEI
code
1830
PSS-32
1830
PSS-1
GBE
1354RMPhM
R6.0.5 SW
CD ROM
1354RM-PhM
R6.0.5
CDROM
8DG59855AAAA
1354RMPhM
R6.1.0 SW
CD ROM
1354RM-PhM
R6.1.0
CDROM
8DG59928AAAA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
A-4
Ordering
Software
1354RM-PhM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-2
(continued)
Acronym
Description
Part No.
CLEI
code
1830
PSS-32
1830
PSS-1
GBE
1354RMPhM R6.0
Basic
Management
License
License to use
Release 6.0
1354RM-PhM
NMS. Includes
license for one
server, one
client, and ten
shelves.
8DG59743AAAA
1354RMPhM R6.0
Expansion
License
License to use
Release 6.0
1354RM-PhM
for ten
additional
shelves.
8DG59744AAAA
1354RMPhM R6.0
Shelf
License
License to use
Release 6.0
1354RM-PhM
for one
additional
shelf.
8DG59745AAAA
1354RMPhM R6.0
Client
License
License to use
Release 6.0
1354RM-PhM
client.
8DG59746AAAA
1354RMPhM R6.0
Upgrade
Upgrade
license to use
Release 6.0
1354RM-PhM
software.
Equivalent to
Basic
Management
License for
use when a
previous
release has
been
purchased.
8DG59747AAAA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
A-5
Issue 3 April 2009
Ordering
Software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table A-3, EPT CD-ROM (p. A-6) lists the ordering information for the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Engineering and Planning Tool (EPT) software CD-ROM.
Table A-3
EPT CD-ROM
Acronym
Description
Part No.
CLEI
code
1830
PSS-32
1830
PSS-1
GBE
SWP-1830
EPT
Basic1.0.1
(CD-ROM)
KIT-Basic
EPT
Software
Package
R1.0.1
8DG59908AAAA
SWP-1830
EPT
Basic1.1.0
(CD-ROM)
KIT-Basic
EPT
Software
Package
R1.1.0
8DG59994AAAA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
A-6
Ordering

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table A-4, 1830 PSS-32 Common equipment (p. A-7) lists the ordering information
for 1830 PSS-32 common equipment.
Table A-4
1830 PSS-32 Common equipment
Acronym
Description
Part No.
CLEI code
COSKIT
Main shelf (includes

COSHF, USRPNL,
FAN, TIBNKx2)
8DG59605AA
COEKIT
Extension shelf
(includes COSHF,
UPBNK, FAN,
TIBNKx2
8DG59606AA
FST
Fiber storage tray kit
1AD151930001
DCMSHF19
DCM shelf (19-inch

EIA)
8DG59417AA
DCMSHF23
DCM shelf
(ETSI/ANSI)
8DG59417AB
FLEX19
Flex shelf (19-inch

EIA)
8DG59602AA
FLEX23
Flex shelf (23-inch

ANSI WECO)
8DG59602AB
FLEXETSI
Flex shelf (ETSI rack)
8DG59602AC
EC
Equipment controller
8DG59241AB
WOCUAL8UAA
PFDC30
DC power filter (30A)
8DG59242AC
WOPUABAMAB
PFDC50
8DG59242AB
WOPUABBMAB
PFDC70
8DG59242AA
WOPUABCMAB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
A-7
Issue 3 April 2009
Ordering

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table A-5, 1830 PSS-32 amplifiers (p. A-8) lists the ordering information for 1830
PSS-32 amplifiers.
Table A-5
Acronym
Description
Part No.
CLEI code
ALPHG
Low-power,
high-gain DWDM
amplifier
8DG59244AA
WOGUAHEUAB
AHPGH
High-power,
high-gain DWDM
amplifier
8DG59245AA
WOGUAHFUAB
1830 PSS-32 filters

Table A-6, 1830 PSS-32 Filters (p. A-8) lists the ordering information for 1830
PSS-32 filters.
Table A-6
1830 PSS-32 Filters
Acronym
Description
Part No.
CLEI code
CWR8
8-channel colorless
wavelength router
8DG59246AA
WOTRA2GTAA
SFD5A
Static filter DWDM

5-channel (A variant)
8DG59437AA
WOFFAAXBAA
SFD5B
Static filter DWDM

5-channel (B variant)
8DG59437AB
WOFFAAYBAA
SFD5C
Static filter DWDM

5-channel (C variant)
8DG59437AC
WOFFAAZBAA
SFD5D
Static filter DWDM

5-channel (D variant)
8DG59437AD
WOFFAA0BAA
SFD5E
Static filter DWDM

5-channel (E variant)
8DG59437AE
WOFFAA1BAA
SFD5F
Static filter DWDM

5-channel (F variant)
8DG59437AF
WOFFAA2BAA
SFD5G
Static filter DWDM

5-channel (G variant)
8DG59437AG
WOFFAA3BAA
SFD5H
Static filter DWDM

5-channel (H variant)
8DG59437AH
WOFFAA4BAA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
A-8
Ordering

1830 PSS-32 filters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-6
1830 PSS-32 Filters
(continued)
Acronym
Description
Part No.
CLEI code
SFD44
44-channel optical
mux/demux
8DG59248AA
WOM2H00DRA
SFC2A
Static filter CWDM

8DG59440AA
WOOMAEASAA
SFC2B
Static filter CWDM

8DG49440AB
WOOMAEBSAA
SFC2C
Static filter CWDM

2-channel (C variant)
8DG49440AC
WOOMAECSAA
SFC2D
Static filter CWDM

2-channel (D variant)
8DG49440AD
WOOMAEDSAA
SFC4A
Static filter CWDM

8DG59441AA
WOTRA19TAA
SFC4B
Static filter CWDM

8DG59441AB
WOTRA2ATAA
SFC8
Static filter CWDM

8-channel
8DG59442AA
WOOMAEESAA
SVAC
Single variable
attenuator card
8DG59561AA
WOCUAHEUAA

Table A-7, 1830 PSS-32 Protection (p. A-9) lists the ordering information for the
1830 PSS-32 protection pack and Y-cable equipment.
Table A-7
Acronym
Description
Part No.
CLEI code
OPSA
Enhanced optical
protection switch
pack
8DG59247AA
WOCUAHDUAA
YSMFV
Protection Y-cable
splitter (SMF) vertical orientation
1AB215120040
YSMFH
Protection Y-cable
splitter (SMF) horizontal
orientation
1AB215120039
Note: R1.1 feature
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
A-9
Issue 3 April 2009
Ordering

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-7
(continued)
Acronym
Description
Part No.
CLEI code
YMMF62V
Protection Y-cable
splitter (MMF
62.5/125 m) vertical orientation
1AB215120043
YMMF62H
Protection Y-cable
splitter (MMF
62.5/125 m) horizontal
orientation
1AB215120044
YMMF50V
Protection Y-cable
splitter (MMF
50/125 m) vertical orientation
1AB215120041
YMMF50H
Protection Y-cable
splitter (MMF
50/125 m) horizontal
orientation
1AB215120042

Table A-8, 1830 PSS-32 DCMs (p. A-10) lists the ordering information for the 1830
PSS-32 dispersion compensation modules (DCMs).
Table A-8
1830 PSS-32 DCMs
Acronym
Description
Part No.
CLEI code
DMSMF010
DCM-SMF 10 km
8DG59423AA
WOGUAHGUAA
DMSMF020
DCM-SMF 20 km
8DG59424AA
WOGUAHHUAA
DMSMF030
DCM-SMF 30 km
8DG59425AA
WOGUAHJUAA
DMSMF040
DCM-SMF 40 km
8DG59426AA
WOGUAHKUAA
DMSMF050
DCM-SMF 50 km
8DG59427AA
WOGUAHLUAA
DMSMF060
DCM-SMF 60 km
8DG59428AA
WOGUAHMUAA
DMSMF070
DCM-SMF 70 km
8DG59429AA
WOGUAHNUAA
DMSMF080
DCM-SMF 80 km
8DG59430AA
WOGUAHPUAA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
A-10
Ordering

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table A-9, 1830 PSS-32 optical transponders (p. A-11) lists the ordering information
for the 1830 PSS-32 optical transponders (OTs).
Table A-9
Acronym
Description
Part No.
CLEI code
11STAR1
11G Single Port

Tunable AnyRate (1
client)
8DG59249AA
WOWUAR1TAA
11STGE12
11G Single Port

Tunable GBE Mux
(12 client)
8DG59339AA
WOOMAFGSAB
11STMM10
11G Single Port

Tunable Multirate
Mux (10 universal
clients)
8DG59251AA
WOOMAFHSAB

Table A-10, 1830 PSS-32 equipment racks (p. A-11) lists the ordering information
for 1830 PSS-32 equipment racks.
Table A-10
Acronym
Description
Part No.
CLEI code
RACK23
23-inch rack
support
1AD139370001
RACKETSI
ETSI 300
600-mm rack
Per region
specifications
RACK19
19-inch rack
support
Purchase directly
from ADC:
www.adc.com
Supplier P/N
PWUEF-7X19ERN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
A-11
Issue 3 April 2009
Ordering

1832 PSS-32 cables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1832 PSS-32 cables

Table A-11, 1830 PSS-32 cables (p. A-12) lists the ordering information for the 1830
PSS-32 cables.
Table A-11
1830 PSS-32 cables
Acronym
Description
Part No.
CLEI code
CA-RLP2N
CA-RACK LAMP
Cable (NAR) 2.8M
8DG08358AAAA
CA-RLP2E
CA-RACK LAMP
Cable (ETSI) 2.8M
8DG90079AAAA
CA-HKP15
CA-AUX CH/HK
CABLE (NAR),
15M, SHIELDED,
13 PR, 25 PIN
D-SUB
8DG08387AAAA
CA-HKP30
CA-AUX CH/HK
CABLE (NAR),
30M, SHIELDED,
13 PR, 25 PIN
D-SUB
8DG08388AAAA
CA-HKP45
CA-AUX CH/HK
CABLE (NAR),
45M, SHIELDED,
13 PR, 25 PIN
D-SUB
8DG08389AAAA
CA-HKP60
CA-AUX CH/HK
CABLE (NAR),
60M, SHIELDED,
13 PR, 25 PIN
D-SUB
8DG08390AAAA
CA-HKP100
CA-AUX CH/HK
CABLE (NAR),
100M, SHIELDED,
13 PR, 25 PIN
D-SUB
8DG08391AAAA
CA-RA15
CA-RACK ALM
CABLE (NAR),
15M, SHIELDED,
26AWG, 8 PR, 15
PIN D-SUB
8DG08400AAAA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
A-12
Ordering

1832 PSS-32 cables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-11
1830 PSS-32 cables
(continued)
Acronym
Description
Part No.
CLEI code
CA-RA30
CA-RACK ALM
CABLE (NAR),
30M, SHIELDED,
26AWG, 8 PR, 15
PIN D-SUB
8DG08400ABAA
CA-RA45
CA-RACK ALM
CABLE (NAR),
45M, SHIELDED,
26AWG, 8 PR, 15
PIN D-SUB
8DG08400ACAA
CA-RA60
CA-RACK ALM
CABLE (NAR),
60M, SHIELDED,
26AWG, 8 PR, 15
PIN D-SUB
8DG08400ADAA
CA-RA100
CA-RACK ALM
CABLE (NAR),
100M, SHIELDED,
26AWG, 8 PR, 15
PIN D-SUB
8DG08400AEAA
CA-LAN2
CA-LAN CABLE
(NAR), 2M,
SHIELDED CAT5,
PVC
8DG08368AAAA
CA-LAN5
CA-LAN CABLE
(NAR), 5M,
SHIELDED CAT5,
PVC
8DG08351AAAA
CA-LAN10
CA-LAN CABLE
(NAR), 10M,
SHIELDED CAT5,
PVC
8DG08352AAAA
CA-LAN20
CA-LAN CABLE
(NAR), 20M,
SHIELDED CAT5,
PVC
8DG08353AAAA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
A-13
Issue 3 April 2009
Ordering

1832 PSS-32 cables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-11
1830 PSS-32 cables
(continued)
Acronym
Description
Part No.
CLEI code
CA-LAN30
CA-LAN CABLE
(NAR), 30M,
SHIELDED CAT5,
PVC
8DG08354AAAA
CA-LAN40
CA-LAN CABLE
(NAR), 40M,
SHIELDED CAT5,
PVC
8DG08355AAAA
CA-LAN50
CA-LAN CABLE
(NAR), 50M,
SHIELDED CAT5,
PVC
8DG08356AAAA
CA-LAN60
CA-LAN CABLE
(NAR), 60M,
SHIELDED CAT5,
PVC
8DG08357AAAA
CA-INV2
CA-INVENTORY
CABLE (NAR)
(2.3M), SHIELDED
CAT5E
8DG08359AAAA
CA-INV5
CA-INVENTORY
CABLE (NAR)
(5.5M), SHIELDED
CAT5E
8DG08360AAAA
CA-INV7
CA-INVENTORY
CABLE (NAR)
(7M), SHIELDED
CAT5E
8DG08361AAAA
FOADMINV
FOADM Inventory
Cable Adapter for
SFD44
8DG59724AA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
A-14
Ordering

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table A-12, 1830 PSS-32 kit: customer-replaceable items (p. A-15) lists the ordering
information for the 1830 PSS-32 kit: customer-replaceable items.
Table A-12
Acronym
Description
Part No.
CLEI code
COSHF
Central office shelf

(shelf and
backplane)
8DG59319AA
WOMNW00ERA
CVR32EIA
CO shelf cover Large - EIA
8DG59348AA
FSCEIA
Flex shelf cover EIA
8DG59518AA
BCEIA
CO shelf baffle
cover - EIA
8DG59535AA
USRPNL
User interface panel
8DG59240AA
WOCUAKCUAA
FAN
Fan unit
8DG59243AA
WOCUAKBUAA
TIBNK
Timing interface
bank
8DG59421AA
UPBNK
User panel bank
8DG59354AA
AIRFLT
Air filter
8DG59320AA

Table A-13, 1830 PSS-32 miscellaneous equipment (p. A-15) lists the ordering
information for the 1830 PSS-32 miscellaneous equipment.
Table A-13
Acronym
Description
Part No.
CLEI code
FSBNK
Full-slot bank
8DG59418AA
HSBNK
Half-slot bank
8DG59419AA
HSALD
Half-slot adapter
8DG59443AA
ECBNK
Equipment controller
bank
8DG59420AA
INST19
CO shelf NAR
installation kit
(EIA/ANSI)
8DG59604AA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
A-15
Issue 3 April 2009
Ordering

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-13
1830 PSS-32 miscellaneous equipment (continued)
Acronym
Description
Part No.
CLEI code
INSTET
CO shelf installation
kit (ETSI rack)
8DG59604AC
OMDKIT
OMD installation kit

(EIA, ANSI, or ETSI)
8DG59603AA
SHFID
Shelf ID
3AL79242AA
TOOLKIT
1830 tool kit

(includes SFPTL,
LCTL, HSLADTL,
HSLADDRV)
8DG59613AA
SFPTOOL
SFP tool
3AL81728AA
HSLADTL
Half-slot mechanical
adapter tool
8DG07796AA
HSLADDRV
Half-slot mechanical
adapter screwdriver
1AD008610003
LCTL
LC removal tool
8DG59614AA
ATTNDRW
Attenuation drawer
(1U)
1AD51940001
ATTEN-1
1-dB attenuator
1AB371250006
ATTEN-2
2-dB attenuator
1AB371250002
ATTEN-3
3-dB attenuator
1AB371250007
ATTEN-4
4-dB attenuator
1AB371250001
ATTEN-5
5-dB attenuator
1AB371250008
ATTEN-6
6-dB attenuator
1AB371250003
ATTEN-7
7-dB attenuator
1AB371250009
ATTEN-8
8-dB attenuator
1AB371240001
ATTEN-9
9-dB attenuator
1AB371250010
ATTEN-10
10-dB attenuator
1AB252030001
ATTEN-12
12-dB attenuator
1AB371250004
ATTEN-14
14-dB attenuator
1AB371250005
DUJMSMN3
Duplex jumper (3.5m)

- NAR (SM for
internal connections)
1AB215120038
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
A-16
Ordering

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-13
1830 PSS-32 miscellaneous equipment (continued)
Acronym
Description
Part No.
CLEI code
DUJMSME3
Duplex jumper (3.5m)

- ETSI (SM for
internal connections)
1AB215120056
SIMJSMN2
Simplex jumper
2.350m) - NAR - SM
for LD when no DCM
present
1AB215120057
SIMJSME2
Simplex jumper
2.350m) - ETSI - SM
for LD when no DCM
present
1AB215120050
DUJMMMN3
Duplex Jumper (3.5m)

- NAR - MM (50m)
for OTs for regen.
application
1AB215120058
DUJMMME3
Duplex Jumper (3.5m)

- ETSI - MM (50m)
for OTs for regen.
application
1AB215120059
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
A-17
Issue 3 April 2009
Ordering
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 and 1830 PSS-1 GBE

pluggable optics
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SFP

pluggable optics
SFP
Table A-14, 1830 PSS-32/PSS-1 GBE SFPs (p. A-18) lists the ordering information
for the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 and the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE SFP
pluggable optics.
Table A-14
Acronym
Description
Part No.
CLEI code
1830
PSS-32
1830
PSS-1
GBE
155M
SFP
SFP L-1.1
-40/+85
(Black and
White
STM-1/OC-3
DDM 1310
nm)
1AB376350002
NGI7AMFMAA
1AB376360001
NGI7AMHMAA
1AB376370001
NGI7AMTMAA
L-1.1/
LR-1
(L-1.1/LR-1)
622M
SFP
S-4.1/
IR-1
SFP S-4.1
-40/+85
(Black and
White
STM-4/
OC-12 DDM
1310 nm)
(S-4.1/IR-1)
2G5 SFP
I-16.1/
SR-1
SFP I-16.1
-40/+85
(Black and
White
STM-16/
OC-48 DDM
1310 nm)
(I-16.1/SR-1)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
A-18
Ordering

pluggable optics
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SFP
Table A-14
(continued)
Acronym
Description
Part No.
CLEI code
1830
PSS-32
1830
PSS-1
GBE
2G5 SFP
SFP L-16.1
-5/+85 (Black
and White
STM-16/
OC-48 DDM
1310 nm)
1AB196370008
WMUIAF3CAA
1AB196370009
WMUIAF4CAA
1AB196370007
WMUIAF2CAA
1AB187280033
WMUIABUCAA
L-16.1/
LR-1
(L-16.1/LR-1)
2G5 SFP
L-16.2/
LR-2
SFP L-16.2
-5/+85 (Black
and White
STM-16/
OC-48 DDM
1550 nm)
(L-16.2/LR-2)
2G5 MR
SFP
S-16.1/
IR-1
SFP S-16.1
ANY RATE
-40/+85
(Black and
White
STM-16/
OC-48
Multirate [<
2.7G] DDM
1310 nm)
(S-16.1/IR-1)
1G SFP
SFP GBE SX
1000BASE -40/+85
(Black and
-SX
White 1 GbE
DDM 850 nm
[1000BASESX])
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
A-19
Issue 3 April 2009
Ordering

pluggable optics
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SFP
Table A-14
Acronym

Part No.
CLEI code
1830
PSS-32
1830
PSS-1
GBE
1G SFP
SFP GBE LX
1000BASE -40/+85
(Black and
-LX
White 1 GbE
DDM 1310
nm
[1000BASELX])
1AB376720002
NGI7AMLMAA
1G SFP
SFP GBE LX
1000BASE -40/+85
(Black and
-ZX
White 1 GbE
DDM 1550
nm
[1000BASEZX])
1AB376720003
NGI7AMMMAA
OPTO-TRX
SFP FC/2FC
MM W/DDM
(Black and
White 1G/2G
Fibre Channel
DDM 850 nm
[SN-I])
1AB187280037
WMUIAFACAA
OPT-TRX
SFP FC/2FC
SM W/DDM
(Black and
White 1G/2G
Fibre Channel
DDM 1310
nm (LC-L)
1AB187280038
WMUIAFBCAA
FC SFP
1G FC/2G
FC SN-I
Note:R1.1
feature.
FC SFP
1G FC/2G
FC LC-L
Note:R1.1
feature.
Description
(continued)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
A-20
Ordering

pluggable optics
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SFP
Table A-14
(continued)
Acronym
Description
Part No.
CLEI code
1830
PSS-32
1830
PSS-1
GBE
FC SFP
SFP
FC/2FC/4FC
850NM
(Black and
White
1G/2G/4G
Fibre Channel
DDM 850 nm
[SN-1])
1AB379640001
NGI7ANVMAA
SFP
FC/2FC/4FC
1300NM
(Black and
White
1G/2G/4G
Fibre Channel
DDM 1310
nm (LC-L))
1AB379640002
NG17ANWMAA
SFP
CWDM-LH
1471NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate
APD)
1AB196350026
WMUIAFPCAA
1AB196350027
WMUIAFRCAA
1G FC/2G
FC/4G FC
SN-I
Note:R1.1
feature.
FC SFP
1G FC /
2G FC /
4G FC
LC-L
Note:R1.1
feature.
2G MR
CWDM
SFP
80 km
APD/1471
nm
[(2.7G)
DDM]
2G5 MR
CWDM
SFP
80 km
APD/1491
nm
SFP
CWDM-LH
1491NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate
APD)
[(2.7G)
DDM]
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
A-21
Issue 3 April 2009
Ordering

pluggable optics
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SFP
Table A-14
(continued)
Acronym
Description
Part No.
CLEI code
1830
PSS-32
1830
PSS-1
GBE
2G5 MR
CWDM
SFP 80
km APD /
1511 nm
SFP
CWDM-LH
1511NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate
APD)
1AB196350028
WMUIAFSCAA
1AB196350029
WMUIAFTCAA
1AB196350030
WMUIAFUCAA
1AB196350031
WMUIAFVCAA
[(2.7G)
DDM]
2G5 MR
CWDM
SFP 80
km APD/
1531 nm
SFP
CWDM-LH
1531NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate
APD)
[(2.7G)
DDM]
2G5 MR
CWDM
SFP 80
km APD /
1551 nm
SFP
CWDM-LH
1551NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate
APD)
[(2.7G)
DDM]
2G5 MR
CWDM
SFP 80
km APD /
1571 nm
SFP
CWDM-LH
1571NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate
APD)
[(2.7G)
DDM]
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
A-22
Ordering

pluggable optics
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SFP
Table A-14
(continued)
Acronym
Description
Part No.
CLEI code
1830
PSS-32
1830
PSS-1
GBE
2G5 MR
CWDM
SFP 80
km APD /
1591 nm
SFP
CWDM-LH
1591NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate
APD)
1AB196350032
WMUIAFWCAA
1AB196350033
WMUIAFXCAA
CWDM
OC3/STM1
PIN SFP
(1510 nm)
with DDM
1AB373110001
WOTRBAGTAA
CWDM
OC3/STM1
APD SFP
(1510 nm)
with DDM
1AB373120001
WOTRBAHTAA
OC3/STM-1
APD
ULHSFP
(1510 nm)
1AB373120002
WOTRBB7TAA
[(2.7G)
DDM]
2G5 MR
CWDM
SFP 80
km APD /
1611 nm
SFP
CWDM-LH
1611NM
(CWDM 2.5G
Multirate
APD)
[(2.7G) DDM
CH1610]
CWP151
DDMB
(OSC
1510
PIN)
CWA151
DDMB
(OSC
1510 APD
OSC 1510
APD
ULH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
A-23
Issue 3 April 2009
Ordering

pluggable optics
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
XFP
XFP
Table A-15, 1830 PSS-32/PSS-1 GBE XFPs (p. A-24) lists the ordering information
for the 1830 PSS-32 and the 1830 PSS-1 GBE (edge device) XFP pluggable optics.
Table A-15
Acronym
Description
Part No.
CLEI code
1830
1830
PSS-32 PSS-1
GBE
10G MR XFP
1310 nm
XFP
I-64.1/10GBE
BASE-LX
(Black and
White
STM64/OC192/OTU-2/
10GBASE-LX)
DDM
(1310nm)
1AB214540001
NGI7AC4MAA X
IR2 MR XFP
XFP
S-64.2B/
10GBE
BASE-EX
(Black and
White
STM64/OC192/OTU-2/
10BASE-EX)
DDM
1AB217280001
NGI7AC5MAA X
10G GBE XFP

850 nm
XFP
10BASE-SR
(Black and
White
10G-BASE-SR
DDM (850nm)
1AB214540002
NGI7ADWMAA X
10G CWDM
XFP 40 km
(1471 nm)
XFP CWDM
(40 km) 10G
DDM 1471 nm
1AB379240001
NGI7ALHMAA X
10G CWDM
XFP 70 km
(1471 nm)
10G CWDM
XFP 70 km
(1471 nm)
1AB378370001
NGI7ALWMAA X
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
A-24
Ordering

pluggable optics
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
XFP
Table A-15
(continued)
Acronym
Description
Part No.
CLEI code
1830
1830
PSS-32 PSS-1
GBE
10G CWDM
XFP 40 km
(1491 nm)
XFP CWDM
(40 km) 10G
DDM 1491 nm
1AB379240002
NGI7AL4MAA X
10G CWDM
XFP 70 km
(1491 nm)
XFP CWDM
(70 km) 10G
DDM 1491 nm
1AB378370002
NGI7ALXMAA X
10G CWDM
XFP 40 km
(1511 nm)
XFP CWDM
(40 km) 10G
DDM 1511 nm
1AB379240003
NGI7AL5MAA X
10G CWDM
XFP 70 km
(1511 nm)
XFP CWDM
(70 km) 10G
DDM 1511 nm
1AB378370003
NGI7ALYMAA X
10G CWDM
XFP 40 km
(1531 nm)
XFP CWDM
(40 km) 10G
DDM 1531 nm
1AB379240004
NGI7AL6MAA X
10G CWDM
XFP 70 km
(1531 nm)
XFP CWDM
(70 km) 10G
DDM 1531 nm
1AB378370004
NGI7ALZMAA X
10G CWDM
XFP 40 km
(1551 nm)
XFP CWDM
(40 km) 10G
DDM 1551 nm
1AB379240005
NGI7AL7MAA X
10G CWDM
XFP 70 km
(1551 nm)
XFP CWDM
(70 km) 10G
DDM 1551 nm
1AB378370005
NGI7AL0MAA X
10G CWDM
XFP 40 km
(1571 nm)
XFP CWDM
(40 km) 10G
DDM 1571 nm
1AB379240006
NGI7AL8MAA X
10G CWDM
XFP 70 km
(1571 nm)
XFP CWDM
(70 km) 10G
DDM 1571 nm
1AB378370006
NGI7AL1MAA X
10G CWDM
XFP 40 km
(1591 nm)
XFP CWDM
(40 km) 10G
DDM 1591 nm
1AB379240007
NGI7AL9MAA X
10G CWDM
XFP 70 km
(1591 nm)
XFP CWDM
(70 km) 10G
DDM 1591 nm
1AB378370007
NGI7AL2MAA X
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
A-25
Issue 3 April 2009
Ordering

pluggable optics
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
XFP
Table A-15
(continued)
Acronym
Description
Part No.
CLEI code
1830
1830
PSS-32 PSS-1
GBE
10G CWDM
XFP 40 km
(1611 nm)
XFP CWDM
(40 km) 10G
DDM 1611 nm
1AB379240008
NGI7AMAMAA X
10G CWDM
XFP 70 km
(1611 nm)
XFP CWDM
(70 km) 10G
DDM 1611 nm
1AB378370008
NGI7AL3MAA X
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
A-26
Ordering

Edge device
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Edge device
This section lists the equipment that is specific to the 1830 PSS-1 GBE Edge Device.
Table A-16, 1830 PSS-1 GBE common equipment (p. A-27) lists the ordering
information for the 1830 PSS-1 GBE Edge Device common equipment.
Table A-16
1830 PSS-1 GBE common equipment
Acronym
Description
Part No.
CLEI code
GBEKIT
1830PSS-1 GBE
Shelf Kit (incl.
1830PSS-1GBE,
EDFANUP,
EDPFDCx2)
8DG59656AA
PSS1GBE
1830PSS-1GBE
Edge Device
8DG59657AA
WOMNL00ERB
EDCVR
Edge Device Shelf

Cover - EIA
8DG59494AA
EDINST19
Edge Device
Installation Kit
(19-inch rack)
8DG59655AA
EDINST23
Edge Device
Installation Kit
(ANSI Rack)
8DG59655AB
EDINSTET
Edge Device
Installation Kit
(ETSI Rack)
8DG59655AC
DUJSME1
Duplex JUMPER
S.M. LC/PC-LC/PC
1.4m ETSI
1AB215120060
DUJSMN1
Duplex JUMPER
S.M. LC/PC-LC/PC
1.4m NAR
1AB215120061
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
A-27
Issue 3 April 2009
Ordering

Edge device
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-17, 1830 PSS-1 GBE kit: customer-replaceable items (p. A-28) lists the
ordering information for the 1830 PSS-1 GBE kit: customer-replaceable items.
Table A-17
Acronym
Description
Part No.
CLEI code
EDFANUP
Edge Device Fan

Unit User Panel
integrated
8DG59379AA
WOPQAB1RAA
EDAIRFLT
Edge Device Dust

Filter
8DG59648AA
EDPFDC
Edge Device Power

Filter (DC)
8DG59382AA
WOPUABDMAB
Table A-18, 1830 PSS-1 GBE miscellaneous equipment (p. A-28) lists the ordering
information for the 1830 PSS-1 GBE miscellaneous equipment.
Table A-18
Acronym
Description
Part No.
CLEI code
EDHSFB
ED Filter Blank
(half-slot)
8DG59658AA
EDFSFB
ED Filter Blank
(full slot)
8DG59691AA
EDPSFB
ED Power Filter
Blank
8DG59659AA
EDHSLAD
Half-slot adapter
(filter slot)
8DG59642AA
E_SFC1A
Edge Device Static Filter CWDM

1 Channel (A
Variant)
8DG59592AA
WOCUAJYUAA
E_SFC1B

1 Channel (B
Variant)
8DG59592AB
WOCUAJZUAA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
A-28
Ordering

Edge device
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-18
1830 PSS-1 GBE miscellaneous equipment (continued)
Acronym
Description
Part No.
CLEI code
E_SFC1C

1 Channel (C
Variant)
8DG59592AC
WOCUAJ0UAA
E_SFC1D

1 Channel (D
Variant)
8DG59592AD
WOCUAJ1UAA
E_SFC1E

1 Channel (E
Variant)
8DG59592AE
WOCUAJ2UAA
E_SFC1F

1 Channel (F
Variant)
8DG59592AF
WOCUAJ3UAA
E_SFC1G

1 Channel (G
Variant)
8DG59592AG
WOCUAJ4UAA
E_SFC1H

1 Channel (H
Variant)
8DG59592AH
WOCUAJ5UAA
E_SFC2A

2 Channel (A
Variant)
8DG59601AA
WOCUAJUUAA
E_SFC2B

2 Channel (B
Variant)
8DG59601AB
WOCUAJVUAA
E_SFC2C

2 Channel (C
Variant)
8DG59601AC
WOCUAJWUAA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
A-29
Issue 3 April 2009
Ordering

Edge device
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-18
1830 PSS-1 GBE miscellaneous equipment (continued)
Acronym
Description
Part No.
CLEI code
E_SFC2D

2 Channel (D
Variant)
8DG59601AD
WOCUAJXUAA
E_SFC4A

4 Channel (A
Variant)
8DG5953AA
WOCUAJSUAA
E_SFC4B

4 Channel (B
Variant)
8DG5953AB
WOCUAJTUAA
E_SFC8
CWDM 8 Channel
Static Filter
8DG59594AA
WOCUAJRUAA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
A-30
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
access identifier (AID)
A unique identifier used to address equipment slots and ports, as well as facility
tributaries, that are defined for the system architecture.
add/drop multiplexer/multiplexing (ADM)
A high-speed multiplexing function offered by SONET that allows lower-level signals to

be added to or dropped from an optical carrier channel. The connection to the add/drop
multiplexer is through a tributary channel at a lower SONET carrier rate or a specific
digital speed (for example, DS3 or DS1).
ADM
See add/drop multiplexer/multiplexing (p. GL-1) for definition.

AHPHG
High Power High Gain DWDM Amplifier. See ALPHG (p. GL-2) for related term.
AID
See access identifier (p. GL-1) for definition.

AIM
See alarm indication message (p. GL-1) for definition.

AINS
Automatic in-service.
AIS
See alarm indication signal (p. GL-1) for definition.

alarm
External notification or display of a failure condition. The indication of failure is

towards an external system interface or via audible or visible indicators.
alarm indication message (AIM)
A return message sent from one network element (NE) to another NE that indicates it
has received a signal that is so degraded that it is raising an alarm.
alarm indication signal (AIS)
A signal sent downstream by an NE to indicate that its incoming signal has failed.
alarm list
A status report that lists active alarms on the NE.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
GL-1
Issue 3 April 2009
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
alarm log
A history of setting and clearing system alarms on the NE.

alarm severity
An attribute that defines the priority of the alarm message. The method in which alarms
are processed depends on their severity.
ALPHG
Low Power High Gain DWDM Amplifier. See AHPHG (p. GL-1) for related term.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
A United States standards body that accredits standards for programming languages,
communications, and networking. ANSI is the U.S. representative in the International
Organization for Standards (ISO).
amplified spontaneous emission (ASE)
Optical noise generated in an erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA) with and without
signal input power.
ANSI
See American National Standards Institute (p. GL-2) for definition.

APD
See avalanche photodiode (p. GL-3) for definition.

APS
See automatic protection switching (p. GL-3) for definition.

APSD
See automatic power shutdown (p. GL-3) for definition.

ASE
See amplified spontaneous emission (p. GL-2) for definition.

asynchronous
Data that is transmitted without an associated clock signal.

asynchronous transfer mode (ATM)
A fast-packet, connection-oriented, cell-switching technology for broadband signals.

ATM is designed to accommodate any form of data, including voice, facsimile, computer
data, video, image, and multimedia, whether compressed or uncompressed, whether
real-time or non-real-time in nature, and with guaranteed quality of service (QoS).
ATM networks will accept or reject connections based on a users average and peak
bandwidth requirements, providing flexible and efficient service for LAN-to-LAN,
compressed video, and other applications that involve variable bit rate (VBR) traffic.
ATM
See asynchronous transfer mode (p. GL-2) for definition.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
GL-2
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
attenuation
The decrease in signal strength along a fiber optic waveguide caused by absorption and
scattering. Attenuation is usually expressed as dB/km.
attenuator
A passive device that reduces the amplitude of a signal without distorting the waveform.
automatic power shutdown (APSD)
A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of optical

amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.
automatic protection switching (APS)
A network survivability method in which traffic is automatically switched to a protection

route when a failure is detected on a working route.
autonomous message
Message sent by the system to the CIT to notify it of any state change in the system.
Autonomous messages are not responses to a CIT-initiated command. Examples of these
messages include alarms, events (non-alarmed condition), notification of connections that
are added or deleted, and changes in the system database.
avalanche photodiode (APD)
A photodetector that can be regarded as the semiconductor analog to photomultipliers.

By applying a high reverse bias voltage (typically 100-200 V in silicon), an APD shows
an internal current gain effect (around 100) due to impact ionization (avalanche effect).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
back reflection
See Fresnel reflection (p. GL-12).

background block errors (BBE)
Errors identified through OTN performance monitoring.

backward defect indication (BDI)
The OT port has detected a Backward Defect Indication at the ODUk Path layer. This
defect indicates that the peer OTUk port has detected condition that is treated as Server
Signal Failure.
band optical filter (BOF)
A band-dependent optical card.

bay
An aluminum steel enclosure for rack-mounted equipment. Also know as a rack.

BB
See broadband (p. GL-4) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
GL-3
Issue 3 April 2009
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BBA
See broadband amplifier (p. GL-4) for definition.

BBE
See background block errors (p. GL-3) for definition.

BDI
See backward defect indication (p. GL-3) for definition.

BER
See bit error rate (p. GL-4) for definition.

bidirectional line switched ring (BLSR)
A survivable SONET transport architecture that protects against cable cuts and node
failures by providing duplicate, geographically diverse paths for each service. Network
elements are interconnected in a closed fiber loop (four fibers for a four-fiber BLSR
architecture or two fibers for a two-fiber BLSR). A service can reach its destination by
traveling in either direction around the ring. Exactly one-half of the bandwidth available
between adjacent nodes in each direction is used for working traffic, with the remaining
bandwidth available for protection.
bit error rate (BER)
BER measures how accurately a bitstream is transmitted through a system. It measures

how many bits are received in error, compared to how many bits are sent.
BLSR
See bidirectional line switched ring (p. GL-4) for definition.

BOF
See band optical filter (p. GL-3) for definition.

broadband (BB)
A technology that refers to the always-open gateway to Internet-connected services

delivered at lightning-fast speeds.
broadband amplifier (BBA)
Optical amplifier that supports broadband technology.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CAD
See channel add/drop card (p. GL-5) for definition.

central office (CO)
A CO can be a building, a switch, or collection of switches where subscriber lines are

joined to switching equipment that connects the subscribers to each other, other
subscribers, and/or long distance subscribers.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
GL-4
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CFR
Code of Federal Regulations.

channel
A communications path or the signal sent over that path.

channel add/drop card (CAD)
Used with automatic power management; allows setpoints for a manual transmission
line.
channel optical filter (COF)
COF cards facilitate the WaveKey encoding function, employed at service endpoints.
chromatic dispersion
The effect describing the velocity dependence of light travelling through a medium,
depending on its wavelength. For optical telecommunication signals, this effect causes
the light pulses to spread out and the resulting distortion in pulse shape degrades the
signal quality.
CIDR
See classless inter-domain routing (p. GL-5) for definition.

CIT
See craft interface terminal (p. GL-6) for definition.

cladding
Material that surrounds the core of an optical fiber that has a lower index of refraction
compared to that of the core. The lower index of refraction causes the transmitted light
to travel down the core.
classless inter-domain routing (CIDR)
Routing for networks of variable sizes, defined by a variable-length subnet mask. By

using subnet mask values other than 255 (all ones) for a particular octet, the bits in the
network address that are not covered by the subnet mask can be sized to create
networks that do not conform to the original Class A, B, and C subnet definitions.
CLEI
See common language element identifier (p. GL-6) for definition.

CN
See control network (p. GL-6) for definition.

CO
See central office (p. GL-4) for definition.

coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM)
CWDM is the method of combining multiple signals on laser beams at various

wavelengths for transmission along fiber optic cables. The number of channels is fewer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
GL-5
Issue 3 April 2009
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
than in dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM), but more than in standard
wavelength division multiplexing (WDM).
COF
See channel optical filter (p. GL-5) for definition.

common language element identifier (CLEI)
CLEI codes enable you to clearly and consistently identify and track virtually every type
of telecommunications equipment. In the United States, these codes are assigned by
Telecordia, and are 10 bytes long.
connector
A mechanical or optical device that provides a demountable connection between two

fibers or a fiber and a source or detector.
connector variation
The maximum value in dB of the difference in insertion loss between mating optical
connectors (for example, with re-mating and temperature cycling). Also called optical
connector variation.
control network (CN)
The portion of the network that carries control and management traffic (for example,
communications between the NEs and between the NEs and the EMS). The control
network does not carry user traffic. The control communications use the SNMP protocol.
core
The central portion of the fiber that transmits light. It is composed of material with a
higher index of refraction than the cladding.
coupler
An optical device that combines or splits power from optical fibers.

coupling ratio/loss (CR)
The ratio/loss of optical power from one output port to the total output power, expressed
as a percentage.
CPE
See customer premises equipment (p. GL-6) for definition.

CR
See coupling ratio/loss (p. GL-6) for definition.

craft interface terminal (CIT)
A local interface between humans and a NE. It is used to issue commands to the local
system or, by way of a remote login, to another system on the same fiber as the local
system.
customer premises equipment (CPE)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
GL-6
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Terminal and associated equipment and inside wiring located at a subscribers premises.
The equipment is connected with the carriers communication network at the
demarcation point.
CWDM
See coarse wavelength division multiplexing (p. GL-5) for definition.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
data communication network (DCN)
DCN supports communications between network elements (NEs) and the network
management system (NMS).
DCM
See dispersion compensation module (p. GL-7) for definition.

DCN
See data communication network (p. GL-7) for definition.

dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM)
A multiplexing technique that uses close spectral spacing of individual optical carrier
wavelengths to reduce the total number of fibers needed to provide a given amount of
information-carrying capacity. The technique takes advantage of desirable transmission
characteristics (for example, minimum dispersion or attenuation) within a given fiber.
DGEF
See dynamic gain equalization filter (p. GL-8) for definition.

DHCP
See dynamic host configuration protocol (p. GL-8) for definition.

dispersion
The temporal spreading of a light signal in an optical waveguide caused by light signals
traveling at different speeds through a fiber either due to modal or chromatic effects.
dispersion compensation module (DCM)
Spooled fiber used to control excess dispersion found in certain fiber types at pre- and
post-amplification.
distortion
The difference in value between two measurements of a signal (transmitted and

received).
DS3
Standard for digital transmission (American National Standard for telecommunications Carrier-to-Customer Installation - DS3 Metallic Interface, ANSI T1.404- 1989).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
GL-7
Issue 3 April 2009
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DWDM
See dense wavelength division multiplexing (p. GL-7) for definition.

dynamic gain equalization filter (DGEF)
A filter that equalizes the gain of an optical signal.

dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP)
DHCP allows a DHCP server to automatically assign an IP address to a computers

TCP/IP stack software. The number is taken from a defined range of numbers for a
given network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
earth
The European term for electrical ground.

EC
See equipment controller (p. GL-9) for definition.

EDFA
See erbium-doped fiber amplifier (p. GL-9) for definition.

edge node
A node that connects to external network or customer equipment, as opposed to

providing an interconnection point between other nodes. It is located at the edge of the
network.
egress
Traffic leaving a network

EIA
See Electronic Industries Alliance (p. GL-8) for definition.

electrical variable optical attentuator (eVOA)
Works with the Tap module to provide input for Wavelength Tracker modulation and
provides optical tap for feedback signal to the Wavelength Tracker.
electromagnetic capability (EMC)
EMC is the ability of a device or system to function without error in its intended
electromagnetic environment
electromagnetic interference (EMI)
EMI refers to the emissions (high-energy, electrically induced magnetic fields) from a
device or system that interfere with the normal operation of another device or system.
Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA)
Group that specifies electrical transmission standards. The EIA and TIA have developed
numerous well-known communications standards, including EIA/TIA-232 and
EIA/TIA-449.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
GL-8
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
electrostatic discharge (ESD)
Static electrical energy potentially harmful to circuit packs and humans.

Element Management System (EMS)
The EMS provides an efficient means of managing the equipment and services within a
network, including creating new services, diagnosing faults, and planning for growth. It
includes interfaces to external systems to allow functions such as billing, service orders,
and service level agreement (SLA) management.
EMC
See electromagnetic capability (p. GL-8) for definition.

EMI
See electromagnetic interference (p. GL-8) for definition.

EMS
See Element Management System (p. GL-9) for definition.

EN
European Norm; a German acronym that stands for Europasche Norm.

Engineering rules
A set of rules that determine the system configuration possibilities based on fiber type,
OA, rate, and number of wavelengths. These rules also determine the maximum loss per
span that can be tolerated, the maximum distance between spans allowed, and the
maximum number of spans that can be supported.
equipment controller (EC)
EC is the equipment controller card,

erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA)
A type of amplifier with a short length of fiber that has been doped with erbium and
spliced into the operating single-mode fiber (SMF) . A three-port wavelength division
multiplexer (WDM) is used, with one incoming port connected to the operating fiber
carrying the primary signal in the 1550-nm window, one incoming port attached to a
pump laser operating at 980 nm or 1480 nm, and the one outgoing port connected to the
operating fiber.
ESD
See electrostatic discharge (p. GL-8) for definition.

Ethernet LAN
A LAN conformant to the 802.3 IEEE standard. This standard supports communications
over shared media where only one device can transmit while all other devices listen. A
collision detection and handling mechanism is incorporated into the standard. Devices on
the LAN communicate by sending Ethernet packets containing a Media Access Control
(MAC) address for the source and destination. Setting the destination MAC address to
all ones supports packet broadcast to all devices on the LAN.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
GL-9
Issue 3 April 2009
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ETSI
See European Telecommunications Standards Institute (p. GL-10) for definition.

European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI)
Located in Sophia-Antipolis, France, ETSI is the European counterpart to ANSI. Its task
is to pave the way for telecommunications integration in the European community as
part of the single European market program. It establishes telecommunication standards
for the European community.
eVOA
See electrical variable optical attentuator (p. GL-8) for definition.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
failure
Occurs when a fault cause persists for a certain period of time.

failure in time (FIT)
A unit of failure rate in reliability analysis. One FIT is equivalent to one failure per one
billion operating hours.
failure rate
The number of failures of a device per unit of time.

FC
See fiber optic connector (p. GL-11) for definition.

FCC
See Federal Communications Commission (p. GL-10) for definition.

FCS
See frame check sequence (p. GL-12) for definition.

FDA
See Food and Drug Administration (p. GL-11) for definition.

FDDI
See fiber distributed data interface (p. GL-11) for definition.

FDI
See forward defect indicator (p. GL-11) for definition.

FEC
See forward error correction (p. GL-12) for definition.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
The U.S. federal regulatory agency responsible for the regulation of interstate and
international communications by radio, television, wire, satellite, and cable.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
GL-10
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ferrule
A rigid tube that confines or holds a fiber as part of a connector assembly.

fiber distributed data interface (FDDI)
A set of ANSI protocols used for sending digital data over fiber optic cable. FDDI
networks are token-passing networks and support data rates of up to 100 Mbps.
fiber optic cable
A cable containing one or more optical fibers.

fiber optic connector (FC)
A threaded optical connector for single-mode or multimode fiber and applications

requiring low back reflection.
field-programmable gate array (FPGA)
General purpose integrated chip; chips functions can be programmed by software.

FPGAs are mostly used for rapid development and small or medium quantities
production.
file transfer protocol (FTP)
A protocol used for exchanging files over the Internet. FTP uses the Internets TCP/IP
protocols to enable data transfer. FTP is most commonly used to download/upload a file
to/from a server using the Internet.
FIT
See failure in time (p. GL-10) for definition.

FIT rate
The number of device failures in one billion device hours.

flash disk memory module (FMM)
A nonvolatile memory device used to store the installation software generic or the NE
database.
flow
Usually refers to the movement of packets within the network (that is, packet flow).
FMM
See flash disk memory module (p. GL-11) for definition.

FOADM
Fixed optical add/drop multiplexer/multiplexing.

Food and Drug Administration (FDA)
An agency of the United States Department of Health and Human Services and is
responsible for the safety regulation of most types of foods, dietary supplements, drugs,
vaccines, biological medical products, blood products, medical devices, radiationemitting devices, veterinary products, and cosmetics.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
GL-11
Issue 3 April 2009
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
forward defect indicator (FDI)
An automatic and fully distributed capability which indicates a failure in a server

networking layer (e.g., Physical Layer). When used with other mechanisms such as CV
(Connectivity Verification), it can indicate defects such as misbranching of LSPs and
errors in swapping LSP label.
forward error correction (FEC)
A technique used for error detection and correction in which the transmitting host
computer includes some number of redundant bits in the payload (data field) of a block
or frame of data. The receiving device uses those bits to detect, isolate and correct any
errors created in transmission. FEC avoids having to retransmit information which
incurred errors in network transit.
FPGA
See field-programmable gate array (p. GL-11) for definition.

frame check sequence (FCS)
Extra characters added to a frame for error control purposes. Used in HDLC, Frame
Relay, and other data link layer protocols.
Fresnel reflection
A reflection of light that occurs at the air-glass interface at the ends of an optical fiber.
See back reflection (p. GL-3) for related term.
FTP
See file transfer protocol (p. GL-11) for definition.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
gain
The increase in power and magnitude of a signal.

gateway network element (GNE)
A system node that has a physical attachment to the management system to support the
access of the remote NE. The number of remote NEs a GNE can serve is specified in
terms of the number of OSI stack associations that the GNE can support without running
out of local resources.
GbE
See Gigabit Ethernet (p. GL-13) for definition.

generic framing protocol (GFP)
Provides a generic mechanism to adapt traffic from higher-layer client signals over an
octet-synchronous transport network. Client signals may be PDU oriented (e.g., PPP/IP
or Ethernet MAC), block oriented (e.g., Fiber Channel or ESCON) or a Constant Bit
Rate (CBR) stream.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
GL-12
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GFP
See generic framing protocol (p. GL-12) for definition.

Gigabit Ethernet (GBE)
A transmission technology based on the Ethernet frame format and protocol used in local
area networks (LANs) that provides a data rate of one billion bits (one gigabit) per
second. Gigabit Ethernet is defined in the IEEE 802.3 standard and is currently used as
the backbone in many enterprise networks.
glass through-connection
A pair of optical connections between two segments that terminate on the same site.
GNE
See gateway network element (p. GL-12) for definition.

graphical user interface (GUI)
A program interface that takes advantage of the computers graphics capabilities to make
the program easier to use.
grooming
Consolidating or segregating traffic.

grooming node
A node on which incoming signals of lower rates are added (or aggregated) into a
higher-rate signal for more efficient transport.
ground
The North American term for electrical earth.

GUI
See graphical user interface (p. GL-13) for definition.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ILA
See in-line amplifier (p. GL-13) for definition.

in-line amplifier (ILA)
A repeater used in WDM technology. See repeater (p. GL-24) for related term.
ingress
Traffic entering a network.

insertion loss
The loss of power that results from inserting a component, such as a connector or splice,
into a previously continuous path.
International Standards Organization (ISO)
A United Nations agency concerned with international standardization in a broad range

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
GL-13
Issue 3 April 2009
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
of industrial and technical fields.

International Telecommunications Union (ITU)
An international civil organization established to promote standardized telecommunications on a worldwide basis.

Internet protocol (IP)
A standard protocol designed for use in interconnected systems of packet-switched

computer communication networks. The Internet Protocol provides for transmitting
blocks of data called datagrams from sources to destinations, where sources and
destinations are hosts identified by fixed-length addresses. The Internet Protocol also
provides for fragmentation and reassembly of long datagrams, if necessary, for
transmission through small-packet networks.
Internet protocol security (IPsec)
A developing standard for security at the network or packet processing layer of network
communication. Earlier security approaches have inserted security at the application
layer of the communications model. IPsec is especially useful for implementing virtual
private networks and for remote user access through dial-up connection to private
networks.
Internet service provider (ISP)
A company that provides individuals and other companies access to the Internet and
other related services, such as Web site building and virtual hosting.
IP
See Internet protocol (p. GL-14) for definition.

IPsec (Internet Protocol Security)
See Internet protocol security (p. GL-14) for definition.

ISO
See International Standards Organization (p. GL-13) for definition.

ISP
See Internet service provider (p. GL-14) for definition.

ITU
See International Telecommunications Union (p. GL-14) for definition

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
jacket
The outer, protective covering of the cable.

jitter
Small and rapid variations in the timing of a waveform due to noise, changes in
component characteristics, supply voltages, or imperfect synchronizing circuits.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
GL-14
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
jumper
A short fiber optic cable with connectors on both ends.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
lambda ()
The eleventh letter in the Greek alphabet. In optical fiber networking, the term lambda
refers to an individual optical wavelength. See wavelength (p. GL-33) for related term.
laser bias current (LBC)
Current that runs through the laser to make it work. LBC is monitored by performance
monitoring. If the current goes beyond a certain threshold, the circuit pack must be
replaced.
LBC
See laser bias current (p. GL-15) for definition.

LBO
See line build out (p. GL-15) for definition.

LC
See Lucent connector (p. GL-16) for definition.

LD
See line driver (p. GL-15) for definition.

LGX
A SONET device that contains ports for optical fiber connections to an optical network
element (NE). An LGX is used to make and change connections to an NE without
changing the cabling on the NE itself.
line build out (LBO)
Attenuation used to simulate a load.

line driver (LD)
Functional unit (circuit pack) providing the OSI models physical level interface between
a data link and the exchange.
link state advertisement (LSA)
A broadcast message that advertises a links current status.

LOF
See loss of frame (p. GL-16) for definition.

long reach (LR)
An optic standard that constrains the output power of transmitters and the sensitivity of
receivers for long-haul applications (up to 80 km) without the need for regeneration.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
GL-15
Issue 3 April 2009
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOS
See loss of service/loss of signal (p. GL-16) for definition.

loss
The amount of a signals power, expressed in dB, that is lost in connectors, splices, or
fiber defects.
loss of frame (LOF)
Loss of frame is detected when the OOF (out-of-frame) anomaly persists for a certain
time.
loss of service/loss of signal (LOS)
A condition where the optical input power falls below a certain threshold.
LR
See long reach (p. GL-15) for definition.

LSA
See link state advertisement (p. GL-15) for definition.

Lucent connector (LC)
Designation for a small-form-factor (SFF) design based on a proven 1.25-mm ceramic

ferrule. This connector uses RJ-style latching. It facilitates high-speed applications with
lower power requirements due to lower insertion loss (0.1 dB typical) and higher return
loss (55-dB single mode).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MAC
See media access control (p. GL-17) for definition.

management information base (MIB)
A formal description of a set of network objects that can be managed using the Simple
Network Management Protocol (SNMP). The information is represented in a tree format.
margin
The allowance for attenuation in addition to that explicitly accounted for in system
design.
master controller (MC)
The systems master controller (MC) card.

MC
See master controller (p. GL-16) for definition.

mean time between failures (MTBF)
The expected average time between failures usually expressed in hours.

mean time to repair (MTTR)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
GL-16
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The average time that it takes until a failure is repaired. MTTR is usually expressed in
hours.
media access control (MAC)
The MAC address is a computers unique hardware number. The MAC address is used
by the media access control sublayer of the data link layer of telecommunications
protocols.
mesh
A type of network configuration that combines ROADMs to support mesh channel

connectivity between the ROADMs without O-E-O for transmission. It is operated as a
single NE with as many as four degrees (bidirectional DWDM interfaces) that comprise
two lines for the east and two for the west.
MIB
See management information base (p. GL-16) for definition.

mid-stage access amplifier (MSA)
An MSA has two amplifier stages between which can be fibered a DCM/DCF card or an
external dispersion compensation unit.
modulation
A process that modifies the characteristic of one wave (the carrier) by another wave (the
signal). Examples include amplitude modulation (AM), frequency modulation (FM), and
pulse-coded modulation (PCM).
MSA
See mid-stage access amplifier (p. GL-17) for definition.

MTBF
See mean time between failures (p. GL-16) for definition.

MTTR
See mean time to repair (p. GL-16) for definition.

multimode fiber
An optical fiber that has a core large enough to propagate more than one mode of light.
The typical diameter is 62.5 micrometers.
multiplexer (MUX)
A device that combines two or more signals into a single output.

multiplexing
The process that transmits two or more signals over a single communications channel.
Examples include time-division multiplexing and wavelength-division multiplexing.
MUX
See multiplexer (p. GL-17) for definition.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
GL-17
Issue 3 April 2009
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
muxponder
A networking device that multiplexes and transponds GbE signals.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NE
See network element (p. GL-18) for definition.

NEBS
See Network Equipment Building System requirements (p. GL-18) for definition.
network element (NE)
Processor-controlled entity of a telecommunications network that primarily provides

switching and transport network functions and contains network operations functions.
For 1830 PSS, a configuration of 1830 PSS equipment at a single site, addressed as a
single entity, and under the control of a single controller (NE). The types of NEs are
ILA (in-line amplifier) and ADM (add/drop multiplexer).
Network Element Management System (NMS)
The NMS provides an efficient means of managing the equipment and services within a
network, including creating new services, diagnosing faults, and planning for growth. It
has interfaces to external systems to allow functions such as billing, service orders, and
service level agreement (SLA) management.
Network Equipment Building System requirements (NEBS)
Developed by Telcordia, standards that vendors must adhere to if they want to sell
equipment to the Regional Bell Operating Companies (RBOCs) and the Competitive
Local Exchange Carriers (CLECs).
network services
Services that the network provider creates only as infrastructure to support user services.
For example, a VPN network service is used to implement an Ethernet service.
network time protocol (NTP)
Internet protocol used to synchronize time between network equipment.

NMS
See Network Element Management System (p. GL-18) for definition.

node
A node (or network element) is a set of one or more Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32
shelves that are viewed as a single entity by the Network Management System. A node
can be any of the following:
up to two single optical shelves
a single electrical shelf
a single electrical shelf and one or more optical shelves
non-service affecting (NSA)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
GL-18
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refers to a condition that does not impact or interfere with network service.
NSA
See non-service affecting (p. GL-18) for definition.

NTP
See network time protocol (p. GL-18) for definition.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OA
See optical amplifier (p. GL-20) for definition.

OAMP
Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning.

OC-n
See optical carrier level-n (p. GL-20) for definition.

Occupational Safety and Health Administration) (OSHA)
OSHA is the main American federal agency charged with the enforcement of safety and
health legislation.
OCHAN or OCh
See optical channel (p. GL-20) for definition.

ODU
See optical demultiplexer (p. GL-20) for definition.

ODU-k
An optical logical connection with a specific rate. The rate can be either ODU-10G or
ODU-40G.
OEO
See optical-electrical-optical conversion (p. GL-21) for definition.

OOF
See out of frame (p. GL-22) for definition.

Open Systems Interconnection reference model (OSI)
A seven-layer model that pertains to the logical structure for communications networks
standardized by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO). Adherence to
the standard enables any OSI-compliant system to communicate with any other
OSI-compliant system.
Operations Support System (OSS)
A management system supporting a specific management function, such as alarm

surveillance or provisioning, in a carrier network. Many OSSs are large centralized
systems running on mainframes or minicomputers.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
GL-19
Issue 3 April 2009
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPR
See optical path restoration (p. GL-20) for definition.

OPS
See optical protection switch (p. GL-20) for definition.

optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM)
An OADM is a network element which allows a WDM transmission link to add or drop
optical signals, without converting the photonic stream into an electrical signal. Insertion
and extraction are done using optical filters or demultiplexers. An OADM can be either
non-reconfigurable or reconfigurable; in the latter case, optical switches need to be used.
optical amplifier (OA)
A device that amplifies an input optical signal without converting it into electrical form.
optical carrier level-n (OC-n)
A carrier rate specified in the SONET standard, where n is a numeric.

optical cell
A number of nodes connected by fiber in a predefined manner to provide route diversity

to each node. The simplest form of optical cell is a ring. Statically allocated wavelengths
are assigned within the context of one cell.
optical channel (OCHAN, Och)
An optical wavelength band for WDM optical communications.

optical demultiplexer (ODU)
Value/indicator used for an optical demultiplexer.

optical path protection (OPP)
A protection path is defined when the connection is set up. When a fault is detected on
the path, there is a switch-over from the working path to the protection path to restore
the traffic.
optical path restoration (OPR)
A recovery scheme that dynamically finds a protection path when a fault is detected.
This method is usually not capable of matching SDH/SONET recovery time periods (for
example, 50 ms).
optical power meter
An instrument that measures the amount of optical power present at the end of a fiber or
cable.
optical protection switch (OPS)
An optical circuit pack that provides WDM protection.

optical signal to noise ratio (OSNR)
The ratio between the optical signal power of the data signal and the power of the
optical noise signal.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
GL-20
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
optical supervisory channel (OSC)
A designated optical channel used to carry communications related to maintenance and

operational functions of the network rather than customer traffic.
The OSC supports the following communications: node-to-node, interworking, client
LAN, and orderwire communication.
optical transponder (OT)
An OT is a circuit pack that performs optical-to-electrical to optical (OEO) conversion.

OTs perform frequency adaptation between 1830 PSS equipment and external equipment
that is not optically compatible with 1830 PSS Transport. OTs also provide 3R
functionality (retiming, reshaping, reamplification) and perform fault management and
performance monitoring (non-intrusive monitoring) on the SONET/SDH and
WaveWrapper signal.
optical transport network (OTN)
A fiber-optic network designed to transport customer traffic, such as an SDH or SONET

network. See Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (p. GL-29) and Synchronous Optical
Network (p. GL-29) for examples.
optical-electrical-optical conversion (OEO)
The process of converting an optical signal to an electrical equivalent and then back to
optical data.
orderwire
A section of the supervisory signal that is used for communication between sites.
OSC
See optical supervisory channel (p. GL-20) for definition.

OSHA
See Occupational Safety and Health Administration) (p. GL-19) for definition.
OSI
See Open Systems Interconnection reference model (p. GL-19) for definition.
OSNR
See optical signal to noise ratio (p. GL-20) for definition.

OSP
See outside plant (p. GL-22) for definition.

OSS
See Operations Support System (p. GL-19) for definition.

OT
See optical transponder (p. GL-21) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
GL-21
Issue 3 April 2009
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OTN
See optical transport network (p. GL-21) for definition.

out of frame (OOF)
A state in which the frame alignment sequence of an SDH/SONET frame has not been
found for several consecutive frames.
outside plant (OSP)
Refers to outside the central office/building premises.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PCS
See physical coding sublayer (p. GL-22) for definition.

PDL
See polarization dependent loss (p. GL-22) for definition.

PDU
See protocol data unit (p. GL-23) for definition.

performance monitoring (PM)
Measures the quality of service and identifies any degrading or marginally operating
systems (before an alarm would be generated).
photonic cross-connect (PXC)
A fiber cross-connect that operates without optical-electrical-optical conversion. It can

have one or more wavelengths on each fiber or port.
photonic protection switch (PPS)
By provisioning of PPS cards (or optical splitters), automatic protection switch (APS)
are automatically created.
physical coding sublayer (PCS)
PCS layer monitoring used for Ethernet/FC ports.

PM
See performance monitoring (p. GL-22) for definition.

PMD
See polarization mode dispersion (p. GL-23) for definition.

point-to-point transmission
The transmission between two designated stations.

polarization dependent loss (PDL)
Loss of optical power that occurs during the polarization process. Polarized light waves
are light waves in which the vibrations occur in a single plane. The process of
transforming unpolarized light into polarized light is known as polarization (the
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
GL-22
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
orientation of the electric and magnetic field vectors of a propagating electro-magnetic

wave).
polarization mode dispersion (PMD)
PMD is an inherent property of all optical media. It is caused by the difference in the
propagation velocities of light in the orthogonal principal polarization states of the
transmission medium. The net effect is that if an optical pulse contains both polarization
components, then the different polarization components will travel at different speeds
and arrive at different times, smearing the received optical signal.
PPS
See photonic protection switch (p. GL-22) for definition.

protocol data unit (PDU)
A device used for the information exchange between equal protocol layers.
provisioning
Placing and configuring hardware and software required to activate a telecommunications

service for a customer. If the equipment is in place, provisioning may consist of creating
or modifying a customer record in a database to activate the services.
PXC
See photonic cross-connect (p. GL-22) for definition.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
QoS
See quality of service (p. GL-23) for definition.

quality of service (QoS)
A set of performance parameters that characterize the transmission quality over a given
virtual connection.
QoS can be quantitatively indicated by channel or system performance parameters, such
as signal-to-noise ratio, bit error ratio, message throughput rate, and call blocking
probability.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
rack
A rack is the standardized physical framework on which network equipment such as

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelves are mounted. A rack can contain more than one
shelf. Also called bay frames.
random jitter (RJ)
Random jitter is caused by thermal noise and may be modeled as a Gaussian process.
The peak-to-peak value of RJ is of a probabilistic nature, and thus any specific value
requires an associated probability.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
GL-23
Issue 3 April 2009
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
receiver
A terminal device that includes a detector and signal processing electronics. It functions
as an optical-to-electrical converter.
receiver sensitivity
The minimum optical power required at a receiver to deliver traffic at a guaranteed bit
error rate (BER). This parameter is specified back-to-back (without the effects of
chromatic dispersion or OSNR degradation).
reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM)
An optical network element with a configuration that can be changed remotely. The main
benefit of this remote reconfigurability is that it reduces Operating Expenditures (OPEX)
when operating a DWDM network. OPEX is reduced because the ROADM eases
network provisioning and line tuning at both the initial installation and any upgrades (to
increase the capacity or re-allocate resources to a new demand matrix).
regeneration
Electrical signal regeneration. Typically, OTUk Section regeneration and ODUk

transparency is implied in this context.
remote network monitoring (RMON)
Provides statistics for remote performance monitoring. Defined in standard RFC 2819.
repeater
A receiver and transmitter set designed to amplify attenuated signals. Repeaters are used
to extend operating range. See in-line amplifier (p. GL-13) for related term.
request for comment (RFC)
A document that describes the specifications of a technology. RFCs are used by the
Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) and other standards bodies.
restoration domain
A part of the network where traffic restoration is provided in isolation from the rest of
the network.
RFC
See request for comment (p. GL-24) for definition.

RIP
See routing information protocol (p. GL-25) for definition.

RJ
See random jitter (p. GL-23) for definition.

RMON
See remote network monitoring (p. GL-24) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
GL-24
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ROADM
See reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (p. GL-24) for definition.

routing information protocol (RIP)
RIP is an interior gateway protocol defined by the IETF (RIPv1 - RFC 1058 and RIPv2 2453) that specifies how routers exchange routing table information. RIP is a routing
protocol based on the distance vector algorithm. With RIP, routers periodically exchange
entire tables.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SA
See service affecting (p. GL-25) for definition.

SAN
See storage area network (p. GL-28) for definition.

SC
See shelf controller (p. GL-26) for definition.

scattering
The change of direction of light rays or photons after striking small particles. It may
also be regarded as the diffusion of a light beam caused by the inhomogeneity of the
transmitting material.
SCOT
See software control of transmission (p. GL-27) for definition.

SDH
See Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (p. GL-29) for definition.

secure shell (SSH)
A secure method of transmitting data.

segment
A pair of OSP fibers connecting two sites.

SELV
Safety extra low voltage.

service affecting (SA)
Refers to a condition that impacts or interferes with network service.

Service Level Agreement (SLA)
A contract between a network service provider and a customer that specifies, usually in
measurable terms, what services the network service provider will provide.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
GL-25
Issue 3 April 2009
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
services
Within the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 system, services can be offered directly to end
customers or be used internally to a network as transport infrastructure.
SFC
See static filter, CWDM (p. GL-28) for definition.

SFD
See static filter, DWDM (p. GL-28) for definition.

SFP
See small form-factor pluggable module (p. GL-27) for definition.

shared risk group (SRG)
A shared risk group is a group of items that are likely to be affected by a single fault.
The items therefore share the risk of experiencing the fault.
shelf
A shelf is a mechanical facility that is in general a housing for circuit packs. Shelves are
housed in Bays.
An Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 node consists of one or more physical shelves equipped
with cards. The shelf provides a chassis or cage with a backplane that can contain
multiple cards. The shelf is mounted in a rack. Each shelf has a shelf controller card,
plus its redundant mate. Every node has one shelf that has its shelf controllers
designated as the master controller for the node. The node appears as a single point in
the network topology to the network management system. Connections between nodes
use network links. See node (p. GL-18) for related term.
shelf controller (SC)
The SC card in a Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelf.

signaling transfer point (STP)
A node in a common channel signalling network with the function of transferring

messages from one signalling link to another and considered exclusively from the
viewpoint of the transfer
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
SNMP is the protocol used to communicate between the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32
nodes and the NMS. The SNMP traffic is carried over the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32
control network.
simplex
A single element (for example, a simplex connector is a single-fiber connector).

single-mode fiber (SMF)
A type of fiber which is very small in diameter and allows the light to be reflected in a
single way along the lightguide such that there is coherence in the arrival of the light
signal.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
GL-26
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
site
The termination location of OSP cables. Each site can contain one or more NEs and one
or more glass-through connections.
SLA
See Service Level Agreement (p. GL-25) for definition.

small form-factor pluggable module (SFP)
An optical modular, hot-pluggable transceiver (compatible with IEEE-802.3z) designed

for use with small form factor (SFF) connectors, offering high speed and physical
compactness. SFP transceivers perform at data speeds of up to 5 gigabits per second, and
possibly higher.
The SFP modules can be easily interchanged, therefore, electro-optical or fiber optic
networks can be upgraded and maintained more conveniently than has been the case with
traditional soldered-in modules. Rather than replacing an entire circuit board containing
several soldered-in modules, a single module can be removed and replaced for repair or
upgrading. This can result in a substantial cost savings, both in maintenance and in
upgrading efforts.
SMF
See single-mode fiber (p. GL-26) for definition.

SNCP
See Sub-Network Connection Protocol (p. GL-28) for definition.

SNMP
See Simple Network Management Protocol (p. GL-26) for definition.

software control of transmission (SCOT)
System software that controls the settings of EDFA pumps, VOAs, Raman pumps, DCM
pumps, DGEFs, and blockers in the ROADM NEs.
software generic (SW generic)
The whole software and (static) data associated with a particular NE release.
SONET
See Synchronous Optical Network (p. GL-29) for definition.

SONET wavelength service
The SONET wavelength service provides transport of SONET signals through the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 network.
span
A fiber link between NEs that can be unidirectional or bidirectional, depending on the
network design. Multiple segments in tandem are connected by glass-through
connections.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
GL-27
Issue 3 April 2009
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
span loss
Loss (in dB) of optical power due to the span transmission medium (includes fiber loss
and splice losses).
splice
A permanent connection of two optical fibers through fusion or mechanical means.

SRG
See shared risk group (p. GL-26) for definition.

SSH
See secure shell (p. GL-25) for definition.

SSMF
See standard single-mode fiber (p. GL-28) for definition.

ST
See straight-tip connector (p. GL-28) for definition.

standard single-mode fiber (SSMF)
This is the most common type of fiber deployed. This fiber was designed to provide zero
chromatic dispersion at 1310 nm, to support the early long-haul transmission systems
operating at this wavelength. It has a chromatic dispersion of at most 20 ps/(nm*km) in
the 1550 nm wavelength range and usually around 17 ps/(nm*km).
static filter, CWDM (SFC)
A static filter card used with a CWDM circuit pack.

static filter, DWDM (SFD)
A static filter card used with a DWDM circuit pack.

storage area network (SAN)
A high-speed special-purpose network (or subnetwork) that interconnects different kinds

of data storage devices with associated data servers on behalf of a larger network of
users.
STP
See signaling transfer point (p. GL-26) for definition.

straight-tip connector (ST)
Fiber optic connector that uses a bayonet-style coupling rather than a screw-on coupling.
STS, STS-n
See synchronous transport signal-n (p. GL-29) for definition.

Sub-Network Connection Protocol (SNCP)
An SDH version of UPSR. See SDH and UPSR.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
GL-28
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SW generic
See software generic (p. GL-27) for definition.

Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
A family of digital transmission rates used outside of the U.S. and Japan from 51.84
Mb/s to 40 Gb/s that allows the interconnection of transmission products around the
world.
SDH is the standard technology for synchronous data transmission on optical media. It is
the international equivalent of Synchronous Optical Network (SONET). Both SDH and
SONET technologies provide faster and less costly network interconnection than
traditional Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH) equipment.
Synchronous Optical Network (SONET)
A North-American standard developed by Telecordia and adapted by ANSI for the

optical long-distance networks.
SONET is the interface standard for synchronous optical-fiber transmission, applicable to
the physical layer of the OSI reference model. SONET has a basic bit rate of 51.840
mB/s, called OC-1, that is used to define higher rates (OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, and so on)
carried as a channel on an optical fiber.
synchronous signal
A data signal that is sent along with a clock signal.

synchronous transport signal-n (STS, STS-n)
The basic logical building block signal with a rate of 51.840 Mb/s for an STS-1 signal
and a rate of n times 51.840 Mb/s for an STS-n signal (where n is a numeric).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
tap
The entry point into a system module.

target identifier (TID)
A provisionable parameter used to identify an NE within a TL1 command.

TCA
See threshold crossing alert (p. GL-30) for definition.

TCP
See Transmission Control Protocol (p. GL-30) for definition.

TCP/IP
A suite of several networking protocols developed for the Internet that provides
communication across interconnected networks, between computers with diverse
hardware architectures and various operating systems. Some examples are FTP, SMTP,
and SNMP.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
GL-29
Issue 3 April 2009
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TDM
See time-division multiplexing (p. GL-30) for definition.

Telecommunications Management Network (TMN)
A network that interfaces with a telecommunications network at several points to receive

information from, and to control the operation of, the telecommunications network.
thermal noise
Noise resulting from thermally induced random fluctuation in the receivers load
resistance current.
threshold crossing alert (TCA)
A condition set when a counter exceeds a user-selected high or low threshold. A TCA
does not generate an alarm but is available on demand through the CIT.
TID
See target identifier (p. GL-29) for definition.

time-division multiplexing (TDM)
A multiplexing technique whereby two or more channels are derived from a transmission
medium by dividing access to the medium into sequential intervals. Each channel has
access to the entire bandwidth of the medium during its interval. This implies that one
transmitter uses one channel to send several bit streams of information.
TL1 (Transaction language 1)
An OS/NE machine-to-machine language. TL1 messages are expressed as ASCII strings.

TL1 messages and syntax are defined by Telecordia.
TMN
See Telecommunications Management Network (p. GL-30) for definition.

TOADM
See tunable optical add/drop multiplexer (p. GL-31) for definition.

topology
The pattern of interconnections between nodes in a network, such as a ring or hub. A

network topology database contains information regarding each link in the network.
traffic grooming
Traffic can be consolidated, aggregated, or separated to achieve efficiencies of routing.

Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)
A protocol used with the Internet Protocol to send data in the form of message units
between computers over the Internet. While IP handles the actual delivery of the data,
TCP keeps track of the individual units of data (called packets) that a message is divided
into for efficient routing through the Internet.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
GL-30
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
traps (SNMP)
SNMP traps are unacknowledged events sent from an agent to a manager. In a

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 network, the agent is the node and the manager is EMS.
tunable optical add/drop multiplexer (TOADM)
A tunable ROADM that yields the ultimate in operational flexibility, especially when
used in conjunction with transponders with tunable wavelength lasers.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
UDP
See user datagram protocol (p. GL-31) for definition.

UL
See Underwriters Laboratories (p. GL-31) for definition.

Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
A U.S. non-profit privately owned and operated product safety testing and certification
organization. Develops standards and test procedures for products, materials,
components, assemblies, tools and equipment, chiefly dealing with product safety.
unidirectional path-switched ring (UPSR)
A survivable, closed loop transport architecture that protects against cable cuts and node
failures by providing duplicate, geographically diverse paths for each service. Adjacent
nodes on the ring are interconnected using a single pair of optical fibers. One fiber
transports traffic in one direction (for example, clockwise), while the second fiber
transports traffic in the opposite direction (for example, counterclockwise). In a UPSR,
the source node bridges its outgoing traffic along opposite directions around the ring (on
paths provided by SONET synchronous transport channels). In contrast to BLSR, a
UPSR:
is path-specific as opposed to line specific
does not allow extra traffic (because traffic is bridged)
requires less coordination from source to destination (because the destination network
element can make all its decisions without involving the source)
UPSR
See unidirectional path-switched ring (p. GL-31) for definition.

user datagram protocol (UDP)
A minimal, datagram-oriented, transport network protocol above the IP network layer

that does not guarantee data ordering or delivery. Because it is datagram-oriented, each
send operation by the application results in the transmission of a single IP datagram.
This contrasts with the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) which is byte stream
oriented and guarantees the delivery and ordering of the bytes sent. Because it is a byte
stream oriented, a single send operation may result in a no IP datagrams (buffering), a
single IP datagram, or multiple IP datagrams.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
GL-31
Issue 3 April 2009
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
user services
Services that the network provider can sell to their customers, such as Ethernet service.
UTC
Coordinated universal time.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
variable optical attenuator (VOA)
A device used to set the attenuation of the power received over a fiber to a level
required by the receiving equipment.
VCAT
See virtual concatenation (p. GL-32) for definition.

very short reach (VSR)
A SONET/SDH interface that provides a low-cost interconnection solution of less than

300 meters between routers, switches, and DWDM systems.
virtual concatenation (VCAT)
Defines an inverse multiplexing procedure whereby the contiguous bandwidth is broken

into individual Virtual Containers (VC) at the source transmitter and logically
represented in a Virtual Concatenation Group (VCG). VCG members are transported as
individual VCs across the SONET/SDH network and recombined at the destination VCG
receiver. While contiguous concatenation requires concatenation functionality at each
network element, virtual concatenation do not.
virtual time-slot (VTS)
1830 PSS-1 GBE Edge Device has a fixed assignment of 10 Virtual Time Slots to each
line port.
VOA
See variable optical attenuator (p. GL-32) for definition.

VSR
See very short reach (p. GL-32) for definition.

VTS
See virtual time-slot (p. GL-32) for definition.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
wave division multiplexing (WDM)
WDM merges optical traffic onto one common fiber, sending several signals through one
fiber with different wavelengths of light. WDM allows flexibility in expanding
bandwidth. It reduces costly mux/demux function, and it reuses existing optical
signals.See dense wave division multiplexing (DWDM).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
GL-32
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
wave key
A component of the Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability that is used to identify

individual wavelengths through the network.
A wave key is a number between 1 and 2048. Each WDM wavelength in a 1830 PSS-32
network is uniquely identified by a pair of wave keys.
waveguide
A material medium that confines and guides a propagating electromagnetic wave.

waveguide coupler
A coupler that transfers light between planar waveguides.

wavelength
The distance between points of corresponding phase of two consecutive cycles of a

wave, typically measured in nanometers (nm). The wavelength is related to the
propagation velocity and the frequency. (Also called lambda.)
wavelength growth
A type of growth in which all eight wavelengths are added to a single line before more
lines are added.
Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability is a patented feature of Alcatel-Lucent 1830

PSS-32 which allows for the tracking of wavelengths through the Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-32 network, and for the measuring of the wavelengths optical power levels at
certain points along their paths.
WaveWrapper
WaveWrapper provides network management functions such as optical-layer performance

monitoring, error correction, and ring protection on a per-wavelength basis.
WDM
See wave division multiplexing (p. GL-32) for definition.

WDM demand
The termination points and signal type of a service that is to be carried by the WDM
network.
WDM line
A contiguous series of spans terminated by a ROADM at each end. A WDM line can be
a single span or a series of spans joined by the in-line amplifiers (ILAs).
Web user interface (WebUI)
A computer interface that provides web-based access to the network element (NE).
WebUI
See Web user interface (p. GL-33) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
GL-33
Issue 3 April 2009
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
XFP (10-gigabit small form factor pluggable module)
A pluggable optical transceiver module that combines transmitter and receiver functions
in one compact, flexible, and low cost package format. Up to sixteen XFP modules can
be arranged on a typical rack card, allowing for an unprecedented level of data density.
XFP is protocol independent, are can support OC-192/STM-64, 10 Gigabit Ethernet, 10
Gigabit Fibre Channel, and G.709 data streams in routers, switches and network cards.
Reaches ranging from Very Short Reach (VSR) to Long Reach (LR) can also be
supported.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Y-coupler
A coupler that has three waveguide legs joined at the center in a Y shape which
connects an input port to two output ports or two input ports to a single output port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ZIC (zero installation craft)
An NE-imbedded graphical user interface (GUI) application for local operation and
maintenance.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
GL-34
Index
Numerics
1830 PSS key features, 1-3

1830 PSS-1 GBE
Edge Device, 1-6
linear network, 3-23
ring network, 3-24
1830 PSS-32
central office shelf (COSHF)

universal shelf, 2-29
chromatic dispersion
compensation, 2-10
command line interface (CLI),
2-40
common equipment cards
description, 3-1
shelf dimensions & weight,

9-2
compliance standards, 2-38
shelves, 4-2
configurations
zero-touch transparent
photonic network, 1-5
.............................................................
A airflow, 6-7
network, 8-1
node, 8-1
cooling
shelf, 6-7
alarm reporting, 5-3
core optics modules, 4-15
alien wavelength
CWDM
protection, 2-24
Degree-2 TOADM, 3-8

Degree-3 FOADM, 3-12
Degree-3 TOADM mesh, 3-8
DWDM
wavelength channels, 2-2
.............................................................
E egress adjustment, 5-23
Engineering and Planning Tool

(EPT), 6-1
Engineering rules
TOADM, 2-25
equipment controller
active master, 4-10
subtending, 4-11
equipment controller (EC),
2-32, 4-8
filters, 2-28
.............................................................
amplifier nodes, 2-9
networks, 2-28
automated optical power

management system, 5-20
optical interface, 2-29
automatic module detection,

4-42
CWR8
colorless wavelength router,
4-16
.............................................................
C cards
electrical, description, 5-1

optical, description, 4-1
F failure rates, 8-2
FAN, 2-34
FAN module, 4-12
Fault management, 2-41
.............................................................
fault management, 5-2
D DCM modules, 4-45
field-replaceable units
DCM shelf, 4-2
(FRUs), 8-14
Degree-2 FOADM, 3-11
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
IN-1
Issue 3 April 2009
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FOADM
architecture, 2-3
network element transmission,

3-5
FOADM Hub, 3-10
.............................................................
FOADM line terminal, 3-10
O O-SCNP, 2-22
.............................................................
G gateway network element
(GNE), 2-40
grounding
shelf, 6-2
.............................................................
H hardware
architecture, 2-1
protection
accessing web site, 7-6

obtaining a login, 7-6
OMD shelf, 4-2
on-line customer support, xviii,
7-3
operating environment, 6-6, 6-6
.............................................................
optical 1+1 protection, 2-19
ILA, 2-11
ingress adjustment, 5-22
interconnected rings, 3-3
Interworking
with existing networks, 1-8
.............................................................
L Line drivers
optical amplifiers, 4-15

linear configuration, 3-2
Optical amplifiers
line drivers, 2-9
optical transponder
11STAR1, 2-12
11STAR1 OT, 4-24
11STGE12 OT, 2-14, 4-35
11STMM10 OT, 2-13, 4-29
OSC, 2-9, 2-40
OT modules
optical transponders, 4-21
OT protection, 4-39
.............................................................
.............................................................
M Management interfaces, 2-39
P packaging collection
mesh configuration, 3-4
recovery requirements, xix
.............................................................
pluggable modules, 4-41
N NE software
Pluggables
ordering information, A-3

network configurations, 2-43
modules, 4-12
OLCS
OPS module, 4-42
in-line amplifier
power filter, 4-11
power filters, 2-34
description, xvii
ILA node, 3-13
sources, 6-5
OEO conversion, 2-18
OPS, 2-19
shelf, 6-2
SFP, XFP, 2-36

power
monitoring, 6-6
optical layer, 2-24

protection configurations, 4-39
.............................................................
R Recycling/take-back
disposal, xix
ring configuration, 3-2
ROADM, 2-5
.............................................................
S SDH/SONET, 2-42
Service cards
blade-based, 1-5
SFC2/4/8
static filter CWDM, 4-20
SFD44
as OMD shelf, 4-47
static filter, 2-3
SFD44 module, 4-20
SFD5, 2-4
SFD5 module, 4-18
shelf
cooling, 6-7
description, 3-1
power and grounding, 6-2
shelf configurations, 2-37
shelf ID, 4-10
shelves
description, 3-1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
Issue 3 April 2009
IN-2
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SNMP, 2-39
static filter, 2-4
Static filter DWDM modules,
4-18
SVAC module, 4-42, 4-44
system planning
node, 6-1
system timing
network, 6-1
.............................................................
T technical specification tables,
9-4
threshold crossing alert, 5-7
TL1, 2-39
TOADM, 2-6
TOADM networks
linear, 3-18
TOADM rings, 3-15
interconnected, 3-16
TOADM terminal node, 3-9
.............................................................
U universal shelf, 4-2, 4-3
user interface panel (USRPNL),

2-34, 4-13
.............................................................
W Wavelength Tracker, 2-15
monitoring, 5-24
performance, 1-8
wave keys, 5-24
WDM
platform family, 1-5
Web GUI, 2-40
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PN 8DG59474 AAAA
IN-3
Issue 3 April 2009

Product Information and Planning Guide R1.0

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Product Information and Planning Guide R1.0

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Interference Information: Part 15 of FCC Rules

Packaging collection and recovery requirements

Overview of Alcatel-Lucent product portfolio

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS product family

Release 1.0 feature list

Feature release history

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE Edge Device

How to use this document

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch PSS-32 (1830 PSS-32)

DWDM filter architectures

Optical amplification and dispersion compensation

DWDM engineering rules

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Hardware

Operation, administration, and maintenance

Topologies and configurations

In-line amplifier (ILA)

Mixed TOADM/FOADM network topologies

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 NE

Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning

Automatic power adjustments

Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability

NE software installation, upgrades, and backouts

System planning and engineering

Alcatel-Lucent Engineering and Planning Tool

Quality and reliability

Design and development

Sparing Tables for Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs)

Manufacturing and field deployment

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelf

Technical specification tables

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Engineering and Planning Tool

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32

1830 PSS-32 common equipment

1830 PSS-32 protection

1830 PSS-32 dispersion compensation modules

1832 PSS-32 kit: customer-replaceable items

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 and 1830 PSS-1 GBE pluggable optics

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE

100-GHz DWDM wavelength scheme

SFD5 channel coverage

OSC SFP span loss support

CWDM filter scheme

OTN performance monitoring

DWDM wavelength transmission

CWDM wavelength transmission

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 card list and limits

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 DCMs

SONET Section PM parameters

SDH Regenerator Section PM parameters

OTUk and ODUk PM parameters (DW group)

PCS PM parameter definitions

Ethernet Statistics definitions (ETH group)

Interface PM Statistics definitions (INF group)

Power dissipation for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32

Ambient temperature and humidity limits

Failure rates and MTBFs for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32

Channel plan (DWDM)

Channel plan (CWDM)

Filter specifications (Part 1 of 2)

Filter specifications (Part 2 of 2)

Passband center wavelength